Yamaha PM1D Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PM1D

Categorie: Audiomixers

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

PM1D System Software V1.5

Supplementary Manual

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Copying or distributing this manual in part or in whole using any method without the written permission of

Yamaha Corporation is prohibited.

Tr ade marks

Company names and product names are trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Symbols such as ® and TM are not explicitly given in this document.

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may

appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

Contents

Additions/changes in V1.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Changes to the constantly-displayed screen. . 6

Upper part of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Lower part of the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

DUAL CONSOLE mode added . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

About Dual Console mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

About scene/library memories. . . . . . . . . . . 13

About the console shutdown function. . . . . 14

DUAL CONSOLE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Connections in Dual Console mode . . . . . . 17

Establishing communication between con-

soles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Transmitting only the necessary scenes / li-

braries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Limitations of Dual Console mode. . . . . . . . 21

Powering-off the consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Cascade connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

About cascade connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

CASCADE screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Cascade connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Establishing a cascade connection. . . . . . . . 31

Cautions when using cascade connection . . 33

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) . . . . . 35

GPI screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Using GPI IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Using GPI OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Fader Start function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

FADER START screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Using the Fader Start function. . . . . . . . . . . 45

Tap Tempo function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Added functions in the USER DEFINE screen 52

Input channel panel assignments . . . . . . . . . 52

PANEL ASSIGN screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Switching the panel assign setting . . . . . . . 55

Horizontal pair and vertical pair . . . . . . . . . . 56

Mix minus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

New functions in the PAN/ROUTING screen 58

Using mix minus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Cautions regarding mix minus . . . . . . . . . . 60

Job select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Mix send on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Mix send point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Mix send level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Mix send pan/balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Auto Store function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Using Auto Store from the screen . . . . . . . . 64

Using Auto Store from the [STORE] switch . .65

Global Paste function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

GLOBAL PASTE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Using the Global Paste function . . . . . . . . . .68

Parameter control via CONTROL CHANGE and

NRPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Using CONTROL CHANGE / NRPN messag-

es to record/play parameter changes . . . . .74

Manual Fading function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

New functions in the FADE TIME screen . . . 76

Using Manual Fading (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Using Manual Fading (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Unit name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

UNIT NAME screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Naming a unit/port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Matrix send shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

DCA mute indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Oscillator improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Improvements in the OSCILLATOR screen . 86

Improvements in the INPUT PATCH / OUT-

PUT PATCH screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

USB PC (computer) connection . . . . . . . . . . 89

Automatic scrolling in the CH to MIX screen

and MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen. . . . . . . . 90

ON/OFF button for COMM IN . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Added functions in the PREFERENCE screen. .92

Supplementary explanation for existing func-

tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program

Change Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

MIDI control change NRPN (Non Registered

Parameter Number) assignment table . . . . 94

MIDI control change parameter assignment

table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

This manual explains the functionality that has been added or changed in PM1D system software V1.5. Please

refer to the original manual in conjunction with this manual.

*In cases where the display of the console (CS1D) differs from the screen of the PM1D Manager application program,

explanations that apply only to PM1D Manager are indicated as [PM1D Manager].

Additions/changes in V1.5

This section brieﬂy summarizes the additions and changes in PM1D system software V1.5. For details on each

function, refer to the appropriate page.

■

Changes to the constantly-displayed

screen

Major changes have been made to the items that are

always shown in the top and bottom of the screen

(

→

p.6).

■

New DUAL CONSOLE mode

As an operation mode of the PM1D system, a DUAL

CONSOLE mode has been added, allowing two con-

soles to be used with one system (

→

p.11).

■

Cascade connection

Two systems can now be cascade-connected. A cas-

cade-connected system can send any bus output to

the same bus of the other system (

→

p.27).

■

GPI connector is now enabled

The D-sub 25 pin GPI connector provided on the

console and engine can now be used to input/output

eight channels of control signals (

→

p.35).

■

REMOTE connector is now enabled

The D-sub 9-pin REMOTE connector of the console

and engine can now be used to control a recorder or

other device (

→

p.35).

■

Fader Start function

You can now specify that various commands be

transmitted from an assigned connector when the

level of a speciﬁed channel is raised above –60 dB or

lowered to –

∞

dB (

→

p.42).

■

Tap tempo function

A “tap tempo” function has been added, allowing

you to manually set the TEMPO parameter of an

internal effect by tapping an external switch con-

nected to the GPI connector (

→

p.51).

■

Expanded USER DEFINE functions

In conjunction with the addition of various func-

tionality, the user-deﬁnable functions have been sig-

niﬁcantly expanded (

→

p.52).

■

Input channel panel assignment can

now be selected

The input channels assigned to INPUT blocks 1–4 of

the console can now be freely speciﬁed in blocks of

twelve consecutive channels. Similarly, the ST IN

channels assigned to ST IN blocks 1–2 can also be

assigned in blocks of two adjacent channels (

→

p.52).

Also, the DISPLAY SELECT section of the TRACK-

ING RECALL screen now has an INPUT [PANEL]

button that causes the current panel assignment state

to be displayed in the screen.

■

New pairing mode

In addition to the existing pairing mode in which

adjacent input channels 1+2, 3+4, ... can be paired,

you can now use “vertical pairing mode” in which

input channels 1+49, 2+50 ... are paired. This mode

allows you to use a single fader as if it were a stereo

fader (

→

p.56).

■

Mix minus setting

A MIX MINUS button has been added to the CH to

MIX screen of the PAN/ROUTING function. This

button provides a simple way to subtract only a spe-

ciﬁc channel from the signal that is being sent to a

certain MIX bus. This is useful when a performer or

announcer wishes to monitor the sound without his

own voice (

→

p.58).

■

Job select

Now you can move the cursor to a parameter and

press the [SHIFT] + [ENTER] keys to access a

popup-menu that lists the jobs available for that

parameter. The cursor will turn yellow to indicate

parameters for which you can use this function

(

→

p.61).

■

Auto Store function

When storing a scene, you can now use an “Auto

Store function” that automatically selects the unit,

patch, or name library number and title (

→

p.64).

■

Global Paste function

Using the new “Global Paste function,” the settings of

any channel or parameter in the current scene can be

copied and pasted to one or more scenes in scene

memory. This is a convenient way by which changes

in the current scene can be applied to previously-

stored scenes (

→

p.66).

Additions/changes in V1.5

■

Operate parameters via control

changes

Now you can use MIDI control changes to remotely

control PM1D parameters from an external device,

or transmit console operations as control changes

(

→

p.71).

■

Manual fading

A new “Manual Fading” function has been added.

When recalling a scene for which a fade time has

been set, you can now use the [DATA] encoder to

fade in the positive or negative direction. This is con-

venient when you want to vary the volume in con-

junction with action on stage (

→

p.76).

■

Unit name

You can now assign a unit name to each port of an

input/output unit or card. If necessary, the unit

name of each port can be displayed in the ﬁeld in

which the short name of an input channel was shown

in the screen (

→

p.79).

■

Matrix send shortcut

The send level from a MIX channel or STEREO A/B

channel to a MATRIX channel can now be controlled

from a panel encoder (

→

p.82).

■

DCA mute indicator

When you mute a DCA group, the [ASSIGN DCA]

LED of the channels associated with that DCA can

now be made to blink if desired. This is convenient

when you want to know which channels are actually

being muted (

→

p.85).

■

Improved oscillator

The oscillator now lets you use two sine waves simul-

taneously. You can specify the frequency and level for

each, and output them independently to odd-num-

bered / even-numbered channels (

→

p.86).

■

Improvements in the INPUT PATCH /

OUTPUT PATCH screens

The unit name of each port is now displayed in the

UNIT PATCH / OUTPUT PATCH screens. Vertical

and horizontal red lines can also indicate the cur-

rently selected grid (

→

p.89).

■

USB connection to a PC

In addition to the serial connection supported on

earlier versions, you can now use a USB connection

to connect the PM1D to a PC (

→

p.89).

■

Improved operation in the CH to MIX

and MATRIX/ST ROUTING screens

Cursor movement now follows scrolling in the CH to

MIX function of the PAN/ROUTING function and

in the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen of the

MATRIX/ST function (

→

p.90).

■

ON/OFF button added to COMM IN

The COMM IN function can now be turned ON/

OFF independently (

→

p.91).

■

Additional functions in the PREFER-

ENCE screen

A variety of setting items have been added in the

PREFERENCE screen (

→

p.92).

■

Channel selection can now be sepa-

rately speciﬁed for the AUTO DISPLAY

function (SELECTED CH ON/OFF but-

ton)

One of the AUTO DISPLAY functions automatically

moves the cursor to the corresponding parameter

when you switch the channel that is being operated.

In the PREFERENCE screen AUTO DISPLAY sec-

tion, this function can now be switched on/off inde-

pendently of the other AUTO DISPLAY items

(

→

p.92).

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Changes to the constantly-displayed screen

In PM1D system software V1.5, the following changes have been made to the items that are always shown in

the top and bottom of the console display.

Upper part of the display

DISPLAY FUNCTION

Shows the currently selected function as an abbrevia-

tion.

Hint

Click this to switch between the FUNCTION MENU

screen and the screen of the currently selected func-

tion. (Equivalent to the MENU button of the previ-

ous version.)

CONNECTION

Indicates the status of the connections between the

engine(s) and console(s).

•

Console 1/2

If DUAL CONSOLE is selected as the console opera-

tion mode (SYSTEM CONFIGURATION in the

SYSTEM CONNECTION screen, etc.), this indicates

whether that console (CS1D) is speciﬁed as console 1

or as console 2 (

→

p.19).

The color of this numeral will depend on how CAS-

CADE is set for the operation mode. In the case of

CASCADE OFF or CASCADE ON [MASTER], this

numeral will be white on a black background. If

CASCADE ON [SLAVE], this numeral will be black

on a white background.

If cascade communication between the systems

cannot be established even though CASCADE

ON is selected, this numeral will blink.

•

DUAL

If DUAL CONSOLE is selected as the operation

mode for the console, “DUAL” will be displayed here

(

→

p.19).

If communication between the consoles cannot

be established even though DUAL CONSOLE

mode is selected, an X mark will be displayed

over the “DUAL” indication.

•

Engine A/B

If the PM1D system is being used in mirror mode,

this indicates which engine (A or B) is currently

enabled, and the number of usable channels. The

enabled engine is shown on a green background. You

can also click this button to switch between engines

A/B.

If the engine that should be enabled is not oper-

ating normally, or if the connection has been

broken, an X mark will be displayed over the A

or B symbol.

PANEL STATUS

Indicates the current panel assignment (the channel

numbers assigned to the INPUT block / ST IN

block).

FADER FLIP

Indicates the state of the FADER FLIP switch located

on the console panel (i.e., whether [MIX] or [CH] is

on). You can also use these buttons to switch [MIX]

and [CH].

Hint

If the FADER FLIP LINK button is turned off in the

UTILITY function PANEL ASSIGN screen (a new

screen added in V1.5), fader ﬂip can be switched

independently for INPUT blocks 1/2 (left) and 3/4

(right) (

→

p.54).

1 2 3 5 6

Console 1/2

DUAL Engine A/B

Changes to the constantly-displayed screen

5 SCENE MEMORY

Displays the number and title used when most

recently recalling/storing the currently selected scene

memory. Depending on the state of the scene, the

following symbols may be displayed in the margin of

the SCENE MEMORY ﬁeld.

• EDIT

This symbol will be displayed if you edit a parameter

of a scene, patch, unit, or name after recalling/storing

a scene memory. When you recall/store a scene

memory, this symbol will disappear. (However, it

may not disappear if Recall Safe is turned on.)

• TC

This symbol will be displayed if the EVENT

RECALLING button is set to ENABLE in the TC

EVENT screen. You cannot rewrite scene memories

or patch/unit/name libraries while this symbol is dis-

played. This means that you will also be unable to use

functions such as store, undo store, link on/off, title

editing, sort, or load.

• PREVIEW

In PREVIEW mode, this symbol will be displayed.

In PREVIEW mode, the scene number and title will

be displayed in white characters on a red back-

ground.

• READ ONLY

• PROTECT

The READ ONLY symbol will be displayed if the

scene currently selected for store/recall is read-only

(00.0-00.9). The PROTECT symbol will be displayed

if protect is turned on.

6 Other symbols

The following symbols will be displayed at the upper

right of the display according to the state of the con-

sole.

• SOLO/CUE

According to the current solo or cue state, this area

will display the following symbols:

SOLO, EFFECT CUE, SUBIN CUE, INPUT CUE,

DCA CUE, OUTPUT CUE, KEY IN CUE

• TB/OSC (Talkback / Oscillator)

The TB symbol will be displayed if talkback is on,

and the OSC symbol will be displayed if the oscillator

is on.

Hint

If the above operations occur simultaneously, they

will be displayed in the order of TB → OSC.

• COMM IN (Communication In)

If COMM IN is turned on in the MONITOR A

screen, the COMM IN symbol will be displayed on a

green background. In addition if a port is assigned to

COMM IN, the background of this symbol will

change to red when the input signal passes through

the COMM IN gate.

• LCR

The LCR symbol will be displayed if LCR is turned

on for at least one input channel or output channel

(in the LCR screen of the PAN/ROUTING or

MATRIX/ST function). In addition if the CENTER

BUS CONTROL button (in the LCR screen of the

PAN/ROUTING or MATRIX/ST function) is on, the

LCR [B] symbol will be displayed.

• RS422, MIDI, BUSY

- RS422

This symbol will be displayed when a response to a

transport command sent via the RS422 connector

is received.

- MIDI

This symbol will be displayed when a program

change or control change is received.

- BUSY

This symbol will be displayed during startup or

while internal memory or a PC card ﬁle is being

accessed.

Hint

• If the above states occur simultaneously, they will

be displayed in descending priority of RS422 →

MIDI → BUSY.

• The RS422 and MIDI symbols will remain visible

for approximately 200 msec after reception is com-

pleted.

• The BUSY symbol will disappear immediately

when access is completed.

• MANUAL FADE, AUTO FADE, TRACKING

ENABLE

- MANUAL FADE

This symbol will be displayed if Manual Fading is

enabled (even if a fade operation is not actually

being performed) (→p.76).

- AUTO FADE

This symbol will be displayed while Auto Fading is

being executed.

- TRACKING (Tracking Recall)

This symbol will be displayed if tracking recall is

enabled (the TRACKING RECALL button is set to

ENABLE in the TRACKING RECALL screen).

Hint

If the above states occur simultaneously, they will be

displayed in descending priority of MANUAL FADE

→ AUTO FADE → TRACKING.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

[PM1D Manager]

In PM1D Manager, the following information will be displayed instead of 3 PANEL STATUS and 4 FADER

FLIP described on page 6.

1 Connection status

This area of the PM1D Manager screen will indicate

the status of the connection between the PC and the

console or engine.

• ........... Indicates that a cable is con-

nected between the PC and

console or engine, but com-

munication has not been

established.

• ........... Indicates that a cable is con-

nected between the PC and

console or engine, and that

communication has been

established. In this state, the

PM1D system can be con-

trolled from the computer.

• ...........Indicates that either the

cable is not connected,

or that the other device

is not powered-on.

2 Connection destination / connection

method

In OFFLINE or ONLINE states, this area will

show a graphic that indicates the connection des-

tination (console or engine), and the connector

(COM port name or USB port name) that is

selected in the Communication Port (Option

menu) of Communication Setup.

Lower part of the display

The lower part of the display is divided into the following four parts. Click the √/® buttons at the lower left of the

screen to switch the items that are shown.

■ CONSOLE STATUS

1 Select buttons

Click the √/® buttons to switch the items that are

displayed.

2 IN SEL (Selected input channel)

Indicates the input channel that is currently selected

by the [SEL] switch.

3 NAME MODE

Selects whether the display will show the short name

of the input channel (CH NAME), or the name of

the unit assigned to that input channel (UNIT

NAME) (→p.79).

4 MODULE FLIP

Indicates the on/off state of the MODULE [FLIP]

switch in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block.

You can also click this button to change the module

ﬂip setting.

Hint

• If the PATTERN CHANGE button is turned on in

the MODULE FLIP BUTTON MODE section of

the UTILITY function PANEL ASSIGN screen (a

new screen added in V1.5), the indications of these

buttons will change to “PATT.” In this case, they are

used to switch channel assign patterns for the

INPUT block (→p.52).

• If the MODULE FLIP / PATTERN CHANGE

LINK button in the same screen is turned off, set-

tings for module ﬂip and patterns can be made

independently for the left and right INPUT blocks

(→p.54).

2 3 4 65 71

Changes to the constantly-displayed screen

5 MIX SEND NO. (Mix send number)

Indicates the number of the MIX bus that is cur-

rently selected as the send destination for INPUT

blocks 1–4.

6 MASTER FADER

Indicates the function that is currently assigned to

DCA faders 1–12 (DCA GROUP block).

7 OUT SEL (Selected output channel)

Indicates the output channel that is currently

selected by the [SEL] switch.

[PM1D Manager]

In PM1D Manager, the following information will be displayed instead of 4–6 described above.

1 DIRECT RECALL / MUTE MASTER

According to the setting of the RECALL button or

MUTE button, these buttons either directly recall

twelve previously-assigned scenes, or switch mute

groups 1–12 on/off. These buttons have the same

function as SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches on

the panel of the console.

■ USER DEFINE

1 Select buttons

Click the √/® buttons to switch the items that are

displayed. If you click the middle, you will return to

the CONSOLE STATUS display.

2 User deﬁne buttons

These list the functions that are assigned to the USER

DEFINE [1]–[8] switches in the USER DEFINE

block of the console. You can also click a button to

execute the corresponding function.

Hint

Functions for the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches

can be assigned in the UTILITY function USER

DEFINE screen.

1 2

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

■ CONSOLE GPI IN

1 Select buttons

Click the √/® buttons to switch the items that are

displayed. If you click the middle, you will return to

the CONSOLE STATUS display.

2 Console GPI IN test buttons

These buttons list the functions that are assigned via

the GPI connector of the console to GPI IN (ports 1–

8). You can also click a button to test the correspond-

ing function (→p.40).

Hint

• Functions for the GPI IN test buttons can be

assigned in the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen.

• Even if you are not using the GPI port, you can use

these buttons in place of the USER DEFINE

switches by assigning functions to the GPI IN test

buttons.

■ ENGINE GPI IN

1 Select buttons

Click the √/® buttons to switch the items that are

displayed. If you click the middle, you will return to

the CONSOLE STATUS display.

2 Engine GPI IN test buttons

These buttons list the functions that are assigned via

the GPI connector of the engine to GPI IN (ports 1–

8). You can also click a button to test the correspond-

ing function (→p.40).

Hint

• Functions for the GPI IN test buttons can be

assigned in the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen.

• Even if you are not using the GPI port, you can use

these buttons in place of the USER DEFINE

switches by assigning functions to the GPI IN test

buttons.

Since the GPI IN of the engine can be controlled

only from console 1, the GPI IN test buttons will

not be displayed in DUAL CONSOLE mode if con-

sole 2 is speciﬁed.

However in PM1D Manager, the display is not

restricted even if console 2 is speciﬁed in DUAL

CONSOLE mode when OFFLINE.

1 2

DUAL CONSOLE mode added

As an operation mode of the PM1D system, version 1.5 adds Dual Console mode, in which two console are

used by one system. The functionality and operation of Dual Console mode is explained below.

In the following explanation, functions and operations that apply only to console 1 are indicated as [Console

1], and functions and operations that apply only to console 2 as [Console 2].

If the console (CS1D) you are using was manufactured before June 2002, you may be unable to select Dual Console

mode even if connections are correct. In this case, you will need to have a gate array rewritten in order to use Dual

Console mode. Please contact your Yamaha dealer.

It is necessary to have the gate array rewritten only if you wish to use Dual Console mode. If you are using the sys-

tem in other modes, rewriting is not necessary, and you may continue using the system without change.

About Dual Console mode

Dual Console mode is a mode in which two consoles

(CS1D) are used in a single PM1D system. In this mode,

two consoles share one (in standard mode) or two (in

mirror mode) engines (DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}). Here are

some examples of how Dual Console mode can be used:

• Use two consoles to control the main mix and mon-

itor mix

In this application, the same input channels are

patched to the panels of both consoles. One engineer

controls the main mix, and another engineer con-

trols the monitor mix.

• Use two consoles to control the same mix from two

locations

In this application, two consoles are placed in sepa-

rate locations (for example one near the stage and

the other in the audience seating), and two engineers

control the same mix.

• Use two consoles to control 96 channels simulta-

neously

In this application, input channels 1–48 are patched

to one console, and input channels 49–96 to the

other console, allowing one or more engineers to

control 96 channels simultaneously.

In Dual Console mode, the console that is connected

to the engine will operate as the master unit, and the

other console will operate as the slave unit. However,

in order to avoid confusion with the master/slave

relationship in “engine cascade” (described later in

this document), we refer to the master unit as “con-

sole 1,” and the slave unit as “console 2.”

Console 1 and console 2 differ in the functions they can

control, and in the order of priority when operations

overlap. The differences between consoles 1 and 2 can be

summarized as follows.

• Items that are linked between consoles 1 and 2

In general, changes that you make to the mix param-

eters in the current scene are linked between consoles

1 and 2. (An operation on one console will be

reﬂected by the other.) Operations of console 2 will

not nullify operations of console 1. Even if differ-

ences occur between the states of console 1 and con-

sole 2, the engine will always be set according to

console 1. If a difference occurs between parameters

that should be linked, you can select whether to copy

all scenes and all libraries when connection occurs,

or to copy them as desired after connection.

• Items that are operated independently between

consoles 1 and 2

Channel selections by the [SEL] switches, changes in

panel layout such as fader ﬂip or module ﬂip, and

screen switching by the function switches are not

linked between consoles. These operations can be

made independently on each console.

• Items that can be operated only by console 1

Most operations that affect the core of the system,

such as switching between engines, switching the

word clock master, and changing the connections

between components, can be performed only by con-

sole 1. The settings of most items can be viewed on

the console 2 screen, but cannot be modiﬁed.

• PC connection

A PC (PM1D Manager) can be connected only to

console 1 or to the engine. It cannot be connected to

console 2. Nor is it possible to connect and use two

or more PCs simultaneously.

Whether a parameter is linked when operated, and

the priority between consoles 1 and 2, will differ

depending on the screen. The table on the following

page summarizes the operation of each screen in

Dual Console mode.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Function Screen

Linked

Indepen-

dent

Remarks

→21↔2

EFFECT

GEQ

SCENE

MEMORY

Only the trigger for number and store/recall operations is

transmitted and received.

SORT-related settings can be operated only on console 1

RECALL SAFE

FADE TIME

DIRECT RECALL

TRACKING RECALL

GLOBAL PASTE

MIDI/GPI/TC

MIDI PGM CHANGE

MIDI CTRL CHANGE

GPI

• GPI IN settings

Console 1 or PC:

Only console 1 / engine port can be set

Console 2:

Only console 2 port can be set

• GPI OUT settings

Console 1 or PC:

Only console 1 / engine port can be set

Console 2:

Only console 2 port can be set. However, engine port can

be viewed

TC EVENT

FADER START

Cannot be set on a PC connected to a system that includes

a console

UTILITY

PREFERENCE

USER DEFINE

From system software 1.5, this can be set/operated indepen-

dently for consoles 1 and 2 and the PC

LOAD / SAVE

There are limitations on the parameters that can be loaded

by console 2

PANEL ASSIGN

PAIR MODE

SYS/W.CLOCK

SYSTEM

CONNECTION

Buttons that switch the wiring of console 2 itself can also be

operated from console 2

DUAL CONSOLE

CASCADE

INPUT UNIT

Virtual units can be created only from console 1.

Unit parameters are linked.

OUTPUT UNIT

Virtual units can be created only from console 1.

Unit parameters are linked.

WORD CLOCK

DITHER

UNIT NAME

METER

METERING POINT and PEAK HOLD can be operated only

from console 1

MON/CUE

TALKBACK

q Only TB OUT is in common

OSCILLATOR

O The two consoles share one 2CH set of oscillators.

2TR IN

Settings other than INPUT CONSOLE can also be operated

from console 2

ST OUT DIGITAL

MONITOR A

MONITOR B

—— —

Cannot be operated, since in Dual Console mode, this func-

tions as MONITOR A of the other console

CUE/SOLO

Cue is independent, solo function on/off can be operated

only from console 1

Linked if the CUE MODE button is set to SOLO ON, or if in

the SYS/W.CLOCK function DUAL CONSOLE screen CUE

ON/OFF is turned ON.

DUAL CONSOLE mode added

• Linked (1→2).............Screens in which the con-

sole 1/2 settings are linked.

However, they can be oper-

ated only by console 1.

• Linked (1↔2).............Screens in which the con-

sole 1/2 settings are linked.

They can be operated from

either console 1 or 2.

• Independent...............Screens in which settings

can be made independently

by consoles1 and 2.

• O ..................................Indicates that all parame-

ters in the corresponding

function/screen will operate

as indicated (independent,

linked 1→2, or linked

1↔2).

•

.................................Indicates that some param-

eters in this function/screen

are exceptions, and operate

other than indicated.

About scene/library memories

When a scene or library is stored or recalled on one con-

sole, the other will follow this operation. However, this

simply means that a command of “recall scene number

***.*” is transmitted to the other console; the result of

the store/recall is not conveyed to the other console.

Thus, in order to completely synchronize the two con-

soles, it is necessary to match the current memory (the

scene, patch, units, names currently shown in the

panel), the scene memories and libraries that are used,

and some of the setup data.

If this data does not match, scene/library recall opera-

tions may cause the settings of the current scene to

become completely different between the two consoles.

Data can be synchronized between the two consoles in

the following ways.

• Tr ansfer all data

In this method, all data is transmitted via the CON-

TROL I/O connector from console 1 to console 2.

You can perform this operation in a single step when

you initiate Dual Console mode.

• Tr ansfer only necessary data

In this method, only the scenes and libraries that will

be used are manually transmitted from console 1 to

console 2.

• Tr ansfer all data via memory card

In this method, all data of console 1 is saved on a

memory card, and this data is then loaded into con-

sole 2. To use this method, use the LOAD/SAVE

screen of console 1 to save all data on a memory card,

then insert that card into console 2 and load the data.

(For details, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Soft-

ware),” p.40.)

OUT PATCH

OUTPUT PATCH

If a discrepancy occurs between the patching when a scene/

unit is recalled, the patching of console 1 will take priority

INSERT PATCH

INSERT POINT

INSERT VIEW

NAME

OUT INSERT

OUT EQ

OUT COMP

OUT DELAY

OUT DCA MUTE

MATRIX/ST

OUT CH VIEW

IN PATCH

INPUT PATCH

If a discrepancy occurs between the patching when a scene/

unit is recalled, the patching of console 1 will take priority

DIRECT OUT PATCH

INSERT PATCH

INSERT/DIRECT POINT

INSERT/DIRECT VIEW

NAME

HA/INSERT

IN EQ

IN GATE/COMP

IN DELAY

IN DCA/MUTE

PAN/ROUTING

INPUT CH VIEW

Function Screen

Linked

Indepen-

dent

Remarks

1→21↔2

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

About the console shutdown function

A Shutdown function has been added to keep current memory from being modiﬁed in Dual Console mode.

In Dual Console mode, powering-off either console may modify the current memory of the other console or

the engine, but by shutting-down the console before powering it off, you can prevent current memory from

being modiﬁed.

For the procedure, refer to page 26.

• This shutdown function is necessary only in Dual Console mode. If you are not operating in Dual Console mode,

the SHUTDOWN button (→p.26) will not be displayed.

• If you power-off the console without performing this procedure as described, the current memory used by the

other console or the engine may be modiﬁed. However, settings other than current memory (i.e., scene memory,

the various setup memories and libraries) will not be affected. Thus, if you have stored the current memory to a

scene, you can re-recall that scene to recover from an accidental power-off that occurred without performing the

shutdown.

DUAL CONSOLE screen

PM1D system software V1.5 adds a DUAL CONSOLE screen to the SYS/W.CLOCK function. In this screen you can make

settings and perform operations for Dual Console mode.

DUAL CONSOLE mode added

1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Indicates the current operation mode and cascade

mode of the PM1D system. Click the button to

open the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION popup win-

dow, where you can switch the operation mode and

cascade mode.

Hint

The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ﬁeld is displayed

in the SYS/W.CLOCK function SYSTEM CONNEC-

TION screen, DUAL CONSOLE screen, and CAS-

CADE screen (newly added in version 1.5). All of

these represent the same setting.

2 DUAL CONSOLE LINK (DUAL CONSOLE mode

link settings)

Here you can select whether cue operation and talk-

back-controlled dimmer operation will be linked.

If the CUE ON/OFF LINK button is on, operations

of the [CUE] switches, EFFECT CUE, SUB IN CUE,

and gate KEY IN CUE will be linked.

If the TALKBACK DIMMER ON/OFF LINK button

is on, turning talkback on from one console will

attenuate the monitor signal on the other console as

well.

Note that the TALKBACK DIMMER ON/OFF

LINK button links the dimmer operation; it does

not link talkback on/off operation. The amount of

attenuation when the dimmer is on can be adjusted

independently in the MONITOR A screen of each

console.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

[Console 1]

The following screen appears only on console 1.

3 UPDATE

Each time you click this button, the current memory,

scene memories/libraries, and setup data will be

compared between console 1 and console 2, and the

ALL DATA STATUS (4) display will be updated.

4 ALL DATA STATUS

This area displays the result of comparing the data of

console 1 and 2. If all data is identical, this will indi-

cate “SAME.” If there is any difference, this will indi-

cate “DIFF.”

5 Scene memories / libraries

This area displays the result of comparing each scene

memory and library. You can click the buttons at the

left to select the items that will be displayed in the

library data list (7).

6 CURRENT MEMORY (Current memory status)

This indicates the result of comparing the current

memory (the scene currently reﬂected by the panel,

patches, units, and names). If these are all identical

for consoles 1 and 2, this will indicate “SAME.” If

there are any differences, this will indicate “DIFF.” If

you click the COPY button located in the cen-

ter, the current memory will be copied from console

1 to console 2.

7 Scene memory / library data list

This displays the scene memory / library data that is

selected by the scene memory / library status (5)

buttons.

The ALL ﬁeld at the top of the list will indicate

“SAME” if all data matches, or “DIFF” if there is any

difference. If you click the COPY button

located in the center, the entire contents of the

selected scene memory or library will be copied from

console 1 to console 2.

The lower lines of the list show the contents of the

selected scene memories / libraries for each console.

If the contents of each number match, this will indi-

cate “SAME.” If they differ, this will indicate “DIFF.”

Only while a scene memory is displayed in the list,

clicking the COPY button located in the cen-

ter will copy the contents of that scene memory from

console 1 to console 2.

DUAL CONSOLE mode added

Connections in Dual Console mode

The following diagrams show connections between the consoles and engine(s) in Dual Console mode.

• You must power-off all equipment before making

connections.

• Connections for input/output units and power

supplies are not discussed here. For details, refer

to “CS1D Operation Manual, Setup.”

Please note that on console 2 you will connect the

DIGITAL I/O lines to the DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A

ports — not to the DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE ports.

[Standard mode]

IN OUT

INOUT

1212 121212

121212

12 12

IN OUT

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

CONSOLE 1 (CS1D)

CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

CONTROL I/O

ENGINE A

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

DIGITAL I/O

CONSOLE

CONSOLE 2 (CS1D)

CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

[Mirror mode]

Hint

• The dashed lines in the above diagram are spare

connections for use in the event that the currently-

valid connectors become unusable.

• The system will operate normally even with just

the connections shown by the solid lines. However,

we recommend that you also make the spare con-

nections shown above whenever possible.

Connect each device to the identically-numbered (1

or 2) connector on each device. The system will not

operate correctly if you connect differently-num-

bered connectors.

Establishing communication between consoles

This section explains how to select Dual Console mode on each console, specify the console to which the engine is con-

nected as “console 1,” specify the other console as “console 2,” and establish communication.

In order to use Dual Console mode, each console

number must be speciﬁed correctly. Be aware that

communication will not occur if consoles 1 and 2

are interchanged, or if both are set to console 1.

1. Turn on the power in the order of input/output

units, engine(s), and console power supply.

Incorrect operation while making settings can

cause a high-volume signal to be output. We

strongly recommend that you turn down the vol-

ume of your power amps etc. until settings are

completed.

IN OUT

INOUT

1212 121212

121212

12 12

IN OUT

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

CONSOLE 1 (CS1D)

CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

DIGITAL I/O

CONSOLE

CONSOLE 2 (CS1D)

CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

IN OUT

INOUT

121212

12 12

ENGINE B

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

CONTROL I/O

ENGINE A

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

CONTROL I/O

ENGINE B

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE B

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

DUAL CONSOLE mode added

[Console 2]

2. On the console to which the engine is not connected,

access the SYS/W.CLOCK function DUAL CON-

SOLE screen (a newly added screen in version 1.5).

3. In the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ﬁeld, click the

button.

The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION popup window

will appear. In the OPERATION MODE SELECT

area of this window you can select the operation

mode of the PM1D system.

4. Click the DUAL button within the CONSOLE sec-

tion of the OPERATION MODE SELECT area.

When you turn the DUAL button on, the CONSOLE

No. buttons will become operable.

5. Click the CONSOLE 2 button to turn it on, and

then click the OK button.

The console will be set to DUAL CONSOLE mode.

In the upper part of the screen, the control number

of the CONNECTION ﬁeld will change to “2,” and

“DUAL” will be indicated below the number. (How-

ever, an X will be superimposed on DUAL since

communication is not yet established.)

[Console 1]

6. On the console to which the engine is connected,

access the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION popup win-

dow in the same way.

7. Click the DUAL button within the CONSOLE sec-

tion of the OPERATION MODE SELECT area.

8. Verify that the CONSOLE 1 button is on, and click

the OK button.

When you click the OK button, the two consoles will

attempt to establish communication. When commu-

nication has been established, console 1 will compare

the system version, scene memories, libraries, and

setup data of the two consoles.

• In order to use Dual Console mode, both con-

soles must have the same system version.

• If the versions of the two consoles differ, the ver-

sion check popup window will appear, and fur-

ther operation will not be possible. Update the

system version to match, and perform the opera-

tion once again.

If there is any difference in the data of the two con-

soles, the console 1 screen will show a message of

“Will transmit differential data to CONSOLE 2. Are

you sure? [xx sec.]”

This message is asking you whether it is OK to trans-

mit the differing data from console 1 to console 2.

(The data is always sent from console 1 to console 2.

The [xx sec.] (or [xx min.]) indicates the estimated

time required for transmission.

When you click the OK button in this window, all

current scene, scene, memory, and library data, and

any setup data required for linked operation will be

transmitted from console 1 to console 2.

If you click the CANCEL button, only the current

scene and the setup data necessary for linked opera-

tion will be transmitted from console 1 to console 2.

Hint

If the scene memories and libraries are fully used, it

will take approximately 60 minutes to transmit all of

the data.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

CAUTION!

• Be aware that once data transmission is started, it

cannot be aborted. Please use caution.

• The expected time is merely an estimate. A longer

time than indicated here may actually be required.

• If you do not have enough time for transmission to

be performed, we strongly recommend that you

click the CANCEL button when the above message

appears, and either transmit only the necessary

data (→p.21) or transfer the data via memory card.

9. If it is OK to transmit the data, click the OK button.

Data transmission will begin. The screen will show a

progress bar to indicate the state of progress.

• While transmission is occurring, never turn off

the power or interrupt communication. If for

some reason the console power supply is turned

off, the memory contents of console 2 will be lost.

In this case you will need to initialize console 2.

• Even if you click the CANCEL button in step 9,

part of the setup data and the current data will be

transmitted, so as long as you are operating the

current scene, the two consoles will operate in

tandem.

However, since the libraries and scene do not

match, performing a store/recall operation may

cause the current scene on the two consoles to

have completely different settings.

When transmission is completed, the X symbol will

disappear from the “DUAL” indication in the CON-

NECTION area at the top of the screen. Now the two

consoles can be used simultaneously.

Hint

• If you power-off the system in this state, console 1

will attempt to initiate communication in Dual

Console mode the next time it is powered-on.

• To cancel Dual Console mode, access the DUAL

CONSOLE screen on console 1 or 2, click the

button in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ﬁeld,

and select SINGLE CONSOLE mode.

If Dual Console mode is established, switching to

Single Console mode will set both console 1 and

console 2 to Single Console mode.

If, after communication is established, communica-

tion with the DIGITAL I/O connector or CONTROL

I/O connector is interrupted, a warning message like

the following will appear in the lower part of the

screen. Please check the appropriate connection.

DUAL CONSOLE mode added

Transmitting only the necessary scenes / libraries

After establishing Dual Console mode communication, you can transmit only the necessary scene memories and librar-

ies from console 1 to console 2. Even if you have cancelled transmission of all data after starting-up Dual Console mode,

you can use this method to transmit only the minimum scenes and libraries.

The following procedure can be performed only on

console 1.

[Console 1]

1. On console 1, access the SYS/W.CLOCK function

DUAL CONSOLE screen.

2. In the ALL DATA STATUS section, click the

UPDATE button.

The memory contents of consoles 1 and 2 will be

compared. If they match perfectly, an indication of

“SAME” will appear at the right of the UPDATE but-

ton. If there is any difference, an indication of “DIFF”

will appear.

3. Click the scene memory / library status buttons to

select the scene memory / library that you want to

transmit.

The contents of the selected scene memory / library

will appear in the list at the right. If the identically-

numbered data matches between consoles 1 and 2,

the ﬁeld at the right will indicate “SAME.” If the data

does not match, this ﬁeld will indicate “DIFF.”

Hint

If no data has been saved in the identically-num-

bered memory of either console 1 or 2, this ﬁeld will

indicate “SAME.”

4. Click the COPY ( ) button for the number

that you want to transmit.

The corresponding data will be copied from console

1 to console 2. Perform the same operation for other

numbers as desired.

• When copying a scene memory, you must also

copy the unit, patch, and name libraries used by

each scene.

• Individual numbers of library data cannot be

copied. The entire library will be copied as a

whole.

Limitations of Dual Console mode

This section explains the limitations of Dual Console mode.

■ Operation when the current memory

does not match

Dual Console mode can be used even if the current

memory (the scene, patches, units, and names currently

reﬂected by the panel) does not match. In this case, edit-

ing a linkable parameter from one console will cause

only the identical parameter on the other console to

change as well.

For operations such as setting/disabling a pair, switching

a MIX bus between VARI/FIX, and copying between

channels, only the appropriate number and command

are transmitted. If the received command conﬂicts with

the console’s own current memory, the setting of console

1 will always take priority. In this case, the lower part of

the console 2 will indicate “DATA TYPE CONFLICT!

EXCLUDED,” and it will not be possible to edit the

parameter on console 2.

Popup windows that ask you to change an internal set-

ting (such as switching units) will always appear only on

console 1. When you execute such a change on console 2,

a message will ask you for conﬁrmation.

■ Scene memory store/recall operations

When you perform a scene memory store/recall opera-

tion on one console, the corresponding number along

with a store/recall command will be transmitted to the

other console. (The other console is not informed

whether the current memory or scene memory matches

following execution.)

This means that if changes occur in the contents of scene

memory, discrepancies may occur between the current

memories of the two consoles following a recall opera-

tion. Please be aware of this possibility.

Recall Undo or Store Undo can be performed from

either console. However if the scene memories are not

synchronized at the time of initial connection in Dual

Console mode, the scene number that is recalled by

Recall Undo may differ. In this case, undo will occur

with differing scene memories, and the engine will fol-

low the data of console 1.

Store Undo cannot be performed immediately after

Dual Console mode initial connection occurs.

■ Preview mode

Scene memory Preview mode can be operated indepen-

dently from either console. If one console is switched to

Preview mode, and an edited scene is stored, all data of

the corresponding scene will be copied to the same scene

number of the other console (the store-destination scene

will match).

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

■ Library store/recall operations

When you perform a library store/recall operation on

one console, the corresponding number along with a

store/recall command will be transmitted to the other

console. (The other console is not informed whether the

library or current memory matches following execu-

tion.)

This means that if changes occur in the library contents,

discrepancies may occur in the current memories of the

two consoles following a recall operation. Please be

aware of this possibility.

As an exception, if you open the LIBRARY popup win-

dow on one console, edit the parameters directly and

then store, the data of the corresponding library will be

copied to the same library number on the other console.

(The store-destination library will match.)

■ File load/save operations

In Dual Console mode, you can use the LOAD/SAVE

screen to load/save data from or to a memory card on

either console. However on console 2, there are slight

limitations on the data that can be loaded from a mem-

ory card.

The following table shows the items that can be loaded

by each console in Dual Console mode.

■ Engine selection in Mirror mode

When using the PM1D system in Mirror mode, switch-

ing between engines A and B can be performed only

from console 1.

When the engine has switched, a message of “ENGINE

HAS BEEN SWITCHED TO [A] ([B])” will appear at

the bottom of the screen on console 2.

■ Talkback

In Dual Console mode, two talkback systems can be

operated independently from each console 1 and 2.

(Talkback will function with a total of four inputs / two

systems.)

For each console, you can use the MON/CUE function

TALKBACK screen to adjust the input level, phase, and

destination of the two talkbacks.

However, the settings of the TALKBACK screen TB OUT

section will be shared by console 1 and 2. In this section,

you can choose the talkback source as either CONSOLE

1 (talkback signal of console 1), CONSOLE 2 (talkback

signal of console 2), or CONSOLE 1+2 (talkback signals

of consoles 1 and 2), and specify the desired port as the

output destination. (This operation can be performed

from either console.)

If the TALKBACK DIMMER ON/OFF LINK button is

turned on in the DUAL CONSOLE screen of console 1,

the dimmer will operate on the other console as well

when talkback is turned on by one console. However

even in this case, talkback on/off operation is not linked.

The amount by which the signal is attenuated when the

dimmer is on can be adjusted independently for each

console in the MONITOR A screen.

Loaded item Console 1 Console 2

Scene memory

Setup data

O q

1. Only the parameters that can be set independently for each

console will be loaded. Parameters that are linked with con-

sole 1 will not be loaded.

TC EVENT screen settings

MIDI PGM CHANGE screen

settings

Libraries

O: Loadable q: Partially loadable X: Not loadable

DUAL CONSOLE mode added

■ Monitor

In Dual Console mode, one of the two monitor buses A

and B can be assigned to each console 1 and 2, and con-

trolled independently.

The monitor bus controlled by the console itself is

assigned to MONITOR A, and the monitor bus con-

trolled by the other console is assigned to MONITOR B.

This means that from either console, monitor-related

settings will be performed in the MONITOR A screen

(and the MONITOR A section of the panel).

• On either console, the MONITOR B screen will

be unavailable in Dual Console mode, and no

parameters will be displayed.

• The MONITOR B SOURCE section of the panel

will only indicate the source that is being moni-

tored by the other console, and cannot be oper-

ated. However, the MONITOR B [LEVEL] knob,

MONITOR B [ON] switch, and MONITOR B

[PHONES] knob can be operated. (If desired,

you can monitor the same source as the other

console.)

■ Cue

In Dual Console mode, cue operations can generally be

performed independently. Also, the [LAST CUE] switch

on the panel and the CUE/SOLO screen LAST CUE but-

ton can also be operated independently for each console.

However, if in the DUAL CONSOLE screen the CUE ON/

OFF LINK button (

→

p.15) is turned on, all cue opera-

tions ([CUE] switch on/off, EFFECT CUE, SUB IN CUE,

gate KEY IN CUE) will be linked. This method is conve-

nient when one engineer is operating both consoles.

When cue operations are linked, you can enable key

in cue so that the gate key-in signal of the currently

selected input channel can be monitored from both

consoles. However

in Dual Console mode, [SEL] key

operations are not linked, meaning that the selected

signal source may differ. Please use caution.

If effect cue for a certain internal effect (for example,

internal effect 3) is enabled on one console, effect cue

will be cancelled when you switch screens on that con-

sole or if you select the same screen (the EFFECT 3

screen in this example) on the other console and then

switch screens. The reason for this design is that other-

wise, when the screen is switched, it would become

impossible to know which effect cue was being moni-

tored.

Hint

As an exception, effect cue will not be cancelled if

you switch alternately between the EFFECT 1–8

screen that is enabled for effect cue and the EFFECT

ASSIGN screen. The reason for this design is that in

the EFFECT ASSIGN screen, you can see which effect

cue is being monitored.

In the same way, if you enable SUB IN cue in the SUB IN

screen of one console, SUB IN cue will be cancelled if

you switch screens on the same console or if you select

the same SUB IN screen on the other console and then

switch screens.

MONITOR

Console 1 Console 2

Monitor signal

of console 1

Monitor signal

of console 2

Monitor signal

of console 2

Monitor signal

of console 1

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

■ SOLO mode

SOLO mode on/off can be control only from console 1.

On console 2, the panel [SOLO] switch and the CUE/

SOLO screen SOLO ON/OFF button will not function.

While SOLO mode is on, cue operations will be linked

regardless of the state of the DUAL CONSOLE screen

CUE ON/OFF LINK button (→p.15). (Pressing the

[CUE] switch on either console will solo that source.)

In Dual Console mode, the panel [LAST CUE] switch

can be operated independently from each console. How-

ever, the [LAST CUE] switch of consoles 1 and 2 will be

linked if in the DUAL CONSOLE screen the CUE ON/

OFF LINK button is turned on, or while SOLO mode is

on. If the state of the [LAST CUE] switches differs

between consoles 1 and 2 when you enter SOLO mode,

the setting of console 1 will be copied to console 2.

■ Meter operations

In Dual Console mode, the METER function METER-

ING POINT button and PEAK HOLD button, and the

panel METER section [PRE] switch and [PEAK HOLD]

switch will be linked. However, these buttons and

switches can be operated only by console 1.

■ Pair mode switching

The pair mode can be switched only from console 1.

■ INPUT UNIT / OUTPUT UNIT screen

Units and cards can be changed only from console 1. The

same content will be displayed in the screen of console 2,

but cannot be edited. Nor can you specify virtual units

or cards from console 2.

As an exception, only if console 2 is switched to PRE-

VIEW mode, virtual units or cards can be created on

console 2, and this content can be saved to a scene or

unit library.

■ Effect functions

If the effect type of the same internal effect differs

between console 1 and 2, changes made to the parame-

ters of that effect will be ignored.

■ OUT COMP function / IN GATE/COMP

function

If the compressor/gate type for the same channel differs

between console 1 and 2, changes made to the parame-

ters of that compressor/gate will be ignored.

If the KEY IN LEFT CH button is switched on for one

console, this will be ignored if the corresponding chan-

nel is paired on the other console.

■ MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen / SUB IN

screen

If pairing settings differ between console 1 and 2 for the

same MATRIX channel, changes made to the send level /

pan of the signal sent from a MIX channel / SUB IN to

that MATRIX bus will be ignored.

■ CH to MIX screen

If pairing settings differ between console 1 and 2 for the

same MIX channel, changes made to the send level / pan

of the signal sent from an input channel to that MIX bus

will be ignored.

■ IN PATCH function / OUT PATCH func-

tion

Even if the patching is switched on one console, the

operation will be ignored if the corresponding card is

not speciﬁed on the other console.

Also, in conjunction with the addition of Dual Console

mode, you can now patch the talkback signal of CON-

SOLE 1 and CONSOLE 2 (IN PATCH and IN INSERT

“IN” only).

The CONSOLE 1 talkback is displayed as TB C1, and the

CONSOLE 2 talkback as TB C2. This can be viewed/set

in Single Console mode as well as in Dual Console

mode, but the TB C2 setting is valid only in Dual Con-

sole mode.

■ IN HA/INSERT function / OUT INSERT

function

Even if a parameter for an individual card (e.g., gain,

phase) is edited on one card, the operation will be

ignored if the corresponding card is not speciﬁed on the

other console.

Also, in conjunction with the addition of Dual Console

mode, you can now patch the talkback signal of CON-

SOLE 1 and CONSOLE 2 (IN PATCH and IN INSERT

“IN” only).

The CONSOLE 1 talkback is displayed as TB C1, and the

CONSOLE 2 talkback as TB C2. This can be viewed/set

in Single Console mode as well as in Dual Console

mode, but the TB C2 setting is valid only in Dual Con-

sole mode.

■ MIDI/GPI/TC function

Time code / MIDI input can be selected for the ports of

either console.

DUAL CONSOLE mode added

■ GPI screen

The following restrictions apply to GPI IN/GPI OUT

settings.

• GPI IN

On console 1 / PC (PM1D Manager), settings can be

made only for the GPI port of console 1 and the

engine. On console 2, settings can be made only for

the GPI port of console 2.

• GPI OUT

On console 1 / PC, settings can be made only for the

GPI port of console 1 and the engine. On console 2,

settings can be made only for the GPI port of console

2. However, signals can be output from console 2 to

the engine port.

■ USER DEFINE/GPI function

User-deﬁnable switches and functions assigned to GPI

IN can be set and operated independently from console

1 or 2. However for some functions, the following limi-

tations apply.

• INC/DEC RECALL

The preceding or following scene will be recalled rel-

ative to the scene number that was last recalled/

stored on console 1. Be aware of this when using this

function on console 2.

• MONITOR B SELECT

While Dual Console mode is in operation, the

MONITOR B SELECT function assigned to a user-

deﬁnable switch or GPI IN is not valid.

• ENGINE B SELECT (GPI only)

The GPI IN test button assigned to the ENGINE B

SELECT function cannot be operated from console

Hint

The MONITOR A SELECT function can be set and

operated from either console.

■ FADER START screen

The settings of this screen cannot be made from a PC

(PM1D Manager) connected to a system that includes a

console.

■ 2TR IN screen

In Dual Console mode, you can select which 2TR IN (of

console 1 or console 2) will be used for each of the six

2TR IN inputs. This selection can be made only from

console 1.

To switch the console whose 2TR IN jacks are being

used, use the 2TR IN screen INPUT CONSOLE button.

At this time, the Fs ﬁeld will indicate the sampling fre-

quency of the signal that is being input to the selected

console.

On console 2, the INPUT CONSOLE button will be

masked, and cannot be operated. However, you can use

either console to select the input source (2TR IN 1 / 2TR

IN 2 only), switch the SRC (sample rate converter) ON/

THROUGH, adjust the level, and switch the phase.

These operations will be linked between console 1 and 2.

■ ST OUT DIGITAL screen

In Dual Console mode, the same signals will be output

from STEREO OUT A of both consoles and STEREO

OUT B of both consoles. Thus, the settings in the ST

OUT DIGITAL screen will be linked.

■ SYSTEM CONNECTION screen

In general, routing changes in the SYSTEM CONNEC-

TION screen can be performed only from console 1.

However, routings connected to console 2 itself can be

changed only from console 2.

If a routing change is executed from one console, a

warning message will be displayed on the other console.

All other SYSTEM CONNECTION screen settings (per-

mission for PC connection, cascade connection enable/

disable, standard mode / mirror mode selection, etc.)

can be performed only from console 1.

Only this button can be operated

from console 2

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

■ DUAL CONSOLE screen

In the DUAL CONSOLE screen of console 2, you cannot

compare or copy data between consoles 1 and 2. (The

buttons and list in the right of the screen will not

appear.)

Also, the buttons in the left of the screen for linking cue

and dimmer operations will be displayed only, and can-

not be operated.

Powering-off the consoles

In Dual Console mode, use the following procedure to shut down before you power-off the consoles.

• This shutdown function is necessary only in Dual Console mode. If you are not operating in Dual Console mode,

the SHUTDOWN button will not be displayed.

• If you power-off the console without performing this procedure as described, the current memory used by the

other console or the engine may be modiﬁed. However, settings other than current memory (i.e., scene memory,

the various setup memories and libraries) will not be affected. Thus, if you have stored the current memory to a

scene, you can re-recall that scene to recover from an accidental power-off that occurred without performing the

shutdown.

1. On the screen of the console that you want to

power-off, press the MENU button to access the

menu screen. The SHUTDOWN button will appear

in the lower left.

2. Press the SHUTDOWN button, and the shutdown

popup window will appear.

3. Press the OK button. The following screen will

appear, and the panel LEDs will go dark. It is now

safe to turn off the power. If you press the CANCEL

button you will return to the menu screen.

Cascade connections

PM1D system software V1.5 allows you to cascade-connect two systems. Any desired buses can be connected

between cascade-connected systems. This allows you to increase the number of input channels to a maximum

of two engines.

About cascade connections

Cascade connection is when the engines (DSP1D-EX

{DSP1D}) of two PM1D systems are connected to each

other to share buses. Unlike cascaded analog consoles,

in which the signals are sent uni-directionally, cascade

connection on the PM1D system allows bi-directional

audio output and communication.

When cascade connection is used, one system must be

designated as the “master” and the other system as the

“slave.” However, the cascade master and slave differ

only in the priority in which they are initially connected,

and in actuality are completely equivalent in status.

Cascade connection involves virtually none of the

restrictions that apply to Dual Console mode. There will

be no problem even if scenes or library content differs.

While there are no limitations on cascade-connecting a

Single Console mode system with a Dual Console mode

system, it is not possible to cascade-connect with either a

Standard mode system or a Mirror mode system. In such

cases you will have to set both PM1D systems to either

Standard mode or Mirror mode.

When using cascade connection, all consoles,

engines, and PM1D Manager software must be

using the identical system version. Before you make

cascade connections, please check the version of

each component.

CASCADE screen

In PM1D system software V1.5, a CASCADE screen has been added to the SYS/W.CLOCK function. In this screen you

can make settings for cascade connections.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

1 ENGINE SELECT

If the master and slave systems are being used in Mir-

ror mode, this selects whether switching between

engines A/B will be linked.

2 SCENE RECALL

Selects whether scene recall operations will be linked

between the master and slave systems.

If they are linked, the identically-numbered scene on

the other system will be recalled.

3 CUE STACK/SOLO

Selects whether cue operations and solo operations

will be linked between master/slave consoles 1 and

between master/slave consoles 2.

4 TALKBACK DIMMER ON/OFF

Selects whether dimmer operation due to talkback

will be linked between master/slave consoles 1 and

between master/slave consoles 2.

It is convenient to link the operation if the consoles

are near each other and you want dimming to occur

for both monitors when talkback is turned on.

5 DCA LEVEL/MUTE

Selects whether the DCA group level and mute on/

off state will be linked between master and slave sys-

tems. The DCA group(s) selected by these buttons

will be linked.

If CUE STACK/SOLO is linked, and you cue a DCA

that is selected for DCA LEVEL/MUTE, the same

DCA will be cued on both systems. However, if an

input channel and output channel are assigned to the

same DCA number, they will not be linked.

6 MUTE MASTER

Selects whether the mute group on/off state will be

linked between master and slave systems. The mute

group(s) selected by these buttons will be linked.

7 CASCADE BUS ON/OFF

These buttons select the buses/signals that will be

cascaded between the master and slave systems.

8 TALKBACK TO COMM IN CASCADE SETUP

(Talkback → COMM IN cascade settings)

These buttons select whether the talkback signal of

the master system will be supplied as a COMM IN

signal of the slave system. Settings for console 1 and 2

can be made independently for both master and

slave.

5 6

Cascade connections

The following diagrams show cascade connections for Standard mode, Mirror mode, and Standard mode + Dual Con-

sole mode.

• You must power-off all devices before you make

connections.

• Connections for input/output units and power

supplies are not discussed here. For details, refer

to “CS1D Operation Manual (Setup).”

[Standard mode]

CONSOLE (CS1D)

IN OUT

INOUT

121212

12 12

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

DIGITAL

I/O

ENGINE A

CONTROL

I/O

ENGINE A

IN OUT

INOUT

121212

12 12

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

CONSOLE (CS1D)

DIGITAL

I/O

ENGINE A

CONTROL

I/O

ENGINE A

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

Master system Slave system

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

[Mirror mode]

[Standard mode + Dual Console mode]

Hint

• The dashed lines in the above diagram are spare

connections for use in the event that the currently-

valid connectors become unusable.

• The system will operate normally even with just

the connections shown by the solid lines. However,

we recommend that you also make the spare con-

nections shown above whenever possible.

CASCADE IN connectors must be connected to

CASCADE OUT connectors, and vice versa. The

system will not operate if two IN connectors or two

OUT connectors are connected, or if only one is

connected.

IN OUT

INOUT

121212

12 12

ENGINE B

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

CONSOLE (CS1D)

DIGITAL

I/O

ENGINE B

CONTROL

I/O

ENGINE B

IN OUT

INOUT

121212

12 12

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

DIGITAL

I/O

ENGINE A

CONTROL

I/O

ENGINE A

IN OUT

INOUT

121212

12 12

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

CONSOLE (CS1D)

DIGITAL

I/O

ENGINE A

CONTROL

I/O

ENGINE A

IN OUT

INOUT

121212

12 12

ENGINE B

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

DIGITAL

I/O

ENGINE B

CONTROL

I/O

ENGINE B

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

Master system Slave system

IN OUT

1212 12121212

IN OUT

CONSOLE 1 (CS1D)

CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

DIGITAL I/O

CONSOLE

CONSOLE 2 (CS1D)

CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

IN OUT

INOUT

121212

12 12

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE B

CONTROL I/O

ENGINE B

IN OUT

1212 12121212

IN OUT

CONSOLE 1 (CS1D)

CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

DIGITAL I/O

CONSOLE

CONSOLE 2 (CS1D)

CONTROL I/O

CONSOLE

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE A

IN OUT

INOUT

121212

12 12

ENGINE A

(DSP1D-EX{DSP1D})

CONTROL

I/O

CONSOLE

I/O

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

DIGITAL I/O

ENGINE B

CONTROL I/O

ENGINE B

Cascade connections

Establishing a cascade connection

Here’s how to designate one system as the “master” and the other system as the “slave,” and establish a cascade connec-

tion.

• In order to use cascade connection, one system

must be designated as the master and the other as

the slave. If both are designated as the master (or

slave), they will not operate correctly.

• In cascade connection, both systems have equal

status. You may specify either one as the master.

1. Power-on the devices in the order of input/output

units, engines, and console power supplies.

Incorrect operation while making settings can

cause a high-volume signal to be output. We

strongly recommend that you turn down the vol-

ume of your power amps until connections are

completed.

2. On one system, access the SYS/W.CLOCK function

CASCADE screen (newly added in version 1.5).

When cascading Dual Console mode systems, you

must perform the following operations on console

1 of each system. The settings of the CASCADE

screen cannot be edited from console 2.

3. In the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ﬁeld, click the

button.

The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION popup window

will appear. In the CASCADE MODE SELECT sec-

tion of this window, you can turn cascade connec-

tion on/off and designate the master/slave systems.

4. In the CASCADE MODE SELECT section, click the

CASCADE ON [MASTER] button, and then click

the OK button.

This system will be designated as the cascade connec-

tion master. At this time, the console number will

begin blinking in the CONNECTION ﬁeld at the top

of the screen. This blink indicates that cascade-con-

nection was speciﬁed, but the other system has not

yet been found.

5. On the other system, access the SYSTEM CONFIG-

URATION popup window in the same way.

6. In the CASCADE MODE SELECT section, click the

CASCADE ON [SLAVE] button, and then click the

OK button.

This system will be designated as the cascade connec-

tion slave. Now both systems will attempt to establish

a cascade connection. When the connection has been

established, the console number that had been blink-

ing in the CONNECTION ﬁeld at the top of the

screen will change from blinking to steadily lit.

In order to use cascade connection, all consoles,

engines, and PM1D Manager in both systems must

have the identical software version. If the versions

differ, the version check popup window will appear,

and you will be unable to use cascade connection.

Hint

As long as a cascade connection exists, the CAS-

CADE screen settings of both systems will always be

linked. If the settings of this screen differ when the

systems are ﬁrst connected, the settings of the master

will be copied to the slave.

7. In the CASCADE screen, use the buttons of the

CASCADE BUS ON/OFF section to select the

buses/signals that will be cascade-connected.

The following buses/signals can be selected.

• MIX .............................MIX buses 1–48

• STEREO ......................STEREO buses A/B

• CUE .............................CUE bus of console 1 or 2

• TALKBACK ................Talkback signal of console 1

or 2

• COMM IN...................COMM IN signal of con-

sole 1 or 2

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

For example if you select the MIX 1 button, the MIX

bus 1 pre-fader signal will be sent from one engine to

the other engine, and will be mixed with the MIX

bus 1 pre-fader signal of the other engine. In the

same way, the pre-fader signal of MIX bus 1 pre-

fader signal of the other engine will be sent to the

ﬁrst engine, and mixed with the MIX bus 1 pre-fader

signal.

Hint

In order to compensate for phase differences of the

input signal when the MIX bus, STEREO bus, and

CUE bus are cascade-connected, the corresponding

bus outputs will be delayed by two samples (for the

MIX buses / STEREO buses) or three samples (for

the CUE bus) more than the previous version. These

signals will always be delayed even if cascade is

turned off.

When cascade-connecting the CUE bus, talkback,

and COMM IN, you can make these selections inde-

pendently for console 1 and 2. (Console 2 is valid

only in Dual Console mode.) For example if the

CONSOLE 1 button in the CUE area is turned on,

the console 1 CUE bus signal will be cascade-con-

nected between the two systems.

If cascade-connection is enabled for the talkback sig-

nal, talkback on/off operations will also be linked

between the two systems.

8. To cancel cascade connection, access the SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION popup window, and click the

CASCADE OFF button of the CASCADE MODE

SELECT section.

OUTPUT

INOUT

OUTIN

MIX BUS 1

CASCADE BUS

ON/OFF

FADER,

PATCH etc.

DELAY

OUTPUT

MIX BUS 1

CASCADE BUS

ON/OFF

FADER,

PATCH etc.

DELAY

Master engine Slave engine

cascade

connection

Cascade connections

Cautions when using cascade connection

This section explains points that you should keep in mind when using cascade connection.

■ Checking the CASCADE IN/OUT con-

nectors

If cascade connection is not established even after you

have connected the CASCADE IN/OUT connectors

between the two systems and designated one as the mas-

ter and the other as the slave, access the SYSTEM CON-

NECTION screen. In this screen, the CASCADE IN/

OUT connector symbols will indicate the state of con-

nections.

Each symbol has the following meaning.

• x................................... There is a problem with the

physical connection. Check

that the cable is not broken,

and that it is not connected

between two CASCADE IN

connectors or two CAS-

CADE OUT connectors.

• OK (gray)....................The physical connection

exists, but communication

has not been established

between the two systems.

Check that you have not

designated both systems as

the master or both as the

slave, and make sure that

the system version is the

same for all units.

• OK (green)..................Communication has been

established between the two

systems. Make sure that the

buses and signals that you

want to cascade-connect are

selected.

■ Linking engine A/B selection

If PM1D systems in Mirror mode are cascade-con-

nected, selection of engines A/B can normally be per-

formed independently by each system. The other system

will not be affected in any way, including its screen dis-

play.

If the ENGINE SELECT LINK button is turned on in the

CASCADE screen, switching the engine on one system

will cause a conﬁrmation popup window to appear only

on that system. When you execute the switch, the other

system will also be switched forcibly.

If the engine is switched automatically, due to problems

with the engine or some other reason, the engine of the

other system will also be forcibly switched without a

warning being issued.

■ Linking scene store/recall operations

If the SCENE RECALL LINK button is turned on in the

CASCADE screen, performing a scene memory store/

recall operation on one system will cause only that num-

ber and a store/recall command to be transmitted to the

other console.

If the scene number speciﬁed as the recall source is

empty on the other system, the recall command will be

ignored.

■ Linking cue operations

By using the CONSOLE 1 / CONSOLE 2 buttons in the

CUE section of the CASCADE screen, you can cascade-

connect the CUE buses between the console 1 units or

between the console 2 units of the two systems.

In this case, cue operations of the two systems will not be

linked, so when cue is turned on by the other console,

the cue signal of the other console cannot be monitored

from MONITOR OUT jacks A unless you manually turn

cue on for your own console as well.

Thus, you can use the CUE STACK/SOLO section of the

CASCADE screen to link cue operations and solo opera-

tions between consoles 1 or consoles 2 of the master and

slave systems. When the LINK button is on, the follow-

ing items will be linked between the corresponding con-

soles.

• Cue mode

CUE/SOLO switches and LAST CUE/MIX CUE

switching will be linked.

• Cue interrupt

When cue/solo is turned on by either system, the

monitoring source for MONITOR OUT jacks A on

both systems will switch to the CUE bus. (This lets

you monitor the cue/solo signal.)

• PFL/AFL and PRE PAN/POST PAN switching of

input channels

• PFL/POST ON switching of output channels

CASCADE IN/OUT connector

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

• DCA PRE PAN on/off switching

• Cue stack

The cue status will be monitored across both sys-

tems, and the last-selected of the four CUE groups

(INPUT CUE, DCA CUE, OUTPUT CUE, other)

will be enabled for both systems. For example when

output channel cue is enabled, pressing the DCA

group [CUE] switch on either system will enable the

DCA group on both systems.

Hint

• Cue interrupt is linked only if CUE INTERRUP-

TION is turned on in the CUE/SOLO screen of

both systems.

• For a detailed explanation of CUE group opera-

tion, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Hard-

ware),” p.81.

■ Linking talkback

By using the CONSOLE 1 / CONSOLE 2 buttons in the

TALKBACK section of the CASCADE screen, you can

cascade-connect the talkback signals between the con-

sole 1 units or between the console 2 units of the two

systems.

In this case, talkback on/off operations will also be

linked between the two systems. If you turn on talkback

for one system, the talkback signal will be sent to the bus

or connector selected on that system, and the same sig-

nal will also be sent to the bus or connector that is

selected on the other system.

If you also want to link the dimmer operation that

occurs when you turn on talkback, use the CONSOLE 1

/ CONSOLE 2 buttons in the TALKBACK DIMMER

ON/OFF section of the CASCADE screen.

■ Linking DCA groups

You can use the DCA LEVEL/

MUTE buttons (1–12) in the

CASCADE screen to link the

level and mute on/off state of

the desired DCA group.

When you turn on the button

for the DCA group that you

want to link, the level and

mute status of that DCA

group will be copied from the

master to the slave. (At this time it does not matter

whether the channels belonging to the DCA groups

match.)

Subsequently, changes made by one system to the level

or mute on/off status of the corresponding DCA group

will be reﬂected in the other system.

If a scene recall on one system causes the DCA level or

mute status to no longer match, the level and mute sta-

tus settings of the system that recalled the scene will be

copied to the other system.

While the DCA LEVEL/MUTE button is on, the fade

time setting of that DCA group will be ignored, and you

will be unable to use auto fading and manual fading.

If the DCA LEVEL/MUTE button is turned on while

LINK CUE STACK/SOLO is on, DCA cue will also be

linked between the two systems. However, if the DCA

assignment location (input channel or output channel)

differs between the two systems, cue will not be linked.

If, while cue is being used, the DCA assignment location

of one system changes due to either scene recall or man-

ual operation, cue will be defeated for the DCA that

changed.

■ Linking mute groups

You can use the MUTE MASTER

buttons (1–12) in the CASCADE

screen to link mute on/off opera-

tions of the desired mute group.

When you turn on the button for

the mute group that you want to

link, mute on/off operations for

the corresponding mute group

performed on one system will be

reﬂected in the other system.

■ Sending the master talkback signal to

the slave COMM IN

The talkback signal of the master system can be supplied

to console 1/2 of the slave system as a COMM IN signal.

For example, this is convenient when you want to uni-

directionally send the talkback signal from the master

system to the slave system rather than cascading the talk-

back signal.

To do so, you will use the TALKBACK COMM IN CAS-

CADE SETUP section of the CASCADE screen.

Assignments can be made independently for console 1

and 2 of the master system and console 1 and 2 of the

slave system.

Talkback signals will be sent between the assigned con-

soles to the COMM IN of the other unit.

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)

PM1D system software V1.5 allows you to use GPI (General Purpose Interface).

The PM1D system engine (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) and console (CS1D) have a D-sub 25-pin GPI (General Pur-

pose Interface) connector. This GPI connector combines both GPI IN and GPI OUT, and allows eight chan-

nels of control signal to be input and output simultaneously for communication with an external device. For

the pin conﬁguration, refer to page 69 of the CS1D Reference manual (Appendices).

The GPI OUT connector is an open collector out-

put. Also GPI IN is pulled-up at 5 V. The power

supply pins must be used at less than MAX 160 mA,

and the GPI IN/OUT pins at less than MAX 40 mA.

The following diagram is an example of using GPI to

create external switches and indicators for them.

You are free to specify how the PM1D system will oper-

ate when control signals are received from GPI IN, and

which operations on the PM1D system will cause con-

trol signals to be transmitted from GPI OUT.

By connecting a GPI-compatible external device or a

customized external switch etc. to the GPI connector,

you can cause an external device to start running when a

fader is operated, or use an external device to remotely

control talkback operations or select monitor sources.

• When using the PM1D system in Mirror mode,

only the currently selected engine can use its GPI

IN connector. Also, the output from the GPI

OUT connector is always linked for engines A

and B.

• When using the PM1D system in Dual Console

mode (→p.11), only the currently-operated con-

sole can use its GPI connector. You cannot

change the settings of the other GPI connector, or

receive control signals from the other GPI con-

nector. Also, settings for the GPI connector of the

engine can be made only on console 1.

919D929E

OUT 1

NHBIOJCJ

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 IN 8

OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4

K3KFK4KG

OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

GPI screen

A GPI screen allowing you to make GPI IN/OUT settings has been added to the MIDI/GPI/TC function.

■ GPI IN

1 INPUT PORT

Selects the GPI IN port for which you will make set-

tings. You can select console ports 1–8 or engine

ports 1–8.

2 GPI IN status

Indicates the input signal status for the correspond-

ing port. The characters L/H indicate whether the

signal level is low (switch is grounded) or high (high-

level signal is input). The background color will be

yellow when active, or gray when inactive. The

TRIGGER (3) ﬁeld selects whether signal high or

low will be the active state.

1 2 43 5 6

Currently active

GPI IN port

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)

3 TRIGGER

Selects the GPI IN on/off detection method. You can

choose either Low Active (active when switch is

grounded) or High Active (active when high-level

signal is input, or when open).

4 ASSIGN button

Clicking this button displays the GPI IN SETUP

popup window, where you can assign a function to

each GPI IN port.

5 FUNCTION

Indicates the name of the function assigned in (4).

6 PARAMETER

Indicates any optional parameters for the function

assigned in (4).

You can select the following functions and their

parameters for GPI IN. (Parameters speciﬁc to each

function are enclosed in parentheses.)

• NO ASSIGN

No assignment

• SCENE MEM INC/DEC RECALL (RECALL TYPE:

INC/DEC)

Recall the scene that follows (or precedes) the cur-

rently selected scene.

• MONITOR SOURCE SELECT (2TR IN 3-6,

DIRECT, MIX 1-48, MATRIX 1-24, A/B SELECT)

Select the source to be monitored. Use A/B SELECT

to select MONITOR A or B, and use the remaining

buttons to preset up to four monitor sources.

• PAGE SELECT (SELECT TYPE: LAST, PREVIOUS,

NEXT)

Show the desired screen in the display. As parame-

ters, you can choose LAST (the last-selected screen),

PREVIOUS (the preceding screen within the same

function), or NEXT (the next screen within the same

function).

• BOOKMARK

Recalls the last-registered screen. To register a screen,

recall the desired screen and press and hold the cor-

responding external switch for two seconds or

longer. If the lower part of the screen displays the

console/engine GPI IN test button (→p.10), the cor-

responding switch will show the text “BOOKMARK”

and the title of the registered screen.

• MANUAL FADE ON (TRIGGER TYPE: AUTO/

MANUAL, MANUAL ONLY)

Switch manual fading. If AUTO/MANUAL is selected

as the parameter, the system will switch between auto

fading and manual fading each time a trigger is

received.

If MANUAL ONLY is selected, manual fading will be

enabled if the trigger is received even once.

In either case, enabling manual fading will recall the

FADE TIME screen, and the cursor will move to the

PROGRESS knob. In this state, you can turn the

[DATA] encoder to immediately control manual fad-

ing.

• MUTE MASTER/DIRECT RECALL (TRIGGER

TYPE: LATCH, UNLATCH)

Select whether the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12]

switches on the console front panel will directly

recall the twelve pre-assigned scenes, or whether they

will act as on/off switches for mute groups 1–12.

(This is the same function as the DIRECT RECALL

screen MODE button.) As the switch operation, you

can choose either Latch (change each time the switch

is pressed) or Unlatch (direct recall is enabled only

while the switch remains pressed).

• NAME MODE CH/UNIT (TRIGGER TYPE:

LATCH, UNLATCH)

Select whether the display will show the short name

of the input channel or the unit name assigned to

that input channel. This is the same function as the

NAME MODE button (→p.8) shown in the lower

part of the screen. As the switch operation, you can

choose either Latch (change each time the switch is

pressed) or Unlatch (unit name is shown only while

the switch remains pressed).

• RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP (FLIP TYPE: MODULE

FLIP, FADER FLIP)

Perform the Flip operation for INPUT blocks 3/4

located in the right side of the console. If MODULE

FLIP is selected, INPUT blocks 3 and 4 will be

exchanged. If FADER FLIP is selected, the faders and

[MIX] encoders will be exchanged.

If you want to independently perform module

ﬂip for the left and right INPUT blocks, go to

the PANEL ASSIGN screen (a new screen added

in V1.5) and turn off the MODULE FLIP / PAT-

TERN CHANGE LINK button. If you want to

independently perform fader ﬂip for the left and

right INPUT blocks, you must turn off the

FADER FLIP LINK button in the same screen.

• TRACKING RECALL (KEY ASSIGN: ENABLE,

OFFSET LOCK)

Operate the Tracking Recall function. If ENABLE is

selected, tracking recall will be switched between

enabled/disabled. If OFFSET LOCK is selected, the

offset value will be locked/unlocked.

• MMC TRANSPORT (MIDI PORT, MMC ID,

TRANSPORT)

Tr ansmit an MMC transport command to the speci-

ﬁed MIDI port. As parameters, you can specify the

destination MIDI port (console or engine), the

GPI connector

input signal

Execute a function Execute a function

TRIGGER=

GPI connector

input signal

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

MMC ID (1–127, ALL), and the type of transport

command (<<REW, FF>>, STOP, PLAY>).

Since this is open-loop, the status of the other device

is not monitored.

• MMC LOCATE (MIDI PORT, MMC ID, FRAME,

TIME CODE)

To the speciﬁed MIDI port, transmit an MMC locate

command for moving to the desired time code loca-

tion. As parameters, you can specify the destination

MIDI port (console or engine), the MMC ID (1–127,

ALL), the frame rate (24, 25, 29.97, 30), and the time

code (hours/minutes/seconds/frames).

• REMOTE [RS422] TRANSPORT (RS422 PORT,

FORMAT, TRANSPORT)

Send a transport command to the speciﬁed RS422

connector. As parameters, you can specify the desti-

nation RS422 port (console or engine), the com-

mand format (P2 or DENON), and the type of

transport command. (In P2 format

, the transport

commands are <<REW, FF>>, STOP, PLAY>. In

DENON format

, the transport commands are

<<PREV, NEXT>>, STANDBY, PLAY>.)

Only one REMOTE [RS422] command format

can be speciﬁed for each component.

• REMOTE [RS422] LOCATE (RS422 PORT, FOR-

MAT, TIME CODE)

Send a locate command to the speciﬁed RS422 con-

nector. As parameters, you can specify the destina-

tion RS422 port (console or engine), the command

format (P2 or DENON), and the time code (hours/

minutes/seconds/frames). For DENON format, this

will operate as follows.

• You can also specify the TRACK number.

• TRACK 0 is valid only for CD.

• Frame can be up to 74, but will be changed to up to

86 frames by the MD device.

Only one REMOTE [RS422] command format

can be speciﬁed for each component.

• GPI TRANSPORT (GPI PORT, PORT, TRANS-

PORT)

Send a control signal to the speciﬁed port of GPI

OUT. As parameters, you can specify the output des-

tination GPI port (console or engine), the GPI OUT

port number (1–8), and the name (<<REW, FF>>,

STOP, PLAY) that will be displayed at the bottom of

the screen.

The TRANSPORT parameter you specify here is

used to select the function name (→p.10) when

the GPI IN test button for the console/engine is

displayed in the lower part of the screen. Please

be aware that regardless of the name that is

selected, the control signal that is actually out-

put will not change at all.

• GPI OUT CONTROL (GPI PORT, PORT)

To the speciﬁed GPI OUT port, send a control signal

that is identical to the GPI IN on/off state. As param-

eters, you can specify the destination GPI port (con-

sole or engine), and the GPI OUT port number (1–

8).

• TAP TEMPO

You can manually set the TEMPO parameter of an

internal effect by repeatedly pressing an external

switch connected to GPI IN at the desired tempo

(→p.51).

• TB ON (TRIGGER TYPE: LATCH, UNLATCH)

Talkback can be switched on/off by operating an

external switch connected to GPI IN. As the operat-

ing mode of the switch, you can choose either Latch

(change each time the switch is pressed) or Unlatch

(talkback is on only while the switch remains

pressed).

• USER DEFINE LED [TALLY IN] (LED No.)

GPI IN on/off can be used to switch the console’s

USER DEFINE switch LEDs between lit/dark. The

LED No. parameter selects the switch number (1–8).

When the list of USER DEFINE functions is dis-

played at the bottom of the screen, the buttons in the

screen will also switch between lit/dark in tandem

with this.

Hint

The console’s USER DEFINE LEDs can be used as

indicators. For example if the external device has a

TALLY output function that can indicate the state of

the device itself, you can assign GPI TRANSPORT or

MMC TRANSPORT to USER DEFINE, so that the

USER DEFINE LED will light or go dark according

to the state.

• INPUT/DCA ON (ASSIGN TYPE, CH No.)

Switch a speciﬁed input channel or a speciﬁed DCA

on/off. Use the ASSIGN TYPE parameter to select

either INPUT or DCA, and the CH No. parameter to

specify the channel.

• ENGINE B SELECT

When using the PM1D system in Mirror mode,

switch to engine B if possible.

Hint

By connecting a signal line from an uninterruptible

power supply etc. to GPI IN, you can construct a sys-

tem that automatically switches to engine B when a

power failure occurs.

1. P2 format is a command format used by the Yamaha D24, Tascam DA-98HR, and various professional video equipment.

2. DENON format is a command format used by Denon professional CD (DN-C680) and MD (DN-M1050R) devices. Set the

CD or MD to 9600 bps / RS422. In the case of DENON, pressing PLAY while already playing will select PAUSE mode, and

pressing STANDBY while already standing-by will select STOP mode. If you want to change from STOP to STANDBY, press

NEXT. Use a D-sub 9-pin straight cable to connect the REMOTE RS422 connector to the device being controlled in P2 or

DENON format.

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)

■ GPI OUT

1 OUTPUT PORT

Selects the GPI OUT port for which you will make

settings. You can select control ports 1–8 or engine

ports 1–8.

2 GPI OUT status

Indicates the output signal status of the correspond-

ing port. The character L or H indicates whether the

signal level is low (switch is grounded) or high

(open). The background color will be yellow when

active, and gray when inactive. Use the POLARITY

(4) ﬁeld to specify whether a low level or a high

level signal will be output for the Active state.

3 TALLY/TRIGGER/TOGGLE

Indicates the transmission method for the signal that

is output from GPI OUT. If the function of the port

has been set by the DIRECT ASSIGN button (6),

this will indicate TALLY, and it will not be possible to

switch it on/off. In this case, the active/inactive state

of the item selected by ASSIGNED TRIGGER (7)

will be detected, and the tally signal will be sent to

the corresponding GPI OUT port only while active.

The following diagram show an example of transmit-

ting a tally signal from the GPI OUT port in corre-

spondence to on/off operations of a speciﬁed [CUE]

switch.

If GPI TRANSPORT or GPI OUT CONTROL is

selected as the function assigned to USER DEFINE

or GPI IN, or if GPI is selected as the fader start out-

put destination, a button to switch between TRIG-

GER and TOGGLE will be displayed here. (For

details on operation →p.49 to 50).

If you want to control GPI OUT from USER

DEFINE, make settings in the UTILITY function

USER DEFINE screen. If you want to control it

from GPI IN, make settings in the GPI IN display

ﬁeld (→p.36). If you want to control it by fader

start, make sure that in the MIDI/GPI/TC function

FADER START screen (→p.43).

4 POLARITY

Selects the polarity of the signal that is output from

the corresponding port. You can select Low

(grounded when active) or High (open when active).

5 TEST

These buttons let you test the GPI OUT ports. Each

time you click one of these buttons, a control signal

will be output to GPI OUT according to the TALLY/

TRIGGER/TOGGLE (3) and POLARITY (4) set-

tings, just as though a trigger had occurred.

6 DIRECT ASSIGN button

Clicking this button will open the GPI OUT SETUP

popup window, where you can directly specify the

type of trigger that will control the signal output for

each GPI port.

In the GPI OUT SETUP popup window you can

select the following items.

• NO ASSIGN

No assignment.

• GPI IN FUNCTION

A control signal will be output according to the state

of the function that is assigned to the identical port

and port number of GPI IN. If you select this trigger,

the PARAMETER (8) ﬁeld will indicate the type of

GPI IN port (CONSOLE or ENGINE) and the port

number (1–8).

If an external switch is connected to GPI IN, GPI

OUT can be used as an indicator for that switch.

1 2 63 4 5 7 8

CUE CUE CUECUE

GPI connector

output signal

POLARITY=

GPI connector

output signal

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

• PREVIEW ON/OFF

Tr ansmit a control signal when PREVIEW mode is

turned on in the SCENE MEMORY block of the con-

sole.

• CUE ON/OFF

Tr ansmit a control signal when the DCA [CUE]

switch of a speciﬁed input channel or output chan-

nel, the EFFECT CUE of a speciﬁed internal effect, or

the KEY IN CUE or SUB IN CUE of a speciﬁed gate

turns on.

• CUE ON/OFF [INPUT ONLY]

Tr ansmit a control signal when the [CUE] switch of a

speciﬁed input channel turns on.

• CUE ON/OFF [DCA ONLY]

Tr ansmit a control signal when the [CUE] switch of a

speciﬁed DCA turns on.

• CUE ON/OFF [OUTPUT ONLY]

Tr ansmit a control signal when the [CUE] switch of a

speciﬁed output channel turns on.

7 ASSIGNED TRIGGER

Indicates the type of trigger that is assigned in 6.

8 PARAMETER

Displays more detailed information according to the

type of trigger assigned in 6.

Hint

There are four ways to specify a trigger for GPI OUT,

as follows.

• In the USER DEFINE screen (UTILITY function),

specify GPI TRANSPORT and GPI OUT CON-

TROL

• Specify GPI TRANSPORT and GPI OUT CON-

TROL as the GPI IN function

• In the FADER START screen (MIDI/GPI/TC func-

tion), specify GPI as the output destination

• Use the DIRECT ASSIGN button (6) to directly

specify the trigger.

It is not possible to simultaneously specify different

types of trigger for the same GPI OUT port. If you

attempt to make conﬂicting settings, the lower part

of the screen will indicate “GPI OUT SETUP IN

USE WAS STOLEN.” and the previous setting will

be lost.

Conversely, you may simultaneously specify more

than one trigger of the same type, for example by

assigning a GPI OUT CONTROL function from

more than one GPI IN to the same GPI OUT. In

this case, ﬁelds 7 and 8 will show “...” to indicate

that more than one trigger is assigned. However,

even if more than one trigger is assigned, only the

most recent trigger will be responded to.

Using GPI IN

Here’s how to send a control signal from an external device to GPI IN and remotely control the operation of the PM1D

system.

1. Connect a GPI compatible external device or exter-

nal switch to the GPI connector of the engine or

console.

• If you are using the PM1D system in Mirror

mode, only the GPI IN connector of the currently

selected engine can be used.

• If you are using the PM1D system in Dual Con-

sole mode (→p.11), only the GPI connector of

the currently-operated console can be used. It is

not possible to change the GPI connector settings

of the other unit, or to receive control signals

from the GPI connector of the other unit. Fur-

thermore, settings for the GPI connector of the

engine can be made only from console 1.

2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen.

3. Scroll the GPI IN list to show the INPUT port that

you want to set.

4. According to the character of the signal that is sent

from the external device / external switch, set the

TRIGGER ﬁeld to Low Active (active when switch is

grounded) or High Active (active when a high-level

signal is input, or when open).

5. At the left of the FUNCTION ﬁeld, click the

DIRECT ASSIGN button to access the GPI IN

SETUP popup window.

In the GPI IN SETUP popup window, the INPUT

PORT ﬁeld at the upper left shows the type (CON-

SOLE/ENGINE) of the currently selected port, and

the port number (GPI1–GPI8).

6. Scroll the list in the left part of the screen, and click

the function that you want to assign.

The PARAMETER ﬁeld will show the parameters

that are speciﬁc for that function.

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)

7. As necessary, use the PARAMETER ﬁeld located at

the right to specify the parameters, and click the

OK button.

The popup window will close.

8. In the same way, make other GPI IN settings as

desired.

Hint

By displaying GPI IN CONSOLE / GPI IN ENGINE

in the lower part of the screen, you can check the

function that is assigned to each port (→p.10).

9. Operate the external device / external switch to

send a control signal to the PM1D system.

The function that is assigned to that GPI IN port will

be executed on the PM1D system.

Hint

Of the functions that can be assigned to GPI IN, Tap

Te mpo is explained in detail on page 51, so you may

refer to that section as well.

Using GPI OUT

Here’s how you can remotely control an external device by sending control signals from GPI OUT when a speciﬁc opera-

tion is performed on the PM1D system.

1. Connect your GPI compatible external device to

the GPI connector of the engine or console.

• If you are using the PM1D system in Mirror

mode, GPI OUT output always operates in tan-

dem for engines A and B.

• If you are using the PM1D system in Dual Con-

sole mode (→p.11), only the GPI connector of

the currently-operated console can be used. It is

not possible to modify the settings for the GPI

connector of the other unit, or to receive control

signals from the GPI connector of the other unit.

Furthermore, settings for the GPI connector of

the engine can be made only from console 1.

2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen.

3. Scroll the GPI OUT list to display the OUTPUT

port that you want to set.

4. According to the character of the signal that your

external device is able to receive, set the POLARITY

ﬁeld to either Low (grounded when active) or High

(open when active).

5. At the left of the ASSIGNED TRIGGER ﬁeld, click

the DIRECT ASSIGN button to open the GPI

OUT SETUP popup window.

6. Scroll the list shown at the left side, click the trigger

that you want to assign, and click the OK button.

The popup window will close.

7. In the same way, make other GPI OUT settings as

desired.

Hint

You can use the TEST button in the GPI screen to

test-transmit control signals from each GPI OUT

according to the POLARITY and TRIGGER/TOG-

GLE/TALLY settings. This is a convenient way to ver-

ify that the external device will operate as you expect.

8. Execute the operation that is assigned to GPI OUT.

A control signal will be transmitted from the corre-

sponding GPI OUT port.

Hint

If you want to use GPI OUT as a USER DEFINE des-

tination, make settings in the USER DEFINE screen

(→p.52). If you want to use GPI OUT as a destina-

tion from GPI IN, make settings in GPI IN (→p.36).

Details on using this as a destination of Fader Start

are given on page 42.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Fader Start function

PM1D system software V1.5 provides a Fader Start function that can transmit control signals (GPI / MMC /

RS422) to an external device when a speciﬁc fader is operated. For example, this is a convenient way by which

an external device (such as a GPI-compatible CD player, RS422-compatible video player, or MIDI sequencer)

located at a distance can be operated remotely.

To use this function, you need to assign the Fader Start

function to the desired fader, and select the type of con-

trol signal (GPI / MMC / RS422) that you want to trans-

mit.

A “Fader Start” trigger will occur when this fader is

moved from below –60 dB to above –60 dB, and a “Fader

End” trigger will occur when the fader is moved back to

–∞. When these triggers occur, the control signal you

selected will be sent to the external device.

• If you want to generate a Fader Start trigger when

the fader position is already above –60 dB, move

the fader below –60 dB and then raise it once

again.

• If CONSOLE 1 or ENGINE is selected as the out-

put destination port, fader start will not work

when you operate the fader (or edit the parame-

ter via PC or MIDI) while console 1 is in PRE-

VIEW mode.

Similarly, if CONSOLE 2 is selected as the output

destination port, fader start will not work while

console 2 is in PREVIEW mode.

Fader start will not work even if you cancel PRE-

VIEW mode from the above states.

• If a PC (PM1D Manager) is connected on-line to

the engine by itself, recalling a scene which speci-

ﬁes a fade time will cause Fader Start to operate

immediately after the recall, regardless of the fade

time setting.

Fader start

Fader end

Fader Start function

FADER START screen

A FADER START screen has been added to the MIDI/GPI/TC function, allowing you to make settings for the fader start

function.

1 ASSIGN MODE

Selects whether fader start assignments will be made

for individual input channels or in groups of units.

You can select one of the following buttons.

Click one of these buttons to open the FADER

START INITIALIZE popup window, where you can

initialize the fader start settings. To initialize, click

the OK button.

• INPUT CH

When this button is on, you can make fader start

function assignments for individual input channels

and ST IN channels.

• UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10

When one of these buttons are on, you can make

fader start assignments for three input units of con-

secutive ID numbers. In this case, you can make

assignments for the input channels assigned to each

port of those units. (If multiple input channels are

assigned to one port, the assignment will be valid

only for the highest of those channels in the IN

PATCH function INPUT PATCH screen.)

• In either case, please be aware that you cannot

assign fader start to all channels and all ports.

• If the INPUT CH button is on, you can assign

fader start to odd-numbered input channels (in

vertical pair mode, channels 1–48) and the left

channel of stereo input channels.

• If a UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10 button is on, you can

assign fader start only to an odd-numbered port

of the available ports.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

2 INPUT CH/UNIT (Input channel / unit)

According to the selection for ASSIGN MODE (1),

this will indicate the channel or unit/card/port for

which you will make fader start assignments.

If the INPUT CH button is on, odd-numbered input

channels (in vertical pair mode, channels 1–48) will

be displayed.

If a UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10 button is on, only the

odd-numbered available ports will be displayed.

3 OUTPUT TYPE

Indicates the type of signal that will be output when

you operate the fader of the corresponding input

channel / unit. To change this assignment, click the

button at left to open the FADER START SETUP

popup window.

You can select the following items (parameters spe-

ciﬁc to that item are enclosed in parentheses).

• NO ASSIGN

No assignment.

• GPI (GPI PORT, START PORT, END PORT)

A control signal will be sent to the GPI connector.

You can specify the GPI port (console 1/2, engine),

start port (the port number that will output the sig-

nal when a fader start trigger is received), and end

port (the port number that will output the signal

when a fader end trigger is received).

Hint

If you specify the same GPI port as the start port and

end port, and select TOGGLE in the MIDI/GPI/TC

function GPI screen, fader start will cause GPI OUT

to be in the Active state and fader end will cause it to

be Inactive, allowing you to use fader start as Tally

output.

• MMC (MIDI PORT, MMC ID)

An MMC command will be sent to the MIDI con-

nector. You can specify the MIDI port (console 1/2,

engine) and the MMC ID (1–127, ALL). A PLAY

command will be sent when a fader start trigger

occurs, and a STOP command will be sent when a

fader end trigger occurs.

• RS422 (RS422 PORT, FORMAT)

An RS422 protocol transport command will be sent

to the RS422 connector. You can specify the RS422

port (console 1/2, engine) and the format (P2,

DENON). A PLAY command will be sent when a

fader start trigger occurs, and a STOP command (if

P2 format is selected) or PAUSE command (if

DENON format is selected) will be sent when a fader

end trigger occurs.

Only one type (P2 or DENON) can be selected

as the REMOTE [RS422] command format for

each component.

4 OUTPUT PORT

Indicates the port that will output the signal (console

1/2 or engine).

5 PARAMETER

According to the type of signal that is selected in

(3), this area displays the optional parameter set-

tings.

6 INITIALIZE

Click this button to open the FADER INITIALIZE

popup window, where you can initialize the fader

start settings. To initialize the settings, click the OK

button.

2 3 4 5 6

Fader Start function

Using the Fader Start function

Here’s how you can use the Fader Start function to remotely control an external device connected to the MIDI OUT con-

nector / RS422 connector / GPI connector.

1. Connect your external device to the MIDI IN con-

nector / RS422 connector / GPI connector of the

engine or console.

• If the PM1D system is being used in Mirror

mode, and the GPI connector is selected as the

output destination for fader start, the output will

always be linked for engine A and B. If the MIDI

connector or RS422 connector is selected as the

output destination, the command will be output

only to the currently-enabled engine.

• If the PM1D system is being used in Dual Con-

sole mode (→p.11), it will make no difference to

the Fader Start function whether you operate the

fader of one or the other console. Also, fader start

settings may be made from either console, and

the MIDI connector / RS422 connector / GPI

connector of either console may be speciﬁed as

the output destination.

It will also make no difference to the Fader Start

function whether you operate the fader from the PC

(PM1D Manager). However if you connect a PC to a

system that includes a console, it will not be possible

to make fader start settings from the PC. In this case,

you must make these settings from the console.

2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function FADER START

screen.

3. Use the buttons of the ASSIGN MODE area to select

how you will make fader start assignments.

• If you select the INPUT CH button

The INPUT CH/UNIT area will display the odd-

numbered input channels (in vertical pair mode,

channels 1–48) and the L channels of ST IN. The

name display ﬁeld will show the short name of the

channel or the unit name, according to the NAME

MODE you selected at the bottom of the screen.

• If you select UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10

The INPUT CH/UNIT area will display only the

odd-numbered ports of the usable units/cards/ports.

In this case, the name display area will always show

the unit name.

Hint

If you select UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10 as the ASSIGN

MODE, you will be able to make fader start assign-

ments that depend on patch settings.

For example if multiple audio sources are being

input separately to the ports of multiple units, you

can create patch library or scene settings that succes-

sively connect different audio sources to the same

fader, so that the same fader can be used for fader

start operation even after recall.

When you click the ASSIGN MODE button, the

FADER START INITIALIZE popup window will

appear, asking you whether it is OK to initialize the

fader start settings.

Hint

• If the INPUT CH button is on, only every other

fader will be usable for the Fader Start function. If

the corresponding input channel is paired, you can

use the other fader to control the Fader Start func-

tion.

• If you want to assign the Fader Start function to

the faders of consecutively-numbered input chan-

nels, turn on one of the UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10

buttons, and assign consecutive input channels to

each port, or else use Vertical Pair mode.

4. If it is OK to initialize the fader start settings, click

the OK button to close the popup window.

When you click the OK button, all existing settings

will be lost.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

5. Scroll the list to display the channel/unit that you

want to assign, and click the button in the

OUTPUT TYPE ﬁeld.

The FADER START SETUP popup window will

appear, allowing you to select the type of signal that

will be sent.

6. In the FUNCTION ﬁeld, select the type of signal

that you want to send: GPI, MMC, or RS422.

7. As necessary, specify parameters in the PARAME-

TER area at the right.

• If you selected GPI

Use the GPI PORT buttons to select the GPI port

(console 1/2, engine) to which the command will be

sent.

Set START PORT to specify the port number (1–8)

that will output the signal when a fader start trigger

is received. Set END PORT to specify the port num-

ber (1–8) that will output the signal when a fader end

trigger is received.

In order to enable GPI, you must go to the

MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen, and make

GPI output settings (POLARITY, TRIGGER/

TOGGLE)

• If you selected MMC

Use the MIDI PORT buttons to select the MIDI port

(console 1/2, engine) to which the command will be

sent. Set the MMC ID knob value to match the ID

(1–127, ALL) of the external MIDI device that will

receive the command.

Only one type (P2 or DENON) can be selected

as the REMOTE [RS422] command format for

each component.

• If you selected RS422

Use the RS422 PORT buttons to select the RS422

port (console 1/2, engine) to which the command

will be sent. Use the FORMAT knob to select the for-

mat (P2 or DENON) of the RS422 protocol.

8. When you have ﬁnished making parameter set-

tings, click [OK].

You will return to the FADER START screen.

If another function had already been assigned to

the GPI port you choose as the destination, a mes-

sage of “GPI OUT SETUP IN USE WAS STOLEN”

will appear at the bottom of the screen when you

click the OK button, and the settings for that port

will be defeated. You can check the assigned func-

tion in the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen.

9. Use the same procedure to make settings for other

channels/units.

The following steps will differ slightly depending on

whether you are using MMC/RS422 or GPI.

Fader Start function

■ When using MMC/RS422

10. Operate the corresponding fader.

If you selected MMC as the control signal, the MMC

PLAY command and STOP command will be trans-

mitted from the speciﬁed MIDI OUT connector

when you raise and lower the fader.

For details on P2 and DENON, refer to the explana-

tion for GPI RS422 (→p.38).

If you selected RS422 as the control signal, the

RS422 protocol PLAY command and STOP com-

mand (if P2 format is selected) or the PLAY com-

mand and PAUSE command (if DENON format is

selected) will be transmitted from the speciﬁed

RS422 connector when you raise and lower the fader.

MIDI OUT

MMC

PLAY command

MMC

STOP command

RS-422

RS422 protocol

PLAY command

RS422 protocol

STOP/PAUSE command

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

■ When using GPI

11. Access the GPI screen.

For the GPI OUT port to which you assigned fader start, the ASSIGNED TRIGGER ﬁeld will indicate FADER START.

If you speciﬁed different GPI OUT ports as the start port and end port, the display will appear as follows.

If you speciﬁed the same GPI OUT port as the start port and end port, the display will appear as follows.

The settings of a GPI OUT port to which you assigned the fader start function cannot be edited in the GPI screen. If

you want to edit these settings, you must return to the FADER START screen.

However if you select a different item in the ASSIGN TRIGGER ﬁeld of the GPI screen, the bottom of the screen will

indicate “GPI OUT SETUP IN USE WAS STOLEN,” and the FADER START screen settings for that port will be

defeated.

12. Use the button in the OUTPUT PORT ﬁeld to select either TOGGLE or TRIGGER as the transmission method for

the signal that is output from GPI OUT.

13. Use the buttons in the POLARITY ﬁeld to select the polarity of the signal that is output from GPI OUT.

14. Operate the appropriate fader.

When GPI is selected as the control signal, the operation will depend on the settings of the GPI screen OUTPUT

PORT ﬁeld and POLARITY ﬁeld, and on the parameter settings in the FADER START screen.

Fader Start function

The following diagram is an example of how trigger signals (low active) are transmitted from GPI OUT ports 1 and 2

to an external device when fader start and fader end occur.

To produce this type of operation, ﬁrst go to the FADER

START screen, select GPI as the control signal for the corre-

sponding faders, and specify START PORT = 1 and END

PORT = 2.

Next, move to the GPI screen, and for GPI OUT ports 1/2, set the OUTPUT PORT button to and the

POLARITY button to (low active).

The interval of the trigger signal is ﬁxed at 300m sec.

Output signal

of GPI OUT 1

300m sec

Output signal

of GPI OUT 2

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

The following diagram is an example of how the low level signal and high level signal are switched for GPI OUT port

1 when a fader start occurs and when a fader end occurs.

To produce this type of operation, ﬁrst go to the FADER

START screen, select GPI as the control signal for the corre-

sponding fader, and specify START PORT = 1 and END

PORT = 1.

Next, move to the GPI screen, and for that GPI OUT port, set the OUTPUT PORT button to and the

POLARITY button to (low active).

Output signal

of GPI OUT 1

Tap Tempo function

PM1D system software V1.5 provides a “Tap Tempo function” which lets you manually set the TEMPO

parameter of an internal effect by tapping an external switch connected to the GPI connector. Here’s how to

use this function.

1. Connect an external switch to the GPI connector of

the engine or console.

2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen.

3. Scroll the GPI IN list until you see the INPUT port

to which is connected the switch you will use for

tapping.

4. According to the character of the signal that is sent

from the external switch, set the TRIGGER ﬁeld to

either low active (On when the switch is grounded)

or high active (On when a high-level signal is input,

or when open).

5. Click at the left of the FUNCTION ﬁeld to open

the GPI IN SETUP popup window.

6. Scroll the list at the left, and select TAP TEMPO as

the function.

TAP TEMPO has no parameters to set.

7. Click the OK button to close the popup window.

With these settings, you have completed the prepara-

tions for using an external switch with the Tap

Te mpo function.

8. Access the desired screen EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8.

9. From the effect library, recall an effect of a type that

contains a TEMPO parameter (e.g., Delay LCR,

Echo, Chorus).

TEMPO is a parameter that lets you specify a time-

related effect parameter (such as DELAY in Delay

LCR or Echo, or FREQ. in Chorus) in terms of BPM

units.

10. At intervals of the desired tempo, press the external

switch that you assigned to the Tap Tempo func-

tion.

When you have pressed the switch four times, the

average value (BPM) of the three intervals will be cal-

culated, and that value will be input to the TEMPO

parameter.

• The Tap Tempo function is valid only for the cur-

rently-displayed internal effect. However, it does

nothing if the effect type does not include a

TEMPO parameter.

• If the average value is outside the range of 20–300

BPM, it will be ignored.

• Due to functional limitations, you cannot use the

Tap Tempo function by clicking the GPI IN test

button located at the bottom of the screen.

First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap

Average value of the intervals will be

input to the parameter

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Added functions in the USER DEFINE screen

The following functions can now be selected in the UTILITY function USER DEFINE screen.

• MANUAL FADE ON

• MUTE MASTER/DIRECT RECALL

• NAME MODE CH/UNIT

• RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP

• TRACKING RECALL

• MMC TRANSPORT

• MMC LOCATE

• REMOTE [RS422] TRANSPORT

• REMOTE [RS422] LOCATE

• GPI TRANSPORT

• GPI OUT CONTROL

The options and parameters of each item are the same as

for the items in the GPI screen GPI IN SETUP popup

window. Refer to page 37 and 38 for details.

Hint

To access the USER DEFINE screen, you can either

press the console [UTILITY] switch (located in the

LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block) several times, or

click the on-screen MENU button → UTILITY but-

ton → USER DEFINE tab.

Input channel panel assignments

The layout of the input channels assigned to INPUT blocks 1–4 of the console (CS1D) can now be freely spec-

iﬁed in units of twelve consecutive channels. In the same way, the ST IN channels assigned to ST IN block 1/2

can be speciﬁed in units of two consecutively-numbered channels.

The panel assign settings can be saved as a user pattern. Furthermore, you can choose any of eight patterns

(two preset, six user patterns) and use a switch such as FADER FLIP to select them successively.

PANEL ASSIGN screen

In the UTILITY function, a PANEL ASSIGN screen has been added, allowing you to make panel assign settings.

Input channel panel assignments

1 MODULE FLIP BUTTON mode

These buttons choose one of the following two func-

tions for the MODULE [FLIP] switch in the

SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL section. (This also

applies to a USER DEFINE switch or GPI IN trigger

to which the RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP function is

assigned.)

• MODULE FLIP ..........As in previous versions, the

input channels assigned to

the upper and lower INPUT

blocks will be changed.

• PAT TERN CHANGE .Each time you press the

MODULE [FLIP] switch,

the panel assignment pat-

terns registered in the pat-

tern list (7) of the PANEL

ASSIGN screen will be

selected successively.

If you turn off the MODULE FLIP/PATTERN

CHANGE LINK button (A), the MODULE [FLIP]

switch will be valid only for the left side of the panel

(INPUT block 1/2).

In this case, module ﬂip switching for the right side

(ST IN block 1/2, INPUT block 3/4) is performed

by the USER DEFINE switches, the MODULE but-

tons located in the lower part of the screen, or the

GPI function RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP (→p.37).

2 PAT TERN INITIALIZE

When you click this button, the PANEL ASSIGN

screen settings (with the exception of PRESET PAT-

TERN MODE (3)) will be initialized.

3 PRESET PATTERN MODE

These buttons select one of the following two

arrangements for the preset patterns (patterns 1 and

5).

• UPPER-LOWER

This is the existing default arrangement, in which

input channels are arranged in the order of INPUT

block 1→2→3→4.

• LEFT-RIGHT

Input channels are arranged in the order of INPUT

block 1→3→2→4.

Preset pattern 1 will be as follows when each arrange-

ment is selected.

• Even if you use the PATTERN INITIALIZE but-

ton (2) to execute initialization, the PRESET

PATTERN MODE setting will not be affected.

When you execute initialization, the arrangement

of pattern 1 will be copied to patterns 2–4, and

the arrangement of pattern 5 will be copied to

patterns 6–8. This means that the PRESET PAT-

TERN MODE settings (UPPER-LOWER/LEFT-

RIGHT) will be applied to all patterns 1–8.

• The arrangement of the SCENE function

TRACKING RECALL screen (when the MODE

button has selected INPUT 1–48 or INPUT 49–

96) and the METER function input channel

screens will change according to the PRESET

PATTERN MODE.

4 Pattern display area

This area shows the channel conﬁgurations of the

preset patterns (patterns 1 and 5) and user patterns

(patterns 2–4, 6–8).

5 ENABLE/DISABLE

Enables/disables each pattern. Patterns for which this

button is set to ENABLE will be registered in the pat-

tern list (7).

UPPER-LOWER

INPUT block 2

CH13-24

INPUT block 1

CH1-12

INPUT block 4

CH37-48

INPUT block 3

CH25-36

LEFT-RIGHT

INPUT block 3

CH25-36

INPUT block 1

CH1-12

INPUT block 4

CH37-48

INPUT block 2

CH13-24

4 5 6

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

It is not possible to disable the ENABLE button of

the currently selected pattern. If you want to disable

it, use the MODULE [FLIP] switch to select a dif-

ferent pattern as the panel assignment, and then

operate the ENABLE button.

6 Channel select

You can click the button to edit each block of a

user pattern.

7 Pattern list

These areas list the patterns that you registered using

the ENABLE button. The list is divided into the left

(INPUT block 1/2) and right (INPUT block 3/4, ST

IN block 1/2) sides of the panel.

The patterns registered in this list can be switched in

the following ways.

• Click in the on-screen pattern list to select a pat-

tern directly.

• Select PATTERN CHANGE for the MODULE

FLIP BUTTON MODE (1), and press the MOD-

ULE [FLIP] switch located in the SELECTED

INPUT CHANNEL section of the panel.

• Select PATTERN CHANGE in (1), and operate

the USER DEFINE switch or GPI IN control

source to which you assigned the RIGHT SIDE

PANEL FLIP function.

• Select PATTERN CHANGE in (1), and click the

PATT [L] or PATT [R] button in the MODULE

area at the bottom of the screen.

• In the PANEL STATUS area at the top of the

screen, click the channel number.

However depending on the MODULE FLIP/PAT-

TERN CHANGE LINK (A) setting, pattern switch-

ing may not be linked between the left side and right

side of the panel.

8 CURRENT ASSIGN

Indicates the panel assign status that is currently

valid. This is the same as displayed in the PANEL

STATUS area (→p.6) in the upper part of the screen.

9 FADER FLIP

Switches the fader ﬂip mode (CH or MIX). This is

the same function as the FADER FLIP screen on the

panel, or the FADER FLIP button (→p.6) in the

PANEL STATUS area located in the upper part of the

screen.

0 FADER FLIP LINK

Speciﬁes whether FADER FLIP button (9) operations

will be linked between the left and right sides of the

panel. If this button is off, operations of the panel

FADER FLIP switch will affect only the left side of

the panel.

Hint

If this button is off, fader ﬂip for the right side can be

switched using a USER DEFINE switch, or the

FADER FLIP button (→p.6) in the PANEL STATUS

area located in the upper part of the screen, or the

RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP function assigned to a

GPI control (→p.37).

A MODULE FLIP/PATTERN CHANGE LINK

Speciﬁes whether MODULE [FLIP] button opera-

tions will be linked for both sides of the panel. If this

button is off, operations of the MODULE [FLIP]

button will affect only the left side of the panel.

Hint

• The actual result of pressing the MODULE [FLIP]

button will depend on the MODULE FLIP BUT-

TON MODE (1).

• If this button is turned off, module ﬂip for the

right side can be switched using a USER DEFINE

switch, the MODULE buttons at the bottom of the

screen, or the RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP function

assigned to a GPI control (→p.37).

Input channel panel assignments

Switching the panel assign setting

1. Access the UTILITY function PANEL ASSIGN

screen.

2. Click the INITIALIZE button.

The settings of the PANEL ASSIGN screen will be

initialized (except for PRESET PATTERN MODE).

3. In the pattern display area, use the buttons for

the user patterns (patterns 2–4, 6–8) to specify the

channels that you want to assign to each pattern.

If desired, you may assign the same group of chan-

nels to more than one INPUT block, or combine

groups of input channels 1–48 with groups of input

channels 49–96.

4. For the pattern that you want to use, switch the

ENABLE/DISABLE button to “ENABLE.” The

selected pattern will be registered in the pattern

list, in the order of its pattern number.

5. Turn on the PATTERN CHANGE button of the

MODULE FLIP BUTTON MODE section.

Now you can use the MODULE [FLIP] switch to

change the panel assign pattern.

6. Press the MODULE [FLIP] switch.

The patterns registered in the pattern list will change

sequentially.

Hint

If you select a preset pattern (pattern 1, 5), the

[FLIP] switch LED will go dark. If you select a user

pattern (pattern 2–4, 6–8), the [FLIP] switch LED

will light.

7. If you don’t want the MODULE [FLIP] switch to

affect the left and right sides of the panel in tan-

dem, turn off the MODULE FLIP/PATTERN

CHANGE LINK button.

In this case, you can assign the RIGHT SIDE PANEL

FLIP function to a USER DEFINE switch (or to GPI

IN), and use that USER DEFINE switch (or GPI IN)

to operate fader ﬂip for the right side.

Hint

If patterns 1 and 5 are registered in the pattern list,

you can use the GLOBAL LAYER [1-48]/[49-96]

switches to select patterns 1 and 5. Press the GLO-

BAL LAYER [1-48] switch to select pattern 1, or the

[49-96] switch to select pattern 5.

If you placed the same input channels in a different

INPUT block, you can use the [SEL] switches of

either block to set/defeat pairing. Also note that the

[SEL] switches of adjacent channels will set/defeat

pairing when they are pressed simultaneously even

if the switches are in different blocks.

Hint

An INPUT [PANEL] button has been added to the

DISPLAY SELECT section of the TRACKING

RECALL screen.

If the INPUT [PANEL] button is pressed, the offset

display of the TRACKING RECALL screen will be

arranged in the same order as the console layout

speciﬁed by panel assign. Since the order is the same

as the console layout, operation and checking will be

easier.

However, it is not possible to press this button in

PM1D Manager since it does not have a panel assign

function.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Horizontal pair and vertical pair

When input channels are paired, the method of pairing adjacent channels such as 1+2, 3+4... (as in previous

versions of the system) is called “horizontal pair mode.” Version 1.5 now also allows channels to be paired in

combinations such as 1+49, 2+50..., and this is called “vertical pair mode.”

When you switch from horizontal pair mode to vertical

pair mode, new numbers will be assigned to each input

channel as follows:

channel 1 → no change channel 2 → channel 49

channel 3 → channel 2 channel 4 → channel 50

channel 5 → channel 3 channel 6 → channel 51

channel 7 → channel 4 channel 8 → channel 52

However, please note that this simply means that the

input channel previously called “channel 2” has now

been renamed “channel 49” and changed places on the

panel. Elements such as unit assignments, channel

name, and mix parameters do not change. This means

that even if you switch from horizontal pair mode to ver-

tical pair mode, the combinations that can be paired will

not change.

In each screen of the display (except for the PANEL

ASSIGN screen and TRACKING RECALL screen),

switching to vertical pair mode merely changes the dis-

played numbers; the conﬁguration will stay the same as

in horizontal pair mode.

Horizontal pair mode

Vertical pair mode

➪

Horizontal pair and vertical pair

Here’s how to use vertical pair mode.

1. Access the UTILITY function PAIR MODE screen

(a new screen in this version).

In the PAIR MODE screen you can switch between

horizontal pair mode and vertical pair mode.

2. Click the VERTICAL PAIR button to turn it on.

Ve rtical pair mode will be enabled.

3. To specify a vertical pair, hold down the [SHIFT]

switch and press the [SEL] switch of the input

channel that you want to pair.

The CHANNEL PAIRING popup window will

appear, asking you to conﬁrm the pairing.

Hint

If you have changed the panel assignment in the

PANEL ASSIGN screen (→p.55), and channels that

can be vertically paired are simultaneously placed on

the panel, you can set/defeat pairing by pressing their

two [SEL] switches simultaneously, as in previous

versions.

4. Press one of the three buttons to specify how the

parameters will be copied between channels.

In this state, you can use the input channel 1 fader to

control channels 1 + 49, and the input channel 2

fader to control channels 2 + 50. This is particularly

convenient when you want to use adjacent faders to

control multiple stereo sources.

5. To defeat pairing, hold down the [SHIFT] switch

and press the same [SEL] switch as you did in step

The RELEASING CHANNEL PAIRING popup win-

dow will appear, asking you to conﬁrm that you want

to defeat pairing. To defeat pairing, click the OK but-

ton.

Hint

You can also set/defeat vertical pairing by clicking the

pair button in the appropriate screen.

• In order to use the [SHIFT] switch + [SEL]

switch to set/defeat vertical pairing, both “PRO-

HIBIT PAIR CHANGE ON PANEL” and “L,R-

MONO SELECT ON PANEL” must be turned off

in the PREFERENCE screen.

• If both “PROHIBIT PAIR CHANGE ON PANEL”

and “L,R-MONO SELECT ON PANEL” are on,

pressing the [SHIFT] switch + input channel

[SEL] switch will select LR-MONO.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Mix minus

You can now quickly exclude the signal of a speciﬁc channel from the signals sent to a VARI type MIX bus.

(This operation is called “mix minus.”)

For example, this is convenient in situations where a performer or announcer wants to monitor the same mix

as the STEREO bus, but does not want to hear the sound s/he is producing.

New functions in the PAN/ROUTING screen

In order to allow the mix minus operation, the following

buttons have been added to the PAN/ROUTING screen.

1 MIX MINUS button

This button excludes only the signal of the corre-

sponding channel from the signal that is sent to the

speciﬁed MIX bus. When you click this button a

popup window will appear, allowing you to select the

applicable MIX bus.

You can also access this popup window by simulta-

neously pressing the [SEL] switch of the INPUT/ST

IN block and the [SEL] switch of the MIX block.

2 POST ON/POST TO ST button

This button switches the point from which the signal

is taken when the post-fader signal is sent to adjacent

odd-numbered / even-numbered VARI-type MIX

buses.

If POST ON is selected, the signal will be sent from

immediately after the [ON] switch of the input chan-

nel. If POST TO ST is selected, the signal immedi-

ately after the [TO ST] switch will be sent.

The following diagrams show how the signal ﬂow

differs according to whether the MIX bus 1/2 POST

ON/POST TO ST button is set to POST ON or POST

TO ST.

• POST ON/POST TO ST=

When you click the MIX MINUS button to use the

mix-minus function, the POST ON/POST TO ST

button of that MIX bus will automatically switch to

POST TO ST.

The setting of the POST TO ST button is valid in FIX

mode as well.

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

ON TO ST

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

ON TO ST

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

Mix minus

Using mix minus

1. Access the PAN/ROUTING function CH to MIX

screen.

2. Display the input channel whose signal you want to

exclude from the MIX bus, and click the MIX

MINUS button for that channel.

The MIX MINUS SETTING popup window will

appear.

Hint

You can also open the MIX MINUS SETTING

popup window by simultaneously pressing the

INPUT/ST IN block [SEL] switch and the MIX block

[SEL] switch.

3. Scroll the list to select the applicable MIX bus.

Hint

• Instead of scrolling the list, you can select the MIX

button by pressing a [SEL] key in the MIX block.

• If desired, you can press a [SEL] switch of the

INPUT block / ST IN block while this popup win-

dow is displayed, to switch the input channel

whose signal will be excluded from the MIX bus.

4. Click the OK button.

When you click the OK button in the MIX MINUS

SETTING popup window, the settings of the PAN/

ROUTING screen will change as follows.

With these settings, the identical signal as sent to the

STEREO bus, but with just the corresponding input

channel excluded, will be sent to the desired MIX

bus.

Before executing the Mix Minus operation

After executing the Mix Minus operation for

Input channel 1 → MIX bus 1

The send level of the signal that is sent

from the selected input channel to the

applicable MIX bus will be lowered to –∞.

The MIX send ON/OFF button will auto-

matically turn ON.

The send level of the signals sent to the

applicable MIX bus from all channels

other than the above will be set to nom-

inal level (0.0 dB) The MIX send ON/

OFF button will automatically turn on.

The POST ON/POST TO ST

button of the applicable MIX

bus will change to POST TO

ST.

The PRE/POST buttons

of the applicable MIX bus

will all change to POST.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Cautions regarding mix minus

Please be aware of the following items when you use mix

minus.

• Mix minus is a shortcut for rapidly making settings ; it

is not like changing a “mode.” This means that even

after executing mix minus, you are still free to edit the

various parameters in the CH to MIX screen.

• The mix minus operation always applies only to the

last-selected input channel. If you want to exclude two

or more input channels from the signals that are sent

to a speciﬁc MIX bus, execute the mix minus opera-

tion and then edit the settings manual.

• The setting of the POST ON/POST TO ST button

applies to two adjacent odd-numbered / even-num-

bered MIX buses. This means that, for example, if you

execute the mix minus operation on MIX bus 1, the

signal being sent to MIX bus 2 may also be affected.

(Signals from an input channel whose [TO ST] button

is turned off will not be sent to either MIX buses 1 or

2.)

• The mix minus operation is valid only for VARI type

MIX buses. You cannot select the MIX MINUS setting

popup window for a FIX type MIX bus.

If you want to obtain mix minus results with a FIX

type MIX bus, you can easily do so by using the job

select operation described on the next page.

• If an input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel is

selected), the send level of the signal sent from both

channels to the applicable MIX bus will be –∞.

• The mix minus operation is valid even if the applicable

MIX bus is paired. In this case, the PAN settings of

adjacent odd-numbered / even-numbered input chan-

nels will be reﬂected by the PAN settings of the paired

MIX buses.

Before executing mix minus

After executing mix minus for input channel 1 →

paired MIX buses 1/2

The PAN settings of adjacent odd-numbered /

even-numbered input channels will be

reﬂected by the PAN of the paired MIX buses.

Job select

In PM1D system software V1.5, you can move the cursor to a speciﬁc parameter in the screen and press the

[SHIFT] + [ENTER] switches to access a popup window of jobs that can be used for that parameter. (This

operation is called “job select.”) If job select is available for a parameter, the cursor frame will turn yellow

when it is moved to that parameter.

In version 1.5, the job select function can be used for the following parameters in the CH to MIX screen

(PAN/ROUTING function).

Mix send on/off

The signal sent from an input channel to a MIX bus can

be switched on/off by this job. When you move the cur-

sor to this parameter and press the [SHIFT] + [ENTER]

switches, the following popup window will appear.

You can select the following jobs.

• ALL OFF [ALL MIX ↑ ↓]

• ALL ON [ALL MIX ↑ ↓]

The signals sent from the selected channel to all MIX

buses will be switched on or off together.

• ALL OFF [ALL CH ↔]

• ALL ON [ALL CH ↔]

The signals sent from all channels to the selected

MIX bus will be switched on or off together.

• ALL OFF [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

• ALL ON [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

The signals sent from all channels to all MIX buses

will be switched on or off together.

Mix send on/off

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Mix send point

These jobs switch the pre-fader/post-fader selection for

the signal sent from an input channel to a MIX bus.

When you move the cursor to this parameter and press

the [SHIFT] + [ENTER] switches, the following popup

window will appear.

You can select the following jobs.

• ALL POST [ALL MIX ↑ ↓]

• ALL PRE [ALL MIX ↑ ↓]

The extraction point of the signals sent from the

selected channel to all MIX buses will simultaneously

be switched to post-fader or pre-fader.

• ALL POST [ALL CH ↔]

• ALL PRE [ALL CH ↔]

The extraction point of the signals sent from all

channels to the selected MIX bus will simultaneously

be switched to post-fader or pre-fader.

• ALL POST [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

• ALL PRE [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

The extraction point of the signals sent from all

channels to all MIX buses will be simultaneously be

switched to post-fader or pre-fader.

The above job is not valid for FIX type MIX buses.

If the channel on which you execute this job is

either side of an LR-MONO pair, the job will oper-

ate as for paired channels

Mix send level

Using these jobs, the value of the signal level that is sent

from an input channel to a MIX bus can be copied to

another channel. When you move the cursor to this

parameter and press the [SHIFT] + [ENTER] switches,

the following popup window will appear.

You can select the following jobs.

• LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ↑ ↓]

The value of the selected parameter will be copied to

the send level of the signal that is sent from that

channel to all MIX buses.

• LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ↔]

The value of the selected parameter will be copied to

the send level of the signal that is sent from all chan-

nels to that MIX bus.

• LEVEL COPY [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

The value of the selected parameter will be copied to

the send level of the signal that is sent from all chan-

nels to all MIX buses.

The above job is not valid for FIX type MIX buses.

If the channel on which you execute this job is

either side of an LR-MONO pair, the job will oper-

ate as for paired channels

Mix send point Mix send level

Job select

Mix send pan/balance

Using these jobs, the pan/balance setting of the signal

that is sent from an input channel to paired MIX buses

can be copied to another channel.

Move the cursor to the PAN/BALANCE knob that is dis-

played when MIX buses are paired, and press the

[SHIFT] + [ENTER] switches to open the following

popup window.

You can select the following jobs.

• PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL MIX ↑ ↓]

The value of the selected parameter will be copied to

the pan (balance) of the signal that is sent from that

channel to all paired MIX buses.

• PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL MIX ↔]

The value of the selected parameter will be copied to

the pan (balance) of the signals that are sent from all

channels to that MIX bus.

• PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

The value of the selected parameter will be copied to

the pan (balance) of the signals that are sent from all

channels to all paired MIX buses.

• The above job is not valid for unpaired MIX

buses or for FIX type MIX buses.

• You cannot copy a PAN parameter to a BAL-

ANCE parameter (or vice versa).

• You cannot copy to a channel whose VARI PAN

LINK is turned on.

Mix send pan/balance

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Auto Store function

When storing a scene in previous versions, if a unit, patch, or name included in that scene had been changed,

a special popup window appeared, requiring you to specify a library number in which to save each type of

data. However from version 1.5, you can use an Auto Store function which automatically selects the store-des-

tination library number and title. This is convenient when you want to store a scene in a hurry.

You can execute the audio store function either in the screen or by using the [STORE] switch.

Using Auto Store from the screen

1. Access the SCENE function MEMORY screen, select

the store-destination scene number, and then click

the STORE button (or in the SCENE MEMORY sec-

tion of the console, select the store-destination

scene number and press the [STORE] switch).

The SCENE STORE popup window will appear,

allowing you to assign a title and comment to the

scene, and store it.

2. To execute auto store, click the AUTO STORE but-

ton.

The data will be automatically stored with the library

number and title shown above the AUTO STORE

button.

If the unit, patch, or name were changed, or if the

most-recently stored/recalled unit library was read-

only, the lowest-numbered vacant library number

will be selected. In this case, the selected library will

be stored with the same name as the title of the scene

(shown in yellow characters).

If there was no change in the unit, patch, or name,

the most-recently stored/recalled library number will

automatically be linked to the scene (shown in gray

characters).

If there is not even one vacant library of the corre-

sponding type, the AUTO STORE button will be

masked, and cannot be clicked. In this case, the

library number ﬁeld will indicate “--” and the title

ﬁeld will indicate “--DATA FULL--”.

Hint

• You can click the MANUAL STORE button and

specify the store-destination unit, patch, and name

as in previous versions.

• For libraries that require you to specify the store-

destination, yellow “??” symbols will be displayed

above the MANUAL STORE button.

• If the unit, patch, or name has been changed, the

libraries will not be overwritten; a new library

number will be selected automatically for storing,

even when overwriting a previously-stored scene.

This prevents the auto store operation from affect-

ing other scenes in case a library is linked from

more than one scene. If you want your changes to

be reﬂected by all scenes that link to that library,

click the MANUAL STORE button and perform

the store operation as in previous versions, or edit

each library directly.

Auto Store function

Using Auto Store from the [STORE] switch

Here’s how to execute the auto store function simply by operating the SCENE MEMORY block [STORE] switch.

1. Access the UTILITY function PREFERENCE

screen.

2. For the USE STORE SW ON PANEL FOR AUTO

STORE ﬁeld, click the ON/OFF button to turn it

ON.

3. To execute the auto store function, press the SCENE

MEMORY block [STORE] switch twice.

The ﬁrst time you press the [STORE] switch, the

SCENE STORE popup window will appear. The sec-

ond time you press it, auto store will be executed.

(The result is the same as clicking the AUTO STORE

button.)

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Global Paste function

The settings of a desired channel or desired parameter in the current scene can now be copied and pasted into

one or more scenes in scene memory. This is called the Global Paste function. It provides a convenient way for

changes in the current scene to be reﬂected in previously-stored scenes

GLOBAL PASTE screen

The GLOBAL PASTE screen has been added to the SCENE function.

1 PASTE MODE

Here you can select one of the following as the

item(s) to be pasted.

• UNIT........................... Settings of an input unit

assigned to an input chan-

nel

• INPUT ........................Parameters of an input

channel

• OUTPUT ....................Parameters of an output

channel

• DCA, GEQ, EFFECT ..DCA level and mute on/off

settings, GEQ settings,

EFFECT settings

Global Paste function

2 CURRENT SCENE

Here you can select the channel(s) and parameter(s)

of the current scene whose data will be copied. The

items that will be displayed here will depend on the

PASTE MODE (1) selection.

3 DESTINATION SCENE

For each scene stored in memory, this area indicates

the scene number, title, and protect on/off setting.

Click the number/title ﬁeld to select the paste-desti-

nation scene(s). (The currently selected scene is dis-

played in blue.) You can also switch protect on/off

from this screen.

Hint

• By holding down the [SHIFT] key and clicking a

number/title in the scene list, you can select two or

more consecutive scenes.

• A maximum of 100 scenes can be selected simulta-

neously.

4 From No./To No. (From number / To number)

When selecting two or more consecutive scenes as

the paste-destination, these knobs specify the start-

ing and ending numbers.

5 PASTE

Click this button to execute the paste.

6 UNDO

Click this button to undo the previously-executed

paste operation.

If you recall another scene or sort the scene memo-

ries after executing paste, the Undo function will no

longer be available.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Using the Global Paste function

1. Access the SCENE function GLOBAL PASTE

screen.

2. Use the PASTE MODE buttons to select the type of

item that you want to paste.

3. In the CURRENT SCENE section, select the chan-

nel(s) or parameter(s) that you want to copy.

The items displayed in the CURRENT SCENE area

will depend on the selection of the PASTE MODE

(1) area.

• When PASTE MODE = UNIT

Click a button in the UNIT ﬁeld to select the unit

from which data will be copied.

• If the source unit is a different type than the des-

tination unit, no parameters will be copied.

• Even if SET ALL is selected, unpatched units will

not be pasted.

• When PASTE MODE = INPUT

Use the SOURCE CH SELECT area to select the

input channel(s), and the PARAMETER SELECT

area to select the parameter(s).

You can select the following parameters.

• ALL..............................All parameters except

NAME

• AT T ..............................Attenuator

• EQ................................EQ function settings

• GATE...........................GATE function settings

• COMP .........................COMP function settings

• DELAY ........................DELAY function settings

• FADER ........................Fader level

• ON...............................[ON] switch on/off status

• PAN/BAL ....................Pan/balance settings

• INSERT .......................Insert on/off status and

insertion point

• SEND...........................Send level to a speciﬁed

MIX bus

• DCA ............................Associated DCA group

• MUTE..........................Associated mute group

• LCR..............................LCR screen settings

• NAME .........................NAME of the input channel

If you turn on the SEND button, use the buttons (1–

48) of the MIX ﬁeld to select the applicable MIX bus.

Hint

If you click the SET ALL button, all items will be

selected. If you click the CLEAR ALL button, the

selection will be cleared for all items. These buttons

will function in the same way regardless of the

PASTE MODE.

Global Paste function

• When PASTE MODE = OUTPUT

Use the SOURCE CH SELECT area to select the out-

put channel(s), and the PARAMETER SELECT area

to select the parameter(s).

You can select the following parameters.

• ALL..............................All parameters except

NAME

• EQ ............................... EQ function settings

• COMP.........................COMP function settings

• DELAY ........................DELAY function settings

• FADER ........................ Fader level

• ON............................... [ON] switch on/off status

• BAL .............................Balance settings

• INSERT.......................Insert on/off status and

insertion point

• TO MTRX................... Send level to a speciﬁed

MATRIX bus

• DCA ............................Associated DCA group

• MUTE .........................Associated mute group

• LCR .............................LCR screen settings

• NAME .........................NAME of the output chan-

nel

If you turn on the TO MTRX button, use the buttons

(1–24) of the MATRIX ﬁeld to select the applicable

MATRIX bus.

Hint

If you click the SET ALL button, all items will be

selected. If you click the CLEAR ALL button, the

selection will be cleared for all items. These buttons

will function in the same way regardless of the

PASTE MODE.

• When PASTE MODE = DCA, GEQ, EFFECT

Use the SOURCE No. SELECT area to select the

DCA group (DCA 1–12), GEQ (GEQ 1–24), and/or

internal effect (EFFECT 1–8) that will be copied.

Hint

If you click the SET ALL button, all items will be

selected. If you click the CLEAR ALL button, the

selection will be cleared for all items. These buttons

will function in the same way regardless of the

PASTE MODE.

4. In the DESTINATION SCENE area, select the scene

to which the data will be pasted.

To select an individual scene, click the number/title

ﬁeld in the scene list.

To select two or more consecutive scenes, use the

From No. / To No. knobs to specify the starting and

ending locations.

You can also select two or more scenes by holding

down the [SHIFT] key and clicking the number/title

ﬁelds of separate locations.

Hint

A maximum of 100 scenes can be selected simulta-

neously.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

5. Click the PASTE button.

The selected item(s) of the current scene will be

pasted to the scene(s) in memory.

• If PASTE MODE = UNIT, unit libraries that are

linked to the selected scene will automatically be

found and pasted.

• If PASTE MODE = INPUT/OUTPUT and the

pasted parameter is NAME, the name library

linked to the selected scene will be found and

pasted.

• Be aware that if a library is linked from a different

scene, the paste operation may cause the library

to be overwritten.

If the parameters differ between the copy-source

and paste-destination scenes, the data be handled as

follows according to the type of parameter.

■ When Paste Mode = UNIT

• If the type of unit differs between the copy-source

and paste-destination, no parameters of any cards

(all eight slots) installed in that unit will be copied.

• Even if the copy-source and paste-destination units

are the same type, if the type of installed card is

different, the parameters for that card will not be

pasted.

■ When Paste Mode = INPUT

• If the copy-source and paste-destination have dif-

fering MIX bus settings (paired or FIX/VARI), mix

send-related parameters will not be pasted.

• If the states (pan or balance) of the copy-source

and paste-destination differ, the pan/balance set-

ting and the send level to the MIX bus will not be

pasted.

• If the states (pairing or LR-Mono) of the copy-

source and paste-destination differ, the parameters

will be pasted only if both L and R channels are

selected and ALL is selected.

• Some pairing-related parameters will be pasted

only if both L and R channels are selected.

• If PAN LINK is on for the paste-destination, PAN

LINK will be turned off if other than ALL is

selected and either SEND or PAN/BAL is selected.

• DCA group parameters will be pasted only to

groups to which no output channel is assigned.

■ When Paste Mode = OUTPUT

• If MATRIX pairing differs between the copy-

source and paste-destination, mix send-related

parameters will not be pasted.

• If MIX or MATRIX pairing differs between the

copy-source and paste-destination, parameters will

be pasted only if both L and R channels are selected

and ALL is selected.

• If MIX pairing was changed as a result of paste, the

send levels to that MIX will be changed as follows.

• If MATRIX pairing was changed as a result of

paste, the send levels to that MATRIX will be

changed as follows.

(However, the MIX selected for pasting is

excepted.)

• Some pairing-related parameters will be pasted

only if both L and R channels are selected.

• DCA group parameters will be pasted only to

groups to which input channels are not assigned.

(For MATRIX and STEREO A/B, only MUTE.)

■ When Paste Mode = DCA, GEQ, EFFECT

• If GEQ LINK is turned off in the copy-source (the

current scene), and GEQ LINK is turned on in the

paste-destination, GEQ LINK will be turned off in

the paste-destination, and the GEQ parameters

will be pasted.

Change in

MIX pair

MIX

TYPE

PAN

LINK

PAIR

PAN

MODE

Send Level

setting

Pair →

Mono

Fix — — —

Odd and Even

set to nominal

Vari — — —

Even (Level)

copied to Odd

(Pan)

Mono →

Pair

Fix — — —

Odd and Even

set to nominal

Vari

On — —

ChPan copied

to Odd (Pan),

Even set to the

larger of the two

MIX settings

Off

Mono —

Odd (Pan) set

to center, Even

set to the larger

of the two MIX

settings

Pair

Pan

Odd (Pan) set

to left and right,

Even set to the

larger of the two

MIX settings

Balance

Odd (Pan) set

to center, Even

set to the larger

of the two MIX

settings

Change in

MATRIX pair

MIX pair Send Level setting

Pair → Mono —

Even (Level) copied to Odd

(Pan)

Mono → Pair

Mono

Odd (Pan) set to Center,

Even set to the larger of the

two MTRX settings

Pair

Odd (Pan) set to left and

right, Even set to the larger of

the two MTRX settings

Parameter control via CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN

In PM1D system software V1.5, parameters can be transmitted to an external device as MIDI continuously-

variable data when you perform an operation (other than Scene Recall) on the console (CS1D). Similarly,

continuously-variable data received from an external device can remotely control internal parameters. For

example, you can use an external MIDI sequencer or PC-based sequencer software to record parameter

changes in realtime, and reproduce these movements whenever desired.

The PM1D (version 1.5) can receive and transmit two types of MIDI message for this purpose: Control

Change messages and NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) messages.

MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen

Settings for MIDI CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN messages are made in the MIDI/GPI/TC function MIDI CTRL

CHANGE screen.

Control change

CONTROL CHANGE

You can assign parameters to control change numbers.

However, there are limitations on the type of parameters

that can be assigned.

NRPN

The parameter assignments are pre-determined.

These assignments cannot be changed.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

1 MIDI PORT Tx/Rx (MIDI transmit/receive port)

Selects the MIDI port that will transmit MIDI mes-

sages (Tx) and the MIDI port that will receive MIDI

messages (Rx). You can select the console or engine

port.

• When using the PM1D system in Dual Console

mode, you can select console 1 or 2.

• When using the PM1D system in Mirror mode,

and the engine is selected, the MIDI port of the

currently-enabled engine will be selected auto-

matically. (This is an improvement from the pre-

vious version.)

2 PROGRAM CHANGE Tx/Rx (PROGRAM

CHANGE transmission/reception)

Switches PROGRAM CHANGE transmission (Tx)

or reception (Rx) on/off.

3 PROGRAM CHANGE MIDI MODE (PROGRAM

CHANGE MIDI mode)

As the PROGRAM CHANGE transmission/recep-

tion mode, you can select either Multi mode (use

MIDI channels 1–16 for transmission and reception)

or Single mode (use only a single MIDI channel for

transmission and reception).

For details, refer to the CS1D Reference Manual

(Software), page 30, item 3.

4 OMNI

If Single mode is selected, turning this button on will

allow program change messages of all MIDI channels

to be received. In Multi mode, this button has no

effect.

5 BANK ON/OFF (Bank select on/off)

If Single mode is selected, turning this button on will

allow bank select messages to be received, increasing

the number of parameters that respond to program

change messages. In Multi mode, this button has no

effect.

6 PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO (PROGRAM

CHANGE echo output)

If this button is on, program change messages

received from the MIDI IN connector will be echoed

from the MIDI OUT connector.

Hint

2–6 are identical to the functions of the same

name in the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen of previ-

ous versions.

7 CONTROL CHANGE Tx/Rx (CONTROL CHANGE

transmission/reception)

Switches CONTROL CHANGE transmission (Tx) or

reception (Rx) on/off.

8 CONTROL CHANGE MIDI MODE (CONTROL

CHANGE MIDI mode)

Selects one of the following as the CONTROL

CHANGE transmission/reception mode.

• MULTI (Multi mode)

CONTROL CHANGE on MIDI channels 1–16 will

be used simultaneously to control the event (param-

eter) assigned in the parameter list at the right side of

the screen and the parameters of the ﬁfteen NRPN

numbers that follow it. When the console is used to

edit the corresponding parameter or any parameter

of the ﬁfteen NRPN numbers that follow it, a CON-

TROL CHANGE message will be transmitted on

MIDI channel 1–16.

• SINGLE (Single mode)

When a CONTROL CHANGE is received on the

MIDI channel selected by the Rx knob (A), the

parameter assigned in the parameter list at the right

of the screen will be edited.

When the console is used to edit the corresponding

parameter, a control change message will be trans-

mitted on the MIDI channel selected by the Tx knob

(0).

9 NRPN Tx/Rx (NRPN transmission/reception)

Switches NRPN transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx)

on/off. This can be used simultaneously with CON-

TROL CHANGE transmission and reception. In this

case, operation will be as follows.

• CONTROL CHANGE / NRPN reception is on

Parameters to which CONTROL CHANGE or

NRPN reception (or both) is assigned will respond.

• CONTROL CHANGE / NRPN transmission is on

When you operate a parameter to which either

CONTROL CHANGE or NRPN (not both) is

assigned, the corresponding message will be trans-

mitted.

When you operate a parameter to which both CON-

TROL CHANGE and NRPN are assigned, only the

CONTROL CHANGE message will be transmitted.

Parameter control via CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN

0 Tx knob

If Single mode is selected as the MIDI mode for

PROGRAM CHANGE / CONTROL CHANGE, this

knob selects the MIDI channel on which messages

will be transmitted. In Multi mode, this parameter

has no effect.

A Rx knob

If Single mode is selected as the MIDI mode for

PROGRAM CHANGE / CONTROL CHANGE, this

knob selects the MIDI channel on which messages

will be received. In Multi mode, this parameter has

no effect.

B CONTROL CHANGE event list

From the left, the columns indicate the MIDI chan-

nel, control number, and the assigned event (param-

eter). You can click the button to open the MIDI

CTRL CHANGE popup window and select a param-

eter.

Hint

In the CONTROL CHANGE event list, the MIDI

channel column will indicate “ALL” if Multi mode is

selected, or “--” if Single mode is selected.

C INITIALIZE

Initializes the control number parameter assign-

ments to their default state.

In version 1.5, the content of items 1–A of the

MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE screen has been

changed in the same way.

0 A

C B

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Using CONTROL CHANGE / NRPN messages to record/play parameter changes

Here’s how parameter operations on the console (CS1D) can be recorded on a MIDI sequencer or other external device,

and their changes played back.

1. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of your MIDI

sequencer (PC-based sequencer software) to the

MIDI IN connector of the console or engine, and

connect the MIDI IN connector of your MIDI

sequencer to the MIDI OUT connector of the con-

sole or engine.

The following diagram shows an example of con-

necting the console with PC-based sequencer soft-

ware.

Hint

When recording operations of the console, make sure

that the “MIDI echo” or “MIDI thru” setting (a func-

tion by which messages received at the MIDI IN con-

nector are re-transmitted from the MIDI OUT

connector) of your MIDI sequencer is turned off.

2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function MIDI CTRL

CHANGE screen, and set the MIDI PORT ﬁeld to

specify the MIDI port that will receive MIDI mes-

sages.

Hint

The MIDI port selection can be made either from the

MIDI PGM CHANGE screen or the MIDI CTRL

CHANGE screen.

3. According to the type of message that you want to

transmit and receive, turn on either the CONTROL

CHANGE Tx/Rx buttons or the NRPN Tx/Rx but-

tons.

We recommend that you normally turn on the Tx/Rx

buttons for either CONTROL CHANGE or NRPN,

not both.

If you turned on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx/Rx

buttons, proceed to step 4.

If you turned on the NRPN Tx/Rx buttons, proceed

to step 9.

4. Use the CONTROL CHANGE MIDI MODE but-

tons to select either Multi mode or Single mode.

Depending on the mode you select, operation will

differ as follows.

• Single mode

For both transmission and reception, messages will

be transferred using only a single MIDI channel. In

this mode if you assign the level (fader) of input

channel 1 to CONTROL CHANGE #1, operating the

fader of input channel 1 will transmit CONTROL

CHANGE #1 on the Tx channel. If CONTROL

CHANGE #1 on the Rx channel is received, the level

of input channel 1 will change.

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

CS1D

Tx CH

CC#1

Rx CH

CC#1

Input channel 1

Parameter control via CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN

• Multi mode

Up to sixteen MIDI channels will be used simulta-

neously. (The CH column of the parameter list will

indicate “ALL.”) In this mode if you assign the level

(fader) of input channel 1 to CONTROL CHANGE

#1, the respective MIDI channels will be assigned

automatically to input channels 2–16. In this state,

operating the faders of input channels 1–16 will

transmit CONTROL CHANGE #1 on MIDI chan-

nels 1–16. If a CONTROL CHANGE #1 message is

received on a MIDI channel 1–16, the level of the

corresponding input channel 1–16 will change.

Hint

The parameters that are automatically assigned to

MIDI channels 1–16 will be “the NRPN# of the

assigned parameter” +1 to 15.

For details on the NRPN numbers, refer to page 94.

5. If Single mode is selected, use the Tx knob and Rx

knob to specify the MIDI transmit channel and

receive channel.

6. If you want to change the parameter that is

assigned to each control number, click the but-

ton in the parameter list.

The MIDI CTRL CHANGE popup window will

appear, allowing you to assign a parameter to the

CONTROL CHANGE.

7. Select the parameter group in the MODE ﬁeld,

select the type of parameter and channel number

(or DCA group, effect, GEQ number) in the

PARAMETER ﬁeld, and click the OK button.

If you selected Multi mode as the MIDI mode for

CONTROL CHANGE, up to sixteen MIDI channels

will automatically be assigned for the selected

parameter; the selected number = MIDI channel 1,

selected number +1 = MIDI channel 2, selected

number +2 = MIDI channel 3, and so on.

Hint

For details on the parameters that can be selected for

each group, refer to page 94.

8. In the same way, assign parameters for other con-

trol numbers.

Control numbers 0–119 may be used. However,

parameters cannot be assigned to the following con-

trol numbers which used for special purposes.

9. Put your MIDI sequencer in record mode, and

operate the parameters you assigned.

The corresponding CONTROL CHANGE / NRPN

messages will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT

connector, and recorded on your sequencer.

10. When you have ﬁnished recording, play back your

sequencer.

The parameter changes will be reproduced.

MIDI CH=1

CC#1

MIDI CH=2

CC#1

MIDI CH=4

CC#1

MIDI CH=3

CC#1

MIDI CH=15

CC#1

MIDI CH=16

CC#1

1234 1516

Input channels

CONTROL

CHANGE#

Function

0 Bank select (MSB)

6 Data entry (MSB)

3Í2 Bank select (LSB)

38 Data entry (LSB)

96 Data increment

97 Data decrement

98 NRPN (LSB)

99 NRPN (MSB)

100 RPN (LSB)

101 RPN (MSB)

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Manual Fading function

When recalling a scene for which a fade time is speciﬁed, you can use the Manual Fading function, which

allows you to control fading forward or backward by turning the [DATA] encoder.

New functions in the FADE TIME screen

So that you can use the Manual Fading function, the fol-

lowing items have been added to the SCENE function

FADE TIME screen.

1 MANUAL FADING

Switches manual fading on/off. While auto fade is

being executed, you can move the cursor to this but-

ton and press the [ENTER] switch to switch immedi-

ately to manual fading. Alternatively, if you turn this

button on beforehand, you will be able to manually

control the fade from the beginning when you recall

a scene for which a fade time is speciﬁed.

2 PROGRESS

If the MANUAL FADING button (1) is on, you can

move the cursor to this knob and turn the [DATA]

encoder to manually fade between 0% (fader values

before recall) – 100% (fader values reached after

recall). At this time, the fading progress (as a per-

centage) is shown in the numerical box below the

knob.

Using Manual Fading (1)

Here’s how to switch to manual fading while auto fading is being executed.

1. Access the SCENE function FADE TIME screen.

2. Move the cursor to the MANUAL FADING button.

3. Using the SCENE MEMORY section of the panel,

recall a scene for which auto fading has been speci-

ﬁed.

4. When auto fading begins, press the [ENTER]

switch.

Operation will switch from auto fading to manual

fading, and the cursor will automatically move to the

PROGRESS knob.

2 1

Manual Fading function

5. Turn the [DATA] encoder toward the right.

Fading will progress as you turn the encoder. If nec-

essary, you can turn the encoder toward the left to

reverse the fade.

If one minute elapses during manual fading without

the [DATA] encoder being operated, the MANUAL

FADING button will automatically be turned off,

and auto fading will begin.

Also, auto fading will begin immediately if the MAN-

UAL FADING button is switched off.

Hint

By assigning a USER DEFINE switch (or GPI IN) to

the MANUAL FADE ON function, you can use that

USER DEFINE switch (or an external switch con-

nected to the GPI connector) to switch between

manual fading and auto fading. Even if a different

screen is currently displayed, the FADE TIME screen

will immediately be recalled, and the cursor will

move to the PROGRESS knob.

• It is not possible to modify the FADE TIME

parameter while manual fading is being per-

formed.

• Manual fading will be cancelled if the FADING

button is switched to “DISABLE,” if the buttons

in the FADING CH SELECT section are all

turned off, or if a fader or pan value is edited

either manually or from an external controller

such as MIDI.

[PM1D Manager]

In PM1D Manager, the FADE TIME parameter can

be edited even while manual fading is being per-

formed. However, the FADE TIME parameter will

not be reﬂected until the currently-executed fading

has ended.

PROGRESS=0% PROGRESS=50% PROGRESS=100%

Fader settings before scene recall Fader settings after scene recall

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Using Manual Fading (2)

Here’s how you can enable manual fading beforehand, and perform manual fading from the beginning when you recall a

scene.

1. Access the SCENE function FADE TIME screen.

2. Move the cursor to the MANUAL FADING button

and press the [ENTER] switch.

The MANUAL FADING button will turn on.

3. Using the SCENE MEMORY section of the panel,

recall a scene for which auto fading has been speci-

ﬁed.

When the scene is recalled, manual fading will be

enabled.

4. Move the cursor to the PROGRESS knob, and turn

the [DATA] encoder to control the fading.

If one minute elapses during manual fading without

the PROGRESS knob being operated, the MANUAL

FADING button will automatically be turned off,

and auto fading will begin.

Also, if the PROGRESS knob value stays at 100% for

ﬁve seconds, the MANUAL FADING button will be

turned off, and fading will end.

If you turn the MANUAL FADING button off, auto

fading will begin immediately.

Hint

If you assign a USER DEFINE switch (or GPI IN) to

the MANUAL FADE ON function, you will be able

to switch instantly to the FADE TIME screen from

any other screen.

Unit name

Now you can assign a unit name to each input/output unit and to each port of a card.

UNIT NAME screen

The UNIT NAME screen has been added to the SYS/W.CLOCK function, allowing you to assign a name to each unit and

each port of a card.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

1 UNIT SELECT

Use these buttons to select the unit (IN 1–10, OUT

1–6) that you want to name.

2 AUTO NUMBERING

When you click this button, each INPUT UNIT /

OUTPUT UNIT will be automatically assigned con-

secutive numbers.

3 UNIT LIBRARY

This button opens the UNIT LIBRARY window,

allowing you to save/load unit settings as library

data.

Unit name data is saved in the unit library, not in

the name library.

4 UNIT TYPE

Indicates the type of unit that is selected in UNIT

SELECT (1).

Hint

By clicking this you can jump to the corresponding

page of the INPUT UNIT screen or OUTPUT UNIT

screen.

5 UNIT NAME

Indicates the name of the unit that is selected in

UNIT SELECT (1). You can also click this ﬁeld and

use the text box (8) and character palette (9) to

assign a name to the unit.

6 Name list

This column displays the name of each port of the

cards installed in the currently selected unit.

7 Te mplate name list

Frequently-used names and abbreviations can be

registered in this list as template names. This list is

common to the template name list in the IN PATCH/

OUT PATCH function NAME screen. Changes made

to one will be reﬂected in the other.

8 Text box

This text box lets you edit or newly create a name in

the name list (6) or template name list (7).

9 Character palette

This palette lets you input characters, numerals, and

symbols into the text box. For details on operation,

refer to the “CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Opera-

tion)” section “Assigning a name” (→p.20).

Unit name

Naming a unit/port

1. Access the SYS/W.CLOCK function UNIT NAME

screen.

2. Click a UNIT SELECT button to select a unit.

3. To assign a name to the unit itself, click the UNIT

NAME ﬁeld.

The ﬁeld will change color to light blue, indicating

that it can now be edited.

4. Use the character palette or an external keyboard to

input a name of up to eight characters into the text

box, and click the ENTER button in the screen.

The unit name will be ﬁnalized.

Hint

Alternatively, you can use a template name instead of

inputting the name. For details on using template

names, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)”

page 129.

5. To assign a name to each port of a card installed in

the unit, click the name ﬁeld in the name list.

The ﬁeld will change color to light blue, indicating

that it can now be edited.

6. Use the character palette or an external keyboard to

input a name of up to four characters into the text

box, and click the ENTER button in the screen.

7. Assign names to other ports in the same way.

8. If you want ports to be numbered consecutively,

click the AUTO NUMBERING button.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the auto

numbering operation.

9. Click the OK button.

Consecutive numbers will automatically be assigned

to all usable ports of that unit.

If an LMY2-ML mic/line input card is installed in

the input unit, the same number will be assigned to

jacks A and B of the same port.

10. If you want to display the name of the port assigned

to that channel, rather than the short name of the

input channel shown in the screen, click the UNIT

NAME button located at the bottom of the screen.

Port name

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Matrix send shortcuts

In the previous version, the send level of a signal sent from a MIX channel / STEREO A/B channel to a

MATRIX bus could be controlled only from the screen. However, version 1.5 provides a shortcut that lets you

use panel encoders to control this.

There is a shortcut for controlling the send level from a single MIX channel to each of the MATRIX buses, and

another shortcut for controlling the send level from each of the MIX channels to a single MATRIX bus.

■ Single MIX channel → each MATRIX

bus

In the MIX OUTPUT block of the panel, press and hold

the [SEL] switch of the MIX channel that is sending the

signal.

After you have held down the [SEL] switch for a time,

the MATRIX OUTPUT block MATRIX [NAME] indica-

tor will alternately display “SEND” and the short name

of MATRIX channel.

In the case of a paired MATRIX channel, the [NAME]

indicator of the odd-numbered channel will alternately

display “PAN” and the short name of that MATRIX

channel.

While you continue to hold down the switch, use the

MATRIX OUTPUT block MATRIX [LEVEL/BAL]

encoders to adjust the send level or pan from the selected

MIX channel to each of the MATRIX buses. (The send

level value is shown by the LEDs surrounding the

MATRIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder.)

Hint

In the same way, you can hold down the STEREO

OUTPUT block STEREO A/B [SEL] switch and use

the MATRIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoders to adjust the

send level of the signal from the STEREO A/B chan-

nel to each MATRIX bus.

If you are using the controls of the MIX OUTPUT

block to edit effect parameters, the above shortcut

cannot be used. However, you can still use the

shortcut of holding down the STEREO A/B [SEL]

switch.

MIX OUTPUT block

PAIR

ON O

PAIR

ON ON

SEND SEND

Alternately displays “SEND”

and the short name of MATRIX

channel 1.

Alternately displays “SEND”

and the short name of MATRIX

channel 2.

Indicates the send level of the

signal that is sent from MIX chan-

nel 1 to MATRIX bus 1.

Indicates the send level of the

signal that is sent from MIX

channel 1 to MATRIX bus 1.

Use this knob to adjust the send

level of the signal that is sent from

MIX channel 1 to MATRIX bus 2.

Indicates the send level of the

signal that is sent from MIX

channel 1 to MATRIX bus 2.

MATRIX OUTPUT block

Matrix send shortcuts

■ Each MIX channel → single MATRIX

bus

In the MATRIX OUTPUT block of the panel, press and

hold the [SEL] switch of the MATRIX channel that is

sending the signal.

After you have held down the [SEL] switch for a time,

the MIX OUTPUT block MIX [NAME] indicator will

alternately display “SEND” and the short name of the

MIX channel.

While you continue to hold down the switch, use the

MIX OUTPUT block MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoders to

adjust the send level or pan from each MIX channel to

the selected MATRIX bus. (The send level value is shown

by the LEDs surrounding the MIX [LEVEL/BAL]

encoder.)

In the case of a paired MATRIX channel, pressing the

[SEL] switch of the odd-numbered channel will cause

the [NAME] indicator of the MIX channel to alternately

display “PAN” and the short name, allowing you to set

the pan.

Pressing the [SEL] switch of the even-numbered channel

will cause the [NAME] indicator of the MIX channel to

display “SEND,” allowing you to set the send level.

This shortcut cannot be used in the STEREO OUT-

PUT block.

MATRIX OUTPUT

block

PAIR

ON ON

SEND SEND

PAIR

ON ON

Alternately displays “SEND”

and the short name of MIX

channel 1.

Alternately displays “SEND”

and the short name of MIX

channel 2.

Use this knob to adjust the send

level of the signal that is sent from

MIX channel 1 to MATRIX bus 1.

Indicates the send level of the

signal that is sent from MIX

channel 1 to MATRIX bus 1.

Use this knob to adjust the send

level of the signal that is sent from

MIX channel 2 to MATRIX bus 1.

Indicates the send level of the

signal that is sent from MIX

channel 2 to MATRIX bus 1.

MIX OUTPUT block

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

If the selected MATRIX channel is paired, this shortcut

will operate differently depending on whether you press

and hold the [SEL] switch of the odd-numbered (left)

channel or of the even-numbered (right) channel.

• If you press and hold the odd-numbered (left)

[SEL] switch, you can use the MIX OUTPUT block

MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder to adjust the pan of the

signal that is sent from that channel to the selected

pair of MIX buses.

During this time, the MIX [NAME] indicator of the

MIX OUTPUT block will alternately display “PAN”

and the short name of the MIX channel, and the

LEDs surrounding the MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder

will indicate the pan value.

• If you press and hold the even-numbered (right)

[SEL] switch, you can use the MIX OUTPUT block

MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder to adjust the send level

of the signal that is sent from that channel to the

selected pair of MIX buses.

Hint

For either shortcut, it will take a certain amount of

time from when you ﬁrst press the [SEL] switch until

the [NAME] indicator starts blinking. If you do not

want to wait this long, you can hold down the [SEL]

switch and immediately operate the [LEVEL/BAL]

encoder of the send destination (or send source), and

the shortcut will be enabled from that instant.

If ROUTING is turned on in the AUTO DISPLAY

ON/OFF area of the UTILITY function PREFER-

ENCE screen, using this shortcut operation will

immediately cause the display to shift to the

MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen, and the cursor will

move to the corresponding knob.

PAIR

ON ON

PAN

PAIR

MATRIX OUTPUT block

MIX OUTPUT block

Alternately displays

“PAN” and the short

name of MIX channel 1.

Use this knob to

adjust the pan of the

signal that is sent

from MIX channel 1 to

MATRIX buses 1/2.

Indicates the pan of

the signal that is

sent from MIX chan-

nel 1 to MATRIX

buses 1/2.

PAIR

ON ON

SEND

PAIR

MATRIX OUTPUT block

MIX OUTPUT block

Alternately displays

“SEND” and the short

name of MIX channel 1.

Use this knob to

adjust the level of the

signal that is sent from

MIX channel 1 to

MATRIX channels 1/2.

Indicates the send

level of the signal that

is sent from MIX

channel 1 to MATRIX

channels 1/2.

DCA mute indicator

In previous versions, you could tell whether a DCA group was muted or unmuted by looking at the DCA

block DCA [MUTE] switch LED (lit = muted, dark = unmuted). However, this does not tell you whether the

channels belonging to that DCA group are muted in the INPUT block.

PM1D system software V1.5 provides a way for you to check whether individual channels are also muted

when a DCA group is muted.

To do so, access the UTILITY function PREFERENCE

screen, and turn DCA MUTE FLASH INDICATE on.

In this state, muting a DCA group will cause the DCA

block DCA [MUTE] switch LED to blink, and will also

cause the corresponding [ASSIGN DCA] LED of the

channels belonging to that group to blink.

For example if you mute DCA group 12, [ASSIGN DCA]

LED 2 will blink for input channels or output channels

belonging to that group.

Hint

The [ASSIGN DCA] LED will also blink when you

assign a channel to that DCA. However, it will blink

more rapidly when muted.

10 11 12

FADER

STATUS

1–12

13–24

25–36

37–48

DCA

DCA block

blinking

CUE

DCA

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

CUE

DCA

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

CUE

DCA

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

CUE

DCA

SAFE

RCL

MUTE

INPUT block

blinking

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Oscillator improvements

You can now use two different sine waves simultaneously in the OSCILLATOR screen. You can specify the fre-

quency and level of each, and output them separately to odd-numbered / even-numbered channels.

Improvements in the OSCILLATOR screen

In conjunction with the above improvements, the MON/CUE function OSCILLATOR screen has enhanced as follows.

1 OSC ON/OFF (Oscillator on/off)

Switches the signal selected by OSC MODE (2)

(sine wave or noise) on/off.

2 OSC MODE (Oscillator mode)

Selects one of the following to specify the type of

output signal and the number of channels. The dis-

play in the PARAMETERS section will differ depend-

ing on your choice here.

• SINE WAVE 1CH........One sine wave will be used.

• SINE WAVE 2CH........Two sine waves will be used.

• PINK NOISE ..............Pink noise will be used.

• BURST NOISE ...........Burst noise will be used.

1 2

Oscillator improvements

Hint

• If you select SINE WAVE 2CH, the L channel sine

wave will be sent to the odd-numbered channel(s)

(or the STEREO L channel) selected by the

ASSIGN (4) parameter described below, and the

R channel sine wave will be sent to the even-num-

bered channel(s) (or the STEREO R channel).

• If you select any other, the same signal will be out-

put to all channels selected by the ASSIGN (4)

parameter.

3 PARAMETERS

Here you can set the parameters of the sine wave or

noise. The display in this section will differ depend-

ing on the choice of OSC MODE (2).

■ If you select SINE WAVE 1CH

A ﬁxed-level sine wave will be sent to the speciﬁed

bus(es).

• Level meter.................Indicates the output level of

the sine wave.

• LEVEL knob

...............Adjusts the output level of

the sine wave in a range of

–96 dB to 0 dB. The current

value is shown in the numer-

ical box below the knob.

• FREQ knob

.................Adjusts the frequency of the

sine wave in a range of

20 Hz–20 kHz. The current

value is shown in the numer-

ical box below the knob.

•

10 kHz / 1 kHz/ 100 Hz

.These buttons set the fre-

quency of the sine wave to

preset values.

■ If you select SINE WAVE 2CH

The level and frequency of the sine waves can be set

independently for the L channel and R channel. The

content of the parameters are the same as for SINE

WAVE 1CH.

The two sine waves are generated completely inde-

pendently. Even if you set both sine waves to the

same frequency, they will not be in phase. If you

want the phase to match, use SINE WAVE 1CH.

■ If you select PINK NOISE

Fixed-level pink noise will be sent to the speciﬁed

bus(es).

• Level meter .................Indicates the output level of

the noise.

• LEVEL knob ...............Adjusts the output level of

the noise in a range of

–96 dB to 0 dB. The current

value is shown in the

numerical box below the

knob.

•

HPF knob / LPF knob

..These knobs continuously

adjust the frequency of the

high pass ﬁlter and low pass

ﬁlter that process the noise,

in a range of 20 Hz–20 kHz.

The current frequency is

shown in the numerical box

below each knob. You can

also use the ON/OFF but-

tons located below each

numerical box to switch the

high pass ﬁlter and low pass

ﬁlter on/off.

LEVEL knob FREQ knob

Level meter

10kHz / 1kHz /

100Hz

LEVEL knob

FREQ knob

Level meter

10kHz / 1kHz /

100Hz

LEVEL knob HPF knob

LPF knobLevel meter

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

■ If you select BURST NOISE

Intermittent pink noise will be sent to the speciﬁed

bus(es).

• WIDTH knob............. Adjusts the duration from

when the pink noise is out-

put until it stops, in a range

of 0.1–10 seconds. The cur-

rent value is shown in the

numerical box below the

knob.

• INTERVAL.................. Adjusts the duration of the

silence, in a range of 1–30

seconds. The current value

is shown in the numerical

box below the knob.

The remaining parameters are the same as for PINK

NOISE.

4 ASSIGN

Selects the bus(es) to which the sine wave or noise

will be output. (You may select more than one bus.)

5 OSC OUT (Oscillator output)

Directly outputs the sine wave / pink noise to a phys-

ical port. Click the button to select the output

destination port, and use the ON/OFF button to

switch the output on/off.

If you select SINE WAVE 2CH for OSC MODE, the

direct output will be sent from the L channel to

OSC OUT.

LEVEL knob

HPF knob

LPF knob

Level meter

INTERVAL knob

WIDTH knob

Improvements in the INPUT PATCH / OUTPUT PATCH screens

You can now display and edit the unit name for each port in the INPUT PATCH / OUTPUT PATCH screens.

Also, vertical and horizontal red lines now indicate the currently selected grid.

USB PC (computer) connection

A PC running PM1D Manager can now be connected via USB. To use the USB connection, open PM1D Man-

ager’s Option popup window, and in the Communication Port select “YAMAHA USB OUTxxx (where xxx is

the device number / port number).”

• Updating of the system software is performed

using the serial port as before. Please note that

updating cannot be performed via USB.

• If PM1D Manager is running on a USB-con-

nected PC, and you want to connect/disconnect

the USB cable or restart the connected console/

engine, you must exit PM1D Manager and then

restart your PC.

In some cases, you may be unable to reconnect to

the console/engine until the PC has restarted.

• Use a USB cable that is 3 meters or shorter. Do

not use a USB hub or any other USB device

together with this system. Communication may

be unstable if you do so.

• USB connection is not guaranteed to be faster

than a serial connection. Depending on your sys-

tem, a serial connection may provide faster trans-

mission speed and also be more stable. If you

were able to establish a serial connection on the

previous version, we recommend that you con-

tinue to use the serial connection.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Automatic scrolling in the CH to MIX screen and MATRIX/ST ROUTING

screen

In the PAN/ROUTING function CH to MIX screen and in the MATRIX/ST function MATRIX/ST ROUTING

screen, the screen will now scroll in response to cursor movement.

For example as shown in the following illustrations, when the cursor in the CH to MIX screen is located at the

lowest send point (PRE/POST button) for each MIX, pressing the CURSOR [

†] switch will cause the screen

to scroll downward.

Also, you can hold down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and press the CURSOR [

†] switch to move immediately

to the PRE POINT section (the PRE EQ/PRE FADER line) without scrolling.

In this way, scrollable areas in the CH to MIX screen and MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen will scroll when you

press the CURSOR [

π]/[†]/[√]/[®] switches in a direction that would move outside the border. Similarly,

you can hold down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and press the CURSOR [

π]/[†]/[√]/[®] switches to directly

move the cursor outside the border without scrolling.

CURSOR [†] switch

➪

[SHIFT/GRAB] switch

CURSOR [†] switch

ON/OFF button for COMM IN

In the MONITOR A screen, a button has been added to turn the COMM IN function on/off. When this but-

ton is off, the COMM IN function will be off, and the COMM IN signal will not be input. This operation is

different than setting LEVEL to –∞.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Added functions in the PREFERENCE screen

The following functions have been added to the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen.

■ DCA MUTE FLASH INDICATE ON/OFF

button

If this button is on and a DCA group is muted, the mute

switch of that DCA and the DCA ASSIGN LED of chan-

nels belonging to that group will blink.

■ USE STORE SW ON PANEL FOR AUTO

STORE ON/OFF button

If this button is on, you can use the Auto Store function

(→p.64) from the panel [STORE] switch.

■ STEAL PATCH ON/OFF button

If this button is on, and you attempt to patch in the

PATCH screen, a warning will be issued that this unit is

already patched.

■ SELECTED CH ON/OFF button

If the SELECTED CH ON/OFF button in this section is

turned on, pressing the [SEL] switch of an input channel

or output channel will cause the cursor to move to the

corresponding location in the screen that contains the

parameters of that channel (or, switch to the screen that

contains the corresponding channel). In previous ver-

sions, if a AUTO DISPLAY ON/OFF setting was turned

on, the cursor would move only if the [SEL] switch were

operated in a screen that contained that function.

However since SELECTED CH ON/OFF can now be

speciﬁed independently, you can enable cursor move-

ment in response to the [SEL] switch in any screen, even

if all other AUTO DISPLAY ON/OFF items are turned

off.

Supplementary explanation for existing functions

■ MIRROR setting when set to CONSOLE

CLOCK MASTER

When using the system in Mirror mode, you can use the

console as the word clock master rather than a clock

generator, and distribute the word clock from the con-

sole’s WORD CLOCK OUT connector to the WORD

CLOCK IN connectors of each unit. This will prevent

each unit from being muted when you switch between

engine A and B.

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

Please refer to page 35 in the appendix of the CS1D Reference Manual (Appendices).

MIDI control change NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) assignment table

INPUT (NRPN LSB 0-111 : CH NUMBER1-

96,STIN1L-8R)

MIX (NRPN LSB 0-47,48-95 : MIX1-48)

Parameter name

NRPN

MSB LSB

ON/OFF 0 0-111

FADER 1 0-111

PAN/BALANCE 2 0-111

RECALL SAFE ON/OFF 3 0-111

GATE ON/OFF 4 0-111

GATE RANGE 5 0-111

GATE LPF ON/OFF 6 0-111

GATE LPF FREQ 7 0-111

GATE HPF ON/OFF 8 0-111

GATE HPF FREQ 9 0-111

GATE THRESHOLD 10 0-111

GATE ATTACK 11 0-111

GATE DECAY 12 0-111

GATE HOLD 13 0-111

COMP ON/OFF 14 0-111

COMP RATIO 15 0-111

COMP XOVER ON/OFF 16 0-111

COMP XOVER FREQ 17 0-111

COMP KNEE/WIDTH 18 0-111

COMP OUT GAIN 19 0-111

COMP THRESHOLD 20 0-111

COMP ATTACK 21 0-111

COMP RELEASE 22 0-111

EQ LOW TYPE 23 0-111

EQ HIGH TYPE, LPF SLOPE 24 0-111

EQ ON/OFF 25 0-111

HPF ON/OFF 26 0-111

EQ ATT 27 0-111

EQ LOW F 28 0-111

EQ LOW G 29 0-111

EQ LOW Q 30 0-111

EQ L-MID F 31 0-111

EQ L-MID G 32 0-111

EQ L-MID Q 33 0-111

EQ H-MID F 34 0-111

EQ H-MID G 35 0-111

EQ H-MID Q 36 0-111

EQ HIGH F 37 0-111

EQ HIGH G 38 0-111

EQ HIGH Q 39 0-111

HPF FREQ 40 0-111

Parameter name

NRPN

MSB LSB

ON/OFF 68 0-47

FADER 68 48-95

BALANCE 69 0-47

RECALL SAFE ON/OFF 69 48-95

COMP ON/OFF 70 0-47

COMP RATIO 70 48-95

COMP XOVER ON/OFF 71 0-47

COMP XOVER FREQ 71 48-95

COMP KNEE/WIDTH 72 0-47

COMP OUT GAIN 72 48-95

COMP THRESHOLD 73 0-47

COMP ATTACK 73 48-95

COMP RELEASE 74 0-47

EQ ON/OFF 74 48-95

EQ SUB-LOW TYPE,SLOPE 75 0-47

EQ HIGH TYPE,SLOPE 75 48-95

EQ SUB-LOW Q 76 0-47

EQ SUB-LOW F 76 48-95

EQ SUB-LOW G 77 0-47

EQ SUB-LOW BYPASS 77 48-95

EQ LOW Q 78 0-47

EQ LOW F 78 48-95

EQ LOW G 79 0-47

EQ LOW BYPASS 79 48-95

EQ L-MID Q 80 0-47

EQ L-MID F 80 48-95

EQ L-MID G 81 0-47

EQ L-MID BYPASS 81 48-95

EQ MID Q 82 0-47

EQ MID F 82 48-95

EQ MID G 83 0-47

EQ MID BYPASS 83 48-95

EQ H-MID Q 84 0-47

EQ HI-MID F 84 48-95

EQ H-MID G 85 0-47

EQ H-MID BYPASS 85 48-95

EQ HIGH Q 86 0-47

EQ HIGH F 86 48-95

EQ HIGH G 87 0-47

EQ HIGH BYPASS 87 48-95

MIDI control change NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) assignment table

MATRIX (NRPN LSB 0-23,24-47,48-71,72-

95 : MATRIX1-24)

ST MASTER (NRPN LSB EVEN,ODD : STE-

REO MASTER A,B)

Parameter name

NRPN

MSB LSB

ON/OFF 90 0-23

FADER 90 24-47

BALANCE 90 48-71

RECALL SAFE ON/OFF 90 72-96

COMP ON/OFF 91 0-23

COMP RATIO 91 24-47

COMP XOVER ON/OFF 91 48-71

COMP XOVER FREQ 91 72-96

COMP KNEE/WIDTH 92 0-23

COMP OUT GAIN 92 24-47

COMP THRESHOLD 92 48-71

COMP ATTACK 92 72-96

COMP RELEASE 93 0-23

EQ ON/OFF 93 24-47

EQ SUB-LOW TYPE,SLOPE 93 48-71

EQ HIGH TYPE,SLOPE 93 72-96

EQ SUB-LOW Q 94 0-23

EQ SUB-LOW F 94 24-47

EQ SUB-LOW G 94 48-71

EQ SUB-LOW BYPASS 94 72-96

EQ LOW Q 95 0-23

EQ LOW F 95 24-47

EQ LOW G 95 48-71

EQ LOW BYPASS 95 72-96

EQ L-MID Q 96 0-23

EQ L-MID F 96 24-47

EQ L-MID G 96 48-71

EQ L-MID BYPASS 96 72-96

EQ MID Q 97 0-23

EQ MID F 97 24-47

EQ MID G 97 48-71

EQ MID BYPASS 97 72-96

EQ H-MID Q 98 0-23

EQ H-MID F 98 24-47

EQ H-MID G 98 48-71

EQ H-MID BYPASS 98 72-96

EQ HIGH Q 99 0-23

EQ HIGH F 99 24-47

EQ HIGH G 99 48-71

EQ HIGH BYPASS 99 72-96

Parameter name

NRPN

MSB LSB

ON/OFF 101 0,1

FADER 101 2,3

BALANCE 101 4,5

RECALL SAFE ON/OFF 101 6,7

COMP ON/OFF 101 8,9

COMP RATIO 101 10,11

COMP XOVER ON/OFF 101 12,13

COMP XOVER FREQ 101 14,15

COMP KNEE/WIDTH 101 16,17

COMP OUT GAIN 101 18,19

COMP THRESHOLD 101 20,21

COMP ATTACK 101 22,23

COMP RELEASE 101 24,25

EQ ON/OFF 101 26,27

EQ SUB-LOW TYPE, SLOPE 101 28,29

EQ HIGH TYPE, SLOPE 101 30,31

EQ SUB-LOW Q 101 32,33

EQ SUB-LOW F 101 34,35

EQ SUB-LOW G 101 36,37

EQ SUB-LOW BYPASS 101 38,39

EQ LOW Q 101 40,41

EQ LOW F 101 42,43

EQ LOW G 101 44,45

EQ LOW BYPASS 101 46,47

EQ L-MID Q 101 48,49

EQ L-MID F 101 50,51

EQ L-MID G 101 52,53

EQ L-MID BYPASS 101 54,55

EQ MID Q 101 56,57

EQ MID F 101 58,59

EQ MID G 101 60,61

EQ MID BYPASS 101 62,63

EQ H-MID Q 101 64,65

EQ HI-MID F 101 66,67

EQ H-MID G 101 68,69

EQ HI-MID BYPASS 101 70,71

EQ HIGH Q 101 72,73

EQ HIGH F 101 74,75

EQ HIGH G 101 76,77

EQ HIGH BYPASS 101 78,79

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

DCA (NRPN LSB 0-11,12-23 : DCA1-12)

EFFECT (NRPN LSB 0-7,8-15,16-23,24-31,32-

39,40-47,48-55,56-63,64-71,72-79,80-87,88-

95,96-103,104-111 : EFFECT1-8)

GEQ (NRPN LSB 0-23,24-47,48-71,72-95,96-

119 : GEQ1-24)

Parameter name

NRPN

MSB LSB

DCA FADER(0-11) 102 0-11

DCA MUTE(12-23) 102 12-23

Parameter name

NRPN

MSB LSB

BYPASS ON/OFF 103 0-7

ATT L 103 8-15

ATT R 103 16-23

WET BALANCE 103 24-31

PARAMETER1 103 32-39

PARAMETER2 103 40-47

PARAMETER3 103 48-55

PARAMETER4 103 56-63

PARAMETER5 103 64-71

PARAMETER6 103 72-79

PARAMETER7 103 80-87

PARAMETER8 103 88-95

PARAMETER9 103 96-103

PARAMETER10 103 104-111

PARAMETER11 104 0-7

PARAMETER12 104 8-15

PARAMETER13 104 16-23

PARAMETER14 104 24-31

PARAMETER15 104 32-39

PARAMETER16 104 40-47

PARAMETER17 104 48-55

PARAMETER18 104 56-63

PARAMETER19 104 64-71

PARAMETER20 104 72-79

PARAMETER21 104 80-87

Parameter name

NRPN

MSB LSB

GEQ ON/OFF 105 0-23

NOTCH1 ON/OFF 105 24-47

NOTCH2 ON/OFF 105 48-71

NOTCH3 ON/OFF 105 72-95

NOTCH4 ON/OFF 105 96-119

GEQ BAND1 G 106 0-23

GEQ BAND2 G 106 24-47

GEQ BAND3 G 106 48-71

GEQ BAND4 G 106 72-95

GEQ BAND5 G 106 96-119

GEQ BAND6 G 107 0-23

GEQ BAND7 G 107 24-47

GEQ BAND8 G 107 48-71

GEQ BAND9 G 107 72-95

GEQ BAND10 G 107 96-119

GEQ BAND11 G 108 0-23

GEQ BAND12 G 108 24-47

GEQ BAND13 G 108 48-71

GEQ BAND14 G 108 72-95

GEQ BAND15 G 108 96-119

GEQ BAND16 G 109 0-23

GEQ BAND17 G 109 24-47

GEQ BAND18 G 109 48-71

GEQ BAND19 G 109 72-95

GEQ BAND20 G 109 96-119

GEQ BAND21 G 110 0-23

GEQ BAND22 G 110 24-47

GEQ BAND23 G 110 48-71

GEQ BAND24 G 110 72-95

GEQ BAND25 G 110 96-119

GEQ BAND26 G 111 0-23

GEQ BAND27 G 111 24-47

GEQ BAND28 G 111 48-71

GEQ BAND29 G 111 72-95

GEQ BAND30 G 111 96-119

GEQ BAND31 G 112 0-23

NOTCH1 Q 112 24-47

NOTCH2 Q 112 48-71

NOTCH3 Q 112 72-95

NOTCH4 Q 112 96-119

NOTCH1 F 113 24-47

NOTCH2 F 113 48-71

NOTCH3 F 113 72-95

NOTCH4 F 113 96-119

MIDI control change parameter assignment table

Use this table to make a note of the parameters that you have assigned to control numbers in the MIDI CTRL

CHANGE screen. In the “PARAMETER FROM” columns, write the name and NRPN# (→p.94) of the

parameter that you want to operate via the corresponding control number. In the “PARAMETER TO (MULTI

MODE)” columns, write the NRPN# that is +15 greater than the above value, and its parameter name. You

can use the corresponding control change to operate the “PARAMETER FROM” parameter in Single mode,

or to operate the “PARAMETER FROM” through “PARAMETER TO” parameters in Multi mode. If you exe-

cute INITIALIZE, all control numbers will be set to “NO ASSIGN.”

CTRL

CHG.#

PARAMETER FROM PARAMETER TO(MULTI MODE)

NRPN# Parameter name CH NRPN# Parameter name CH

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

CTRL

CHG.#

PARAMETER FROM PARAMETER TO(MULTI MODE)

NRPN# Parameter name CH NRPN# Parameter name CH

MIDI control change parameter assignment table

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

CTRL

CHG.#

PARAMETER FROM PARAMETER TO(MULTI MODE)

NRPN# Parameter name CH NRPN# Parameter name CH

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

100

MIDI Data Format

1. TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA

1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE

1.1.1 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) BANK SELECT

In PROGRAM CHANGE SINGLE CH mode when [Bank] is ON, this

message can be received via the MIDI IN for BANK SELECT recep-

tion is enabled, if the [Rx CH] matches.

This will specify the bank for a subsequently-received program

change.

In SINGLE CH mode when [Bank] is ON, and you recall a scene

memory or effect library, a bank select message will be transmitted

(before the program change message) from the selected MIDI OUT,

on the speciﬁed [Tx CH].

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change

00000000 00 Bank Select MSB

0vvvvvvv vv MSB Value

00100000 20 Bank Select LSB

0vvvvvvv vv LSB Value

1.1.2 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) ASSIGN

If CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN is ON and CONTROL CHANGE

is set to SINGLE CH mode, this message can be received from the

MIDI IN for which reception is enabled, if the [Rx CH] matches. The

parameter that is assigned in the [Control Change Table] will be modi-

ﬁed.

In MULTI mode, any MIDI channel will be received. The received

MIDI channel (i.e., its number) will be added to the number of the

parameter assigned in the [Control Change Table] (the same number as

NRPN) to determine the parameter that will be modiﬁed by the mes-

sage.

This message is not echoed, but will be transmitted as described below

even when a parameter is modiﬁed as a result of the MIDI reception.

In SINGLE CH mode, when a parameter assigned in the [Control

Change Table] has been modiﬁed, this message will be transmitted

from the MIDI OUT for the selected [Tx CH].

In MULTI CH mode, when a parameter corresponding to a parameter

number (same as NRPN) assigned in the [Control Change Table] +15

or less is modiﬁed, this message will be transmitted from the selected

MIDI OUT, with the MIDI channel representing the difference from

the parameter number. If the parameter is assigned to more than one

control number, the message will be transmitted using the lowest-

numbered control number.

If a parameter with a resolution of greater than 7 bits is assigned to a

control number in the range of 1–31, that control number +32 can be

assigned as the LSB of the same parameter.

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change

0ccccccc cc Control No.(1-5,7-31,33-

37,39-95,102-119)

0vvvvvvv vv Value

The transmitted and received values are calculated as follows. (The

same applies to the NRPN messages discussed later.)

Given the following:

(128 or 16384 in the case of word data) / (number of parameter steps)

= X ...Y

INT (( Y + 1) / 2 ) = Z

Reception:

If ( MIDI data -Z ) < 0, then parameter = 0

If (( MIDI data - Z ) / Z ) > MAX, then parameter = MAX

Otherwise, INT ( MIDI data - Z ) / X ) = parameter

Transmission:

If parameter = 0, then MIDI data = 0

If parameter = MAX, then MIDI data = (127 or 16383 in the case of

word data)

Otherwise, ( X x parameter ) + INT ( X / 2 ) + Z = MIDI data

1.1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) NRPN

If NRPN is ON, and if the [Rx CH] matches, this message can be

received at the MIDI IN for which reception is enabled.

There is a one-to-one correspondence between the received NRPN

number and the parameter that will change. (See the “MIDI control

change NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) assignment

table”.)

This message is not echoed, but the transmission described below will

occur even if a parameter is modiﬁed due to MIDI reception.

If NRPN is ON and a parameter is modiﬁed, this message will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT selected by [Tx CH].

If both CONTROL ASSIGN and NRPN are simultaneously ON, an

assigned parameter will be transmitted as a control change.

If the parameter has a resolution of less than 7 bits, only the MSB data

will be transmitted.

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control Change

01100010 62 NRPN LSB

0vvvvvvv vv MSB Value

01100011 63 NRPN MSB

0vvvvvvv vv LSB Value

00000110 06 DATA ENTRY MSB

0vvvvvvv vv MSB Value

00110110 26 DATA ENTRY LSB

0vvvvvvv vv LSB Value

60 h (INC) and 61 h (DEC) are not supported.

1.1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)

If [Program Change Rx] is ON, this message can be received at the

MIDI IN for which reception is enabled, if the [Rx CH] matches in the

case of SINGLE mode. However if [OMNI] is ON, this message will

be received regardless of the channel.

In the case of MULTI mode, all MIDI channels will be received, and

will be divided into banks according to the channel.

If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be echoed.

A scene memory or effect library will be recalled according to the set-

tings of the [Program Change Table].

If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message will be transmitted from

the selected MIDI OUT on the [Tx CH] channel (in the case of SIN-

GLE mode), when a scene or effect library is recalled.

In the case of MULTI mode, this will be transmitted on the MIDI

channel according to the bank. If the recalled memory number is

assigned to more than one program number, the program number for

the lowest-numbered channel of the lowest-numbered bank will be

transmitted.

STATUS 1100nnnn Cn Program Change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn Program No.(0-127)

MIDI Data Format

101

1.2 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0-F7)

1.2.1 MOTION CONTROL STATE (MCS)

MMC STOP/PLAY/FORWARD/REWIND

These messages are transmitted by assignment to USER DEFINE or

GPI.

[DEVICE NO.] speciﬁes the transmission destination.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc)sub-id

0ccccccc cc Command String

[1]:Stop

[3]:Deferred Play

[4]:Fast Forward

[5]:Rewind

EOX 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

1.2.2 MOTION CONTROL PROCESS (MCP)

MMC LOCATE (target)

This message is transmitted by assignment to USER DEFINE or GPI.

[DEVICE NO.] speciﬁes the transmission destination. (This requires

setting the ID of the receiving device.)

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd Destination (00-7E, 7F:all

call)

Command 00000110 06 Machine Control Com-

mand(mcc)sub-id

01000100 44 Locate

00000110 06 byte count

00000001 01 "target" sub command

0tthhhhh th frame type, hour

0mmmmmmm mm minute

0sssssss ss second

0fffffff ff frame

0sssssss ss sub-frame(only'0')

EOX 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

1.3 ACTIVE SENSING (Fe)

Once this message has been received, and there is an interval of

300 ms during which nothing is received, Running Status will be

cleared, and MIDI communication will be initialized.

STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing

2. TRANSMISSION CONDITION

3. RECEIVE CONDITION

4. PARAMETER CHANGE

BASIC FORMAT

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacture's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0pppnnnn pn p=mode 1:parameter change

or response for request

3:parameter request

n=0-15(Device Channel

No.1-16)

GROUP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001001 09 Device code(PM1D)

PARAM TYPE 0ttttttt tt (TYPE)

DATA 0ddddddd dd0 DATA 0

: :

0ddddddd ddn DATA n

EOX 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

PARAMETER VALUE REQUEST (type 0x00:Current Memory)

These messages can be received via the port that is enabled for recep-

tion. The VALUE RESPONSE message described below is sent in

reply to this message.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacture's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0pppnnnn 3n parameter request

n=0-15(Device Channel

No.1-16)

GROUP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001001 09 Device code(PM1D)

PARAM TYPE 00000000 00 Current Memory

DATA 0ttttttt dd0 data type

0aaaaaaa dd1 addressHIGH(BIT13-7)

0aaaaaaa dd2 addressLOW(BIT6-0)

0ddddddd dd3 REQUEST BYTE COUNT

EOX 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

data type

0x00 SCENE LOW ADDRESS(BIT14 LOW)

0x10 SCENE HIGH ADDRESS(BIT14 HIGH)

0x0a ENGINE SETUP

PARAMETER VALUE RESPONSE (type 0x00:Current Memory)

This message is sent in reply when the above VALUE REQUEST is

received.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacture's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0pppnnnn 1n response for request

MIDI Tx CH?

CONTROL CHANGE

BANK SELECT $BnH

CONTROL CHANGE

$BnH

CONTROL CHANGE

NRPN $BnH

SYTEM EXCLUSIVE

FUNCTION CALL

$F0H $43H $1nH

( RESPONSE FOR

PARAMETER REQUEST

$F0H $43H $1nH )

USER DEFINE,GPI

MMC $F0H $7FH $nnH $06H

MIDI IN

BANK ON

NRPN Tx ON

ASSIGN Tx ON

NRPN or ASSIGN Tx ON

PGM ECHO ON

MIDI OUT

PROGRAM CHANGE

$CnH

PGM Tx ON

MIDI Tx CH?

MULTI ON

MIDI Rx CH?

CONTROL CHANGE

BANK SELECT $BnH

CONTROL CHANGE

$BnH

CONTROL CHANGE

NRPN $BnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

PARAMETER REQUEST

$F0H $43H $3nH

MIDI IN

BANK ON

NRPN Rx ON

ASSIGN Rx ON

PGM ECHO ON

MIDI OUT

PROGRAM CHANGE

$CnH

PGM Rx ON

MIDI Rx CH?

MULTI ON

MIDI Rx CH?

or OMNI ON

or MULTI ON

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual

102

n=0-15(Device Channel

No.1-16)

GROUP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001001 09 Device code(PM1D)

PARAM TYPE 00000000 00 Current Memory

DATA 0ttttttt dd0 data type

0aaaaaaa dd1 addressHIGH(BIT13-7)

0aaaaaaa dd2 addressLOW(BIT6-0)

0ddddddd dd3 data

0ddddddd ddn

EOX 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Data type:

The “data” ﬁeld contains the requested number of data bytes from the

requested address, converted from 8-bit to 7-bit form. The MSB's for

seven bytes will be the ﬁrst byte of data.

Example) [seven bytes of 8 bit data] [8 bytes of 7 bit data]

80 01 82 03 84 05 06 → 54 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

The “data type” is the same as for a Parameter Value Request.

PARAMETER CHANGE (type 0x02:function call)

If transmission is ON for Control Change ASSIGN or NRPN, this

message is transmitted when an operation causing multiple parameters

to be modiﬁed simultaneously is performed. This message is not

received.

STATUS 11110000 F0 System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacture's ID

No.(YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0pppnnnn 1n response for request

n=0-15(Device Channel

No.1-16)

GROUP ID 00111110 3e MODEL ID(digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00001001 09 Device code(PM1D)

PARAM TYPE 00000010 02 function call

DATA 0ttttttt dd0 function

0aaaaaaa dd1 category/number

0aaaaaaa dd2 channel/number2

0ddddddd dd3 type

EOX 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

function category/number number2,channel

--------------------------------------------------------------

0x04 EFF Lib Recall LIB No.Bit7-1 LIB No..Bit0,

EFF No.0-7

(LIB No.1-199, EFF No.0-7)

0x04 EFF Copy No.Bit7-1 No.Bit0, EFF

No.0-7

(No.255, EFF No.0-7)

0x05 GEQ Recall Category Library 126 GEQ No.0-23

0x05 GEQ Copy,Link No.127 GEQ No.0-23

0x06 IN EQ Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-111

0x06 IN EQ Copy Category Copy 127 CH No.0-111

0x07 OUT EQ Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-73

0x07 OUT EQ Copy Category Copy 127 CH No.0-73

0x08 IN GATE Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-111

0x08 IN GATE Copy Category Copy 127 CH No.0-111

0x09 IN COMP Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-111

0x09 IN COMP Change Category Copy 127 CH No.0-111

0x0a OUT COMP Lib RecallCategory Library 126 CH No.0-73

0x0a OUT COMP Change Category Copy 127 CH No.0-73

0x0b IN CH Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-111

0x0c OUT CH Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-73

0x0d IN CH COPY Source CH No.0-111 Destination CH

No.0-111

0x0e OUT CH COPY Source CH No.0-73 Destination CH

No.0-73

0x0f IN CH PAIR/LR-MONO *1 CH No.0-111

0x10 OUT CH PAIR *1 CH No.0-73

0x11 SETUP CHANGE 127 0

(*1 0:PAIR L->R, 1:PAIR R->L, 2:RESET BOTH, 3:PAIR RELEASE

4:L-MONO, 5:R-MONO, 6:LR-MONO, 7:L,R,LR-MONO RELEASE )

type

For EFF BIT5-0:EFFECT TYPE

For GEQ BIT6:MONO/LINK

For EQ, GATE, COMP, CH, COPY, PAIR

BIT6:MONO/PAIR, BIT5-3:reserved

BIT2:GATE TYPE, BIT1, 0:COMP TYPE

For SETUP 0:LOAD,

1:RECALL SAFE INPUT ALL ON,

2:RECALL SAFE INPUT ALL OFF,

3:RECALL SAFE OUTPUT ALL ON,

4:RECALL SAFE OUTPUT ALL OFF

EFF LIBRARY is transmitted when you recall a number that is not

assigned to a program change.

YAMAHA [Digital Audio Mixing System Internal Parameters] Date: 28 Jun. 2002

Model: PM1D

MIDI Implementation Chart

Version: 1.5

Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Default

Changed

1–16

Memorized

Mode

Default

Messages

Altered

**************

OMNI off/OMNI on

Memorized

Note

Number True Voice

**************

Velocity

Note On

Note Off

After

Touch

Key’s

Ch’s

Pitch bend X X

Control

Change

0,32

1-5,7-31,33-37

39-95,102-119

98,99

6,38

Bank Select

Assignable

NRPN

(Non Registered

Parameter Number)

Data Entry

(for NRPN)

Prog

Change :True#

0–127

**************

0–127

0.0-99.9

Assignable

System Exclusive O O *1

System

Common

:Song Pos

:Song Sel

:Tune

System

Real Time

:Clock

:Commands

Aux

Messages

:Local ON/OFF

:All Notes OFF

:Active Sense

:Reset

Notes *1: Parameter Change/Request and MMC.

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO

O: Yes

X: No

IP 104 M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

Printed in Japan

Documenttranscriptie

PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual E PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Copyright Copying or distributing this manual in part or in whole using any method without the written permission of Yamaha Corporation is prohibited. Trademarks Company names and product names are trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners. Symbols such as ® and TM are not explicitly given in this document. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. 2 Contents Contents Additions/changes in V1.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Changes to the constantly-displayed screen. . 6 Upper part of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Lower part of the display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 DUAL CONSOLE mode added . . . . . . . . . . . . About Dual Console mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . About scene/library memories. . . . . . . . . . . About the console shutdown function. . . . . DUAL CONSOLE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections in Dual Console mode . . . . . . Establishing communication between consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitting only the necessary scenes / libraries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations of Dual Console mode. . . . . . . . Powering-off the consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 11 13 14 14 17 Cascade connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About cascade connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . CASCADE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cascade connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing a cascade connection. . . . . . . . Cautions when using cascade connection . . 27 27 27 29 31 33 Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) . . . . . GPI screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using GPI IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using GPI OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 36 40 41 18 21 21 26 Fader Start function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FADER START screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Using the Fader Start function. . . . . . . . . . . 45 Tap Tempo function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Added functions in the USER DEFINE screen 52 Input channel panel assignments . . . . . . . . . 52 PANEL ASSIGN screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Switching the panel assign setting . . . . . . . 55 Horizontal pair and vertical pair . . . . . . . . . . 56 Mix minus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New functions in the PAN/ROUTING screen Using mix minus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cautions regarding mix minus . . . . . . . . . . 58 58 59 60 Job select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mix send on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mix send point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mix send level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mix send pan/balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 61 62 62 63 Auto Store function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Using Auto Store from the screen . . . . . . . . 64 Using Auto Store from the [STORE] switch . .65 Global Paste function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 GLOBAL PASTE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Using the Global Paste function . . . . . . . . . .68 Parameter control via CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Using CONTROL CHANGE / NRPN messages to record/play parameter changes . . . . .74 Manual Fading function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 New functions in the FADE TIME screen . . . 76 Using Manual Fading (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Using Manual Fading (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Unit name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 UNIT NAME screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Naming a unit/port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Matrix send shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 DCA mute indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Oscillator improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Improvements in the OSCILLATOR screen . 86 Improvements in the INPUT PATCH / OUTPUT PATCH screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 USB PC (computer) connection . . . . . . . . . . 89 Automatic scrolling in the CH to MIX screen and MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen. . . . . . . . 90 ON/OFF button for COMM IN . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Added functions in the PREFERENCE screen. .92 Supplementary explanation for existing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 MIDI control change NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) assignment table . . . . 94 MIDI control change parameter assignment table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 3 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual This manual explains the functionality that has been added or changed in PM1D system software V1.5. Please refer to the original manual in conjunction with this manual. * In cases where the display of the console (CS1D) differs from the screen of the PM1D Manager application program, explanations that apply only to PM1D Manager are indicated as [PM1D Manager]. Additions/changes in V1.5 This section briefly summarizes the additions and changes in PM1D system software V1.5. For details on each function, refer to the appropriate page. ■ Changes to the constantly-displayed screen Major changes have been made to the items that are always shown in the top and bottom of the screen (→p.6). ■ New DUAL CONSOLE mode As an operation mode of the PM1D system, a DUAL CONSOLE mode has been added, allowing two consoles to be used with one system (→p.11). ■ Cascade connection Two systems can now be cascade-connected. A cascade-connected system can send any bus output to the same bus of the other system (→p.27). ■ GPI connector is now enabled The D-sub 25 pin GPI connector provided on the console and engine can now be used to input/output eight channels of control signals (→p.35). ■ REMOTE connector is now enabled The D-sub 9-pin REMOTE connector of the console and engine can now be used to control a recorder or other device (→p.35). ■ Fader Start function You can now specify that various commands be transmitted from an assigned connector when the level of a specified channel is raised above –60 dB or lowered to –∞ dB (→p.42). ■ Tap tempo function A “tap tempo” function has been added, allowing you to manually set the TEMPO parameter of an internal effect by tapping an external switch connected to the GPI connector (→p.51). ■ Expanded USER DEFINE functions In conjunction with the addition of various functionality, the user-definable functions have been significantly expanded (→p.52). ■ Input channel panel assignment can now be selected The input channels assigned to INPUT blocks 1–4 of the console can now be freely specified in blocks of twelve consecutive channels. Similarly, the ST IN channels assigned to ST IN blocks 1–2 can also be assigned in blocks of two adjacent channels (→p.52). Also, the DISPLAY SELECT section of the TRACKING RECALL screen now has an INPUT [PANEL] button that causes the current panel assignment state to be displayed in the screen. ■ New pairing mode In addition to the existing pairing mode in which adjacent input channels 1+2, 3+4, ... can be paired, you can now use “vertical pairing mode” in which input channels 1+49, 2+50 ... are paired. This mode allows you to use a single fader as if it were a stereo fader (→p.56). ■ Mix minus setting A MIX MINUS button has been added to the CH to MIX screen of the PAN/ROUTING function. This button provides a simple way to subtract only a specific channel from the signal that is being sent to a certain MIX bus. This is useful when a performer or announcer wishes to monitor the sound without his own voice (→p.58). ■ Job select Now you can move the cursor to a parameter and press the [SHIFT] + [ENTER] keys to access a popup-menu that lists the jobs available for that parameter. The cursor will turn yellow to indicate parameters for which you can use this function (→p.61). ■ Auto Store function When storing a scene, you can now use an “Auto Store function” that automatically selects the unit, patch, or name library number and title (→p.64). ■ Global Paste function Using the new “Global Paste function,” the settings of any channel or parameter in the current scene can be copied and pasted to one or more scenes in scene memory. This is a convenient way by which changes in the current scene can be applied to previouslystored scenes (→p.66). 4 Additions/changes in V1.5 ■ Operate parameters via control changes Now you can use MIDI control changes to remotely control PM1D parameters from an external device, or transmit console operations as control changes (→p.71). ■ Manual fading A new “Manual Fading” function has been added. When recalling a scene for which a fade time has been set, you can now use the [DATA] encoder to fade in the positive or negative direction. This is convenient when you want to vary the volume in conjunction with action on stage (→p.76). ■ Unit name You can now assign a unit name to each port of an input/output unit or card. If necessary, the unit name of each port can be displayed in the field in which the short name of an input channel was shown in the screen (→p.79). ■ Additional functions in the PREFERENCE screen A variety of setting items have been added in the PREFERENCE screen (→p.92). ■ Channel selection can now be separately specified for the AUTO DISPLAY function (SELECTED CH ON/OFF button) One of the AUTO DISPLAY functions automatically moves the cursor to the corresponding parameter when you switch the channel that is being operated. In the PREFERENCE screen AUTO DISPLAY section, this function can now be switched on/off independently of the other AUTO DISPLAY items (→p.92). ■ Matrix send shortcut The send level from a MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel to a MATRIX channel can now be controlled from a panel encoder (→p.82). ■ DCA mute indicator When you mute a DCA group, the [ASSIGN DCA] LED of the channels associated with that DCA can now be made to blink if desired. This is convenient when you want to know which channels are actually being muted (→p.85). ■ Improved oscillator The oscillator now lets you use two sine waves simultaneously. You can specify the frequency and level for each, and output them independently to odd-numbered / even-numbered channels (→p.86). ■ Improvements in the INPUT PATCH / OUTPUT PATCH screens The unit name of each port is now displayed in the UNIT PATCH / OUTPUT PATCH screens. Vertical and horizontal red lines can also indicate the currently selected grid (→p.89). ■ USB connection to a PC In addition to the serial connection supported on earlier versions, you can now use a USB connection to connect the PM1D to a PC (→p.89). ■ Improved operation in the CH to MIX and MATRIX/ST ROUTING screens Cursor movement now follows scrolling in the CH to MIX function of the PAN/ROUTING function and in the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen of the MATRIX/ST function (→p.90). ■ ON/OFF button added to COMM IN The COMM IN function can now be turned ON/ OFF independently (→p.91). 5 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Changes to the constantly-displayed screen In PM1D system software V1.5, the following changes have been made to the items that are always shown in the top and bottom of the console display. Upper part of the display 1 2 3 5 6 4 1 DISPLAY FUNCTION Shows the currently selected function as an abbreviation. • DUAL If DUAL CONSOLE is selected as the operation mode for the console, “DUAL” will be displayed here (→p.19). Hint Click this to switch between the FUNCTION MENU screen and the screen of the currently selected function. (Equivalent to the MENU button of the previous version.) 2 CONNECTION Indicates the status of the connections between the engine(s) and console(s). If communication between the consoles cannot be established even though DUAL CONSOLE mode is selected, an X mark will be displayed over the “DUAL” indication. • Engine A/B If the PM1D system is being used in mirror mode, this indicates which engine (A or B) is currently enabled, and the number of usable channels. The enabled engine is shown on a green background. You can also click this button to switch between engines A/B. If the engine that should be enabled is not operating normally, or if the connection has been broken, an X mark will be displayed over the A or B symbol. Console 1/2 DUAL Engine A/B • Console 1/2 If DUAL CONSOLE is selected as the console operation mode (SYSTEM CONFIGURATION in the SYSTEM CONNECTION screen, etc.), this indicates whether that console (CS1D) is specified as console 1 or as console 2 (→p.19). The color of this numeral will depend on how CASCADE is set for the operation mode. In the case of CASCADE OFF or CASCADE ON [MASTER], this numeral will be white on a black background. If CASCADE ON [SLAVE], this numeral will be black on a white background. If cascade communication between the systems cannot be established even though CASCADE ON is selected, this numeral will blink. 6 3 PANEL STATUS Indicates the current panel assignment (the channel numbers assigned to the INPUT block / ST IN block). 4 FADER FLIP Indicates the state of the FADER FLIP switch located on the console panel (i.e., whether [MIX] or [CH] is on). You can also use these buttons to switch [MIX] and [CH]. Hint If the FADER FLIP LINK button is turned off in the UTILITY function PANEL ASSIGN screen (a new screen added in V1.5), fader flip can be switched independently for INPUT blocks 1/2 (left) and 3/4 (right) (→p.54). Changes to the constantly-displayed screen 5 SCENE MEMORY Displays the number and title used when most recently recalling/storing the currently selected scene memory. Depending on the state of the scene, the following symbols may be displayed in the margin of the SCENE MEMORY field. • EDIT This symbol will be displayed if you edit a parameter of a scene, patch, unit, or name after recalling/storing a scene memory. When you recall/store a scene memory, this symbol will disappear. (However, it may not disappear if Recall Safe is turned on.) • TC This symbol will be displayed if the EVENT RECALLING button is set to ENABLE in the TC EVENT screen. You cannot rewrite scene memories or patch/unit/name libraries while this symbol is displayed. This means that you will also be unable to use functions such as store, undo store, link on/off, title editing, sort, or load. • PREVIEW In PREVIEW mode, this symbol will be displayed. In PREVIEW mode, the scene number and title will be displayed in white characters on a red background. • READ ONLY • PROTECT The READ ONLY symbol will be displayed if the scene currently selected for store/recall is read-only (00.0-00.9). The PROTECT symbol will be displayed if protect is turned on. 6 Other symbols The following symbols will be displayed at the upper right of the display according to the state of the console. • COMM IN (Communication In) If COMM IN is turned on in the MONITOR A screen, the COMM IN symbol will be displayed on a green background. In addition if a port is assigned to COMM IN, the background of this symbol will change to red when the input signal passes through the COMM IN gate. • LCR The LCR symbol will be displayed if LCR is turned on for at least one input channel or output channel (in the LCR screen of the PAN/ROUTING or MATRIX/ST function). In addition if the CENTER BUS CONTROL button (in the LCR screen of the PAN/ROUTING or MATRIX/ST function) is on, the LCR [B] symbol will be displayed. • RS422, MIDI, BUSY - RS422 This symbol will be displayed when a response to a transport command sent via the RS422 connector is received. - MIDI This symbol will be displayed when a program change or control change is received. - BUSY This symbol will be displayed during startup or while internal memory or a PC card file is being accessed. Hint • If the above states occur simultaneously, they will be displayed in descending priority of RS422 → MIDI → BUSY. • The RS422 and MIDI symbols will remain visible for approximately 200 msec after reception is completed. • The BUSY symbol will disappear immediately when access is completed. • MANUAL FADE, AUTO FADE, TRACKING ENABLE • SOLO/CUE According to the current solo or cue state, this area will display the following symbols: SOLO, EFFECT CUE, SUBIN CUE, INPUT CUE, DCA CUE, OUTPUT CUE, KEY IN CUE • TB/OSC (Talkback / Oscillator) The TB symbol will be displayed if talkback is on, and the OSC symbol will be displayed if the oscillator is on. Hint If the above operations occur simultaneously, they will be displayed in the order of TB → OSC. - MANUAL FADE This symbol will be displayed if Manual Fading is enabled (even if a fade operation is not actually being performed) (→p.76). - AUTO FADE This symbol will be displayed while Auto Fading is being executed. - TRACKING (Tracking Recall) This symbol will be displayed if tracking recall is enabled (the TRACKING RECALL button is set to ENABLE in the TRACKING RECALL screen). Hint If the above states occur simultaneously, they will be displayed in descending priority of MANUAL FADE → AUTO FADE → TRACKING. 7 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual [PM1D Manager] In PM1D Manager, the following information will be displayed instead of 3 PANEL STATUS and 4 FADER FLIP described on page 6. 1 2 1 Connection status This area of the PM1D Manager screen will indicate the status of the connection between the PC and the console or engine. • ........... Indicates that a cable is connected between the PC and console or engine, but communication has not been established. • ........... Indicates that a cable is connected between the PC and console or engine, and that communication has been established. In this state, the PM1D system can be controlled from the computer. • ...........Indicates that either the cable is not connected, or that the other device is not powered-on. 2 Connection destination / connection method In OFFLINE or ONLINE states, this area will show a graphic that indicates the connection destination (console or engine), and the connector (COM port name or USB port name) that is selected in the Communication Port (Option menu) of Communication Setup. Lower part of the display The lower part of the display is divided into the following four parts. Click the √/® buttons at the lower left of the screen to switch the items that are shown. ■ CONSOLE STATUS 1 2 3 4 1 Select buttons Click the √/® buttons to switch the items that are displayed. 2 IN SEL (Selected input channel) Indicates the input channel that is currently selected by the [SEL] switch. 3 NAME MODE Selects whether the display will show the short name of the input channel (CH NAME), or the name of the unit assigned to that input channel (UNIT NAME) (→p.79). 4 MODULE FLIP Indicates the on/off state of the MODULE [FLIP] switch in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL block. You can also click this button to change the module flip setting. 8 5 6 7 Hint • If the PATTERN CHANGE button is turned on in the MODULE FLIP BUTTON MODE section of the UTILITY function PANEL ASSIGN screen (a new screen added in V1.5), the indications of these buttons will change to “PATT.” In this case, they are used to switch channel assign patterns for the INPUT block (→p.52). • If the MODULE FLIP / PATTERN CHANGE LINK button in the same screen is turned off, settings for module flip and patterns can be made independently for the left and right INPUT blocks (→p.54). Changes to the constantly-displayed screen 5 MIX SEND NO. (Mix send number) Indicates the number of the MIX bus that is currently selected as the send destination for INPUT blocks 1–4. 6 MASTER FADER Indicates the function that is currently assigned to DCA faders 1–12 (DCA GROUP block). 7 OUT SEL (Selected output channel) Indicates the output channel that is currently selected by the [SEL] switch. [PM1D Manager] In PM1D Manager, the following information will be displayed instead of 4–6 described above. 1 1 DIRECT RECALL / MUTE MASTER According to the setting of the RECALL button or MUTE button, these buttons either directly recall twelve previously-assigned scenes, or switch mute groups 1–12 on/off. These buttons have the same function as SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches on the panel of the console. ■ USER DEFINE 1 2 1 Select buttons Click the √/® buttons to switch the items that are displayed. If you click the middle, you will return to the CONSOLE STATUS display. 2 User define buttons These list the functions that are assigned to the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches in the USER DEFINE block of the console. You can also click a button to execute the corresponding function. Hint Functions for the USER DEFINE [1]–[8] switches can be assigned in the UTILITY function USER DEFINE screen. 9 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual ■ CONSOLE GPI IN 1 1 Select buttons Click the √/® buttons to switch the items that are displayed. If you click the middle, you will return to the CONSOLE STATUS display. 2 Console GPI IN test buttons These buttons list the functions that are assigned via the GPI connector of the console to GPI IN (ports 1– 8). You can also click a button to test the corresponding function (→p.40). 2 Hint • Functions for the GPI IN test buttons can be assigned in the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen. • Even if you are not using the GPI port, you can use these buttons in place of the USER DEFINE switches by assigning functions to the GPI IN test buttons. ■ ENGINE GPI IN 1 1 Select buttons Click the √/® buttons to switch the items that are displayed. If you click the middle, you will return to the CONSOLE STATUS display. 2 Engine GPI IN test buttons These buttons list the functions that are assigned via the GPI connector of the engine to GPI IN (ports 1– 8). You can also click a button to test the corresponding function (→p.40). Hint • Functions for the GPI IN test buttons can be assigned in the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen. • Even if you are not using the GPI port, you can use these buttons in place of the USER DEFINE switches by assigning functions to the GPI IN test buttons. Since the GPI IN of the engine can be controlled only from console 1, the GPI IN test buttons will not be displayed in DUAL CONSOLE mode if console 2 is specified. However in PM1D Manager, the display is not restricted even if console 2 is specified in DUAL CONSOLE mode when OFFLINE. 10 2 DUAL CONSOLE mode added DUAL CONSOLE mode added As an operation mode of the PM1D system, version 1.5 adds Dual Console mode, in which two console are used by one system. The functionality and operation of Dual Console mode is explained below. In the following explanation, functions and operations that apply only to console 1 are indicated as [Console 1], and functions and operations that apply only to console 2 as [Console 2]. If the console (CS1D) you are using was manufactured before June 2002, you may be unable to select Dual Console mode even if connections are correct. In this case, you will need to have a gate array rewritten in order to use Dual Console mode. Please contact your Yamaha dealer. It is necessary to have the gate array rewritten only if you wish to use Dual Console mode. If you are using the system in other modes, rewriting is not necessary, and you may continue using the system without change. About Dual Console mode Dual Console mode is a mode in which two consoles (CS1D) are used in a single PM1D system. In this mode, two consoles share one (in standard mode) or two (in mirror mode) engines (DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}). Here are some examples of how Dual Console mode can be used: • Use two consoles to control the main mix and monitor mix In this application, the same input channels are patched to the panels of both consoles. One engineer controls the main mix, and another engineer controls the monitor mix. • Use two consoles to control the same mix from two locations In this application, two consoles are placed in separate locations (for example one near the stage and the other in the audience seating), and two engineers control the same mix. • Use two consoles to control 96 channels simultaneously In this application, input channels 1–48 are patched to one console, and input channels 49–96 to the other console, allowing one or more engineers to control 96 channels simultaneously. In Dual Console mode, the console that is connected to the engine will operate as the master unit, and the other console will operate as the slave unit. However, in order to avoid confusion with the master/slave relationship in “engine cascade” (described later in this document), we refer to the master unit as “console 1,” and the slave unit as “console 2.” Console 1 and console 2 differ in the functions they can control, and in the order of priority when operations overlap. The differences between consoles 1 and 2 can be summarized as follows. • Items that are linked between consoles 1 and 2 In general, changes that you make to the mix parameters in the current scene are linked between consoles 1 and 2. (An operation on one console will be reflected by the other.) Operations of console 2 will not nullify operations of console 1. Even if differences occur between the states of console 1 and console 2, the engine will always be set according to console 1. If a difference occurs between parameters that should be linked, you can select whether to copy all scenes and all libraries when connection occurs, or to copy them as desired after connection. • Items that are operated independently between consoles 1 and 2 Channel selections by the [SEL] switches, changes in panel layout such as fader flip or module flip, and screen switching by the function switches are not linked between consoles. These operations can be made independently on each console. • Items that can be operated only by console 1 Most operations that affect the core of the system, such as switching between engines, switching the word clock master, and changing the connections between components, can be performed only by console 1. The settings of most items can be viewed on the console 2 screen, but cannot be modified. • PC connection A PC (PM1D Manager) can be connected only to console 1 or to the engine. It cannot be connected to console 2. Nor is it possible to connect and use two or more PCs simultaneously. Whether a parameter is linked when operated, and the priority between consoles 1 and 2, will differ depending on the screen. The table on the following page summarizes the operation of each screen in Dual Console mode. 11 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Function Screen Linked 1→2 1↔2 EFFECT O GEQ O SCENE MEMORY q RECALL SAFE O FADE TIME O DIRECT RECALL O Remarks Only the trigger for number and store/recall operations is transmitted and received. SORT-related settings can be operated only on console 1 O TRACKING RECALL GLOBAL PASTE Independent O MIDI PGM CHANGE O MIDI CTRL CHANGE O • GPI IN settings Console 1 or PC: Only console 1 / engine port can be set Console 2: Only console 2 port can be set MIDI/GPI/TC UTILITY GPI q • GPI OUT settings Console 1 or PC: Only console 1 / engine port can be set Console 2: Only console 2 port can be set. However, engine port can be viewed TC EVENT O FADER START O PREFERENCE O USER DEFINE O From system software 1.5, this can be set/operated independently for consoles 1 and 2 and the PC LOAD / SAVE O There are limitations on the parameters that can be loaded by console 2 O PANEL ASSIGN PAIR MODE O SYSTEM CONNECTION q DUAL CONSOLE O Buttons that switch the wiring of console 2 itself can also be operated from console 2 O CASCADE SYS/W.CLOCK Cannot be set on a PC connected to a system that includes a console INPUT UNIT q Virtual units can be created only from console 1. Unit parameters are linked. OUTPUT UNIT q Virtual units can be created only from console 1. Unit parameters are linked. WORD CLOCK O DITHER O UNIT NAME O METERING POINT and PEAK HOLD can be operated only from console 1 q METER q TALKBACK O OSCILLATOR 2TR IN Settings other than INPUT CONSOLE can also be operated from console 2 q O ST OUT DIGITAL O MONITOR A MON/CUE MONITOR B CUE/SOLO 12 Only TB OUT is in common The two consoles share one 2CH set of oscillators. — — — Cannot be operated, since in Dual Console mode, this functions as MONITOR A of the other console q Cue is independent, solo function on/off can be operated only from console 1 Linked if the CUE MODE button is set to SOLO ON, or if in the SYS/W.CLOCK function DUAL CONSOLE screen CUE ON/OFF is turned ON. DUAL CONSOLE mode added Function OUT PATCH Screen Linked 1→2 1↔2 OUTPUT PATCH O INSERT PATCH O INSERT POINT O INSERT VIEW O NAME O OUT INSERT O OUT EQ O OUT COMP O OUT DELAY O OUT DCA MUTE O MATRIX/ST O OUT CH VIEW O IN PATCH INPUT PATCH O DIRECT OUT PATCH O INSERT PATCH O INSERT/DIRECT POINT O INSERT/DIRECT VIEW O NAME O HA/INSERT O IN EQ O IN GATE/COMP O IN DELAY O IN DCA/MUTE O PAN/ROUTING O INPUT CH VIEW O Independent • Linked (1→2) .............Screens in which the console 1/2 settings are linked. However, they can be operated only by console 1. • Linked (1↔2).............Screens in which the console 1/2 settings are linked. They can be operated from either console 1 or 2. • Independent...............Screens in which settings can be made independently by consoles1 and 2. Remarks If a discrepancy occurs between the patching when a scene/ unit is recalled, the patching of console 1 will take priority If a discrepancy occurs between the patching when a scene/ unit is recalled, the patching of console 1 will take priority • O ..................................Indicates that all parameters in the corresponding function/screen will operate as indicated (independent, linked 1→2, or linked 1↔2). • q .................................Indicates that some parameters in this function/screen are exceptions, and operate other than indicated. About scene/library memories When a scene or library is stored or recalled on one console, the other will follow this operation. However, this simply means that a command of “recall scene number ***.*” is transmitted to the other console; the result of the store/recall is not conveyed to the other console. Thus, in order to completely synchronize the two consoles, it is necessary to match the current memory (the scene, patch, units, names currently shown in the panel), the scene memories and libraries that are used, and some of the setup data. If this data does not match, scene/library recall operations may cause the settings of the current scene to become completely different between the two consoles. Data can be synchronized between the two consoles in the following ways. • Transfer all data In this method, all data is transmitted via the CONTROL I/O connector from console 1 to console 2. You can perform this operation in a single step when you initiate Dual Console mode. • Transfer only necessary data In this method, only the scenes and libraries that will be used are manually transmitted from console 1 to console 2. • Transfer all data via memory card In this method, all data of console 1 is saved on a memory card, and this data is then loaded into console 2. To use this method, use the LOAD/SAVE screen of console 1 to save all data on a memory card, then insert that card into console 2 and load the data. (For details, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software),” p.40.) 13 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual About the console shutdown function A Shutdown function has been added to keep current memory from being modified in Dual Console mode. In Dual Console mode, powering-off either console may modify the current memory of the other console or the engine, but by shutting-down the console before powering it off, you can prevent current memory from being modified. For the procedure, refer to page 26. • This shutdown function is necessary only in Dual Console mode. If you are not operating in Dual Console mode, the SHUTDOWN button (→p.26) will not be displayed. • If you power-off the console without performing this procedure as described, the current memory used by the other console or the engine may be modified. However, settings other than current memory (i.e., scene memory, the various setup memories and libraries) will not be affected. Thus, if you have stored the current memory to a scene, you can re-recall that scene to recover from an accidental power-off that occurred without performing the shutdown. DUAL CONSOLE screen PM1D system software V1.5 adds a DUAL CONSOLE screen to the SYS/W.CLOCK function. In this screen you can make settings and perform operations for Dual Console mode. 14 DUAL CONSOLE mode added 1 1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Indicates the current operation mode and cascade mode of the PM1D system. Click the button to open the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION popup window, where you can switch the operation mode and cascade mode. Hint The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION field is displayed in the SYS/W.CLOCK function SYSTEM CONNECTION screen, DUAL CONSOLE screen, and CASCADE screen (newly added in version 1.5). All of these represent the same setting. 2 2 DUAL CONSOLE LINK (DUAL CONSOLE mode link settings) Here you can select whether cue operation and talkback-controlled dimmer operation will be linked. If the CUE ON/OFF LINK button is on, operations of the [CUE] switches, EFFECT CUE, SUB IN CUE, and gate KEY IN CUE will be linked. If the TALKBACK DIMMER ON/OFF LINK button is on, turning talkback on from one console will attenuate the monitor signal on the other console as well. Note that the TALKBACK DIMMER ON/OFF LINK button links the dimmer operation; it does not link talkback on/off operation. The amount of attenuation when the dimmer is on can be adjusted independently in the MONITOR A screen of each console. 15 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual [Console 1] The following screen appears only on console 1. 6 3 4 5 3 UPDATE Each time you click this button, the current memory, scene memories/libraries, and setup data will be compared between console 1 and console 2, and the ALL DATA STATUS (4) display will be updated. 4 ALL DATA STATUS This area displays the result of comparing the data of console 1 and 2. If all data is identical, this will indicate “SAME.” If there is any difference, this will indicate “DIFF.” 5 Scene memories / libraries This area displays the result of comparing each scene memory and library. You can click the buttons at the left to select the items that will be displayed in the library data list (7). 6 CURRENT MEMORY (Current memory status) This indicates the result of comparing the current memory (the scene currently reflected by the panel, patches, units, and names). If these are all identical for consoles 1 and 2, this will indicate “SAME.” If there are any differences, this will indicate “DIFF.” If you click the COPY button located in the center, the current memory will be copied from console 1 to console 2. 16 7 7 Scene memory / library data list This displays the scene memory / library data that is selected by the scene memory / library status (5) buttons. The ALL field at the top of the list will indicate “SAME” if all data matches, or “DIFF” if there is any difference. If you click the COPY button located in the center, the entire contents of the selected scene memory or library will be copied from console 1 to console 2. The lower lines of the list show the contents of the selected scene memories / libraries for each console. If the contents of each number match, this will indicate “SAME.” If they differ, this will indicate “DIFF.” Only while a scene memory is displayed in the list, clicking the COPY button located in the center will copy the contents of that scene memory from console 1 to console 2. DUAL CONSOLE mode added Connections in Dual Console mode The following diagrams show connections between the consoles and engine(s) in Dual Console mode. • You must power-off all equipment before making Please note that on console 2 you will connect the DIGITAL I/O lines to the DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A ports — not to the DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE ports. connections. • Connections for input/output units and power supplies are not discussed here. For details, refer to “CS1D Operation Manual, Setup.” [Standard mode] IN OUT 1 2 IN 1 2 1 CONTROL I/O CONSOLE 2 DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE CONSOLE 1 (CS1D) 1 OUT 2 1 2 CONTROL I/O CONSOLE 1 2 DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A CONSOLE 2 (CS1D) DIGITAL I/O CONTROL I/O ENGINE A ENGINE A 1 2 1 2 CONSOLE I/O 1 2 OUT IN 1 2 1 2 IN OUT 1 2 CONTROL I/O ENGINE A (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) 17 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual [Mirror mode] IN OUT 1 2 IN 1 1 2 CONTROL I/O CONSOLE 2 1 DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE CONSOLE 1 (CS1D) DIGITAL I/O CONTROL I/O ENGINE A ENGINE A 1 2 1 2 CONSOLE I/O 1 2 OUT IN 1 2 1 2 IN OUT 1 2 CONTROL I/O ENGINE A (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) OUT 2 1 2 CONTROL I/O CONSOLE 1 2 DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A CONSOLE 2 (CS1D) DIGITAL I/O CONTROL I/O ENGINE B ENGINE B 1 2 1 2 CONSOLE I/O 1 2 OUT IN 1 2 1 2 IN OUT 1 2 CONTROL I/O ENGINE B (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) Hint • The dashed lines in the above diagram are spare connections for use in the event that the currentlyvalid connectors become unusable. Connect each device to the identically-numbered (1 or 2) connector on each device. The system will not operate correctly if you connect differently-numbered connectors. • The system will operate normally even with just the connections shown by the solid lines. However, we recommend that you also make the spare connections shown above whenever possible. Establishing communication between consoles This section explains how to select Dual Console mode on each console, specify the console to which the engine is connected as “console 1,” specify the other console as “console 2,” and establish communication. In order to use Dual Console mode, each console number must be specified correctly. Be aware that communication will not occur if consoles 1 and 2 are interchanged, or if both are set to console 1. 1. Turn on the power in the order of input/output units, engine(s), and console power supply. Incorrect operation while making settings can cause a high-volume signal to be output. We strongly recommend that you turn down the volume of your power amps etc. until settings are completed. 18 DUAL CONSOLE mode added [Console 2] [Console 1] 2. On the console to which the engine is not connected, access the SYS/W.CLOCK function DUAL CONSOLE screen (a newly added screen in version 1.5). 6. On the console to which the engine is connected, access the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION popup window in the same way. 3. In the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION field, click the button. 7. Click the DUAL button within the CONSOLE section of the OPERATION MODE SELECT area. The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION popup window will appear. In the OPERATION MODE SELECT area of this window you can select the operation mode of the PM1D system. 8. Verify that the CONSOLE 1 button is on, and click the OK button. When you click the OK button, the two consoles will attempt to establish communication. When communication has been established, console 1 will compare the system version, scene memories, libraries, and setup data of the two consoles. • In order to use Dual Console mode, both con- soles must have the same system version. • If the versions of the two consoles differ, the ver- sion check popup window will appear, and further operation will not be possible. Update the system version to match, and perform the operation once again. If there is any difference in the data of the two consoles, the console 1 screen will show a message of “Will transmit differential data to CONSOLE 2. Are you sure? [xx sec.]” 4. Click the DUAL button within the CONSOLE section of the OPERATION MODE SELECT area. When you turn the DUAL button on, the CONSOLE No. buttons will become operable. 5. Click the CONSOLE 2 button to turn it on, and then click the OK button. The console will be set to DUAL CONSOLE mode. In the upper part of the screen, the control number of the CONNECTION field will change to “2,” and “DUAL” will be indicated below the number. (However, an X will be superimposed on DUAL since communication is not yet established.) This message is asking you whether it is OK to transmit the differing data from console 1 to console 2. (The data is always sent from console 1 to console 2. The [xx sec.] (or [xx min.]) indicates the estimated time required for transmission. When you click the OK button in this window, all current scene, scene, memory, and library data, and any setup data required for linked operation will be transmitted from console 1 to console 2. If you click the CANCEL button, only the current scene and the setup data necessary for linked operation will be transmitted from console 1 to console 2. Hint If the scene memories and libraries are fully used, it will take approximately 60 minutes to transmit all of the data. 19 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual CAUTION! • Be aware that once data transmission is started, it cannot be aborted. Please use caution. • The expected time is merely an estimate. A longer time than indicated here may actually be required. • If you do not have enough time for transmission to be performed, we strongly recommend that you click the CANCEL button when the above message appears, and either transmit only the necessary data (→p.21) or transfer the data via memory card. 9. If it is OK to transmit the data, click the OK button. Data transmission will begin. The screen will show a progress bar to indicate the state of progress. • While transmission is occurring, never turn off the power or interrupt communication. If for some reason the console power supply is turned off, the memory contents of console 2 will be lost. In this case you will need to initialize console 2. • Even if you click the CANCEL button in step 9, part of the setup data and the current data will be transmitted, so as long as you are operating the current scene, the two consoles will operate in tandem. However, since the libraries and scene do not match, performing a store/recall operation may cause the current scene on the two consoles to have completely different settings. When transmission is completed, the X symbol will disappear from the “DUAL” indication in the CONNECTION area at the top of the screen. Now the two consoles can be used simultaneously. Hint • If you power-off the system in this state, console 1 will attempt to initiate communication in Dual Console mode the next time it is powered-on. • To cancel Dual Console mode, access the DUAL CONSOLE screen on console 1 or 2, click the button in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION field, and select SINGLE CONSOLE mode. If Dual Console mode is established, switching to Single Console mode will set both console 1 and console 2 to Single Console mode. 20 If, after communication is established, communication with the DIGITAL I/O connector or CONTROL I/O connector is interrupted, a warning message like the following will appear in the lower part of the screen. Please check the appropriate connection. DUAL CONSOLE mode added Transmitting only the necessary scenes / libraries After establishing Dual Console mode communication, you can transmit only the necessary scene memories and libraries from console 1 to console 2. Even if you have cancelled transmission of all data after starting-up Dual Console mode, you can use this method to transmit only the minimum scenes and libraries. The following procedure can be performed only on console 1. [Console 1] 1. On console 1, access the SYS/W.CLOCK function DUAL CONSOLE screen. 2. In the ALL DATA STATUS section, click the UPDATE button. The memory contents of consoles 1 and 2 will be compared. If they match perfectly, an indication of “SAME” will appear at the right of the UPDATE button. If there is any difference, an indication of “DIFF” will appear. 3. Click the scene memory / library status buttons to select the scene memory / library that you want to transmit. The contents of the selected scene memory / library will appear in the list at the right. If the identicallynumbered data matches between consoles 1 and 2, the field at the right will indicate “SAME.” If the data does not match, this field will indicate “DIFF.” Hint If no data has been saved in the identically-numbered memory of either console 1 or 2, this field will indicate “SAME.” 4. Click the COPY ( ) button for the number that you want to transmit. The corresponding data will be copied from console 1 to console 2. Perform the same operation for other numbers as desired. • When copying a scene memory, you must also copy the unit, patch, and name libraries used by each scene. • Individual numbers of library data cannot be copied. The entire library will be copied as a whole. Limitations of Dual Console mode This section explains the limitations of Dual Console mode. ■ Operation when the current memory does not match whether the current memory or scene memory matches following execution.) Dual Console mode can be used even if the current memory (the scene, patches, units, and names currently reflected by the panel) does not match. In this case, editing a linkable parameter from one console will cause only the identical parameter on the other console to change as well. This means that if changes occur in the contents of scene memory, discrepancies may occur between the current memories of the two consoles following a recall operation. Please be aware of this possibility. For operations such as setting/disabling a pair, switching a MIX bus between VARI/FIX, and copying between channels, only the appropriate number and command are transmitted. If the received command conflicts with the console’s own current memory, the setting of console 1 will always take priority. In this case, the lower part of the console 2 will indicate “DATA TYPE CONFLICT! EXCLUDED,” and it will not be possible to edit the parameter on console 2. Popup windows that ask you to change an internal setting (such as switching units) will always appear only on console 1. When you execute such a change on console 2, a message will ask you for confirmation. ■ Scene memory store/recall operations Recall Undo or Store Undo can be performed from either console. However if the scene memories are not synchronized at the time of initial connection in Dual Console mode, the scene number that is recalled by Recall Undo may differ. In this case, undo will occur with differing scene memories, and the engine will follow the data of console 1. Store Undo cannot be performed immediately after Dual Console mode initial connection occurs. ■ Preview mode Scene memory Preview mode can be operated independently from either console. If one console is switched to Preview mode, and an edited scene is stored, all data of the corresponding scene will be copied to the same scene number of the other console (the store-destination scene will match). When you perform a scene memory store/recall operation on one console, the corresponding number along with a store/recall command will be transmitted to the other console. (The other console is not informed 21 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual ■ Library store/recall operations ■ Talkback When you perform a library store/recall operation on one console, the corresponding number along with a store/recall command will be transmitted to the other console. (The other console is not informed whether the library or current memory matches following execution.) In Dual Console mode, two talkback systems can be operated independently from each console 1 and 2. (Talkback will function with a total of four inputs / two systems.) This means that if changes occur in the library contents, discrepancies may occur in the current memories of the two consoles following a recall operation. Please be aware of this possibility. As an exception, if you open the LIBRARY popup window on one console, edit the parameters directly and then store, the data of the corresponding library will be copied to the same library number on the other console. (The store-destination library will match.) For each console, you can use the MON/CUE function TALKBACK screen to adjust the input level, phase, and destination of the two talkbacks. However, the settings of the TALKBACK screen TB OUT section will be shared by console 1 and 2. In this section, you can choose the talkback source as either CONSOLE 1 (talkback signal of console 1), CONSOLE 2 (talkback signal of console 2), or CONSOLE 1+2 (talkback signals of consoles 1 and 2), and specify the desired port as the output destination. (This operation can be performed from either console.) ■ File load/save operations In Dual Console mode, you can use the LOAD/SAVE screen to load/save data from or to a memory card on either console. However on console 2, there are slight limitations on the data that can be loaded from a memory card. The following table shows the items that can be loaded by each console in Dual Console mode. Console 1 Console 2 Scene memory Loaded item O O Setup data O q1 TC EVENT screen settings O X MIDI PGM CHANGE screen settings O X Libraries O O O: Loadable q: Partially loadable X: Not loadable 1. Only the parameters that can be set independently for each console will be loaded. Parameters that are linked with console 1 will not be loaded. ■ Engine selection in Mirror mode When using the PM1D system in Mirror mode, switching between engines A and B can be performed only from console 1. When the engine has switched, a message of “ENGINE HAS BEEN SWITCHED TO [A] ([B])” will appear at the bottom of the screen on console 2. 22 If the TALKBACK DIMMER ON/OFF LINK button is turned on in the DUAL CONSOLE screen of console 1, the dimmer will operate on the other console as well when talkback is turned on by one console. However even in this case, talkback on/off operation is not linked. The amount by which the signal is attenuated when the dimmer is on can be adjusted independently for each console in the MONITOR A screen. DUAL CONSOLE mode added ■ Monitor In Dual Console mode, one of the two monitor buses A and B can be assigned to each console 1 and 2, and controlled independently. The monitor bus controlled by the console itself is assigned to MONITOR A, and the monitor bus con- MONITOR A Monitor signal of console 1 trolled by the other console is assigned to MONITOR B. This means that from either console, monitor-related settings will be performed in the MONITOR A screen (and the MONITOR A section of the panel). MONITOR B MONITOR A Monitor signal of console 2 Monitor signal of console 2 Console 1 MONITOR B Monitor signal of console 1 Console 2 • On either console, the MONITOR B screen will be unavailable in Dual Console mode, and no parameters will be displayed. • The MONITOR B SOURCE section of the panel will only indicate the source that is being monitored by the other console, and cannot be operated. However, the MONITOR B [LEVEL] knob, MONITOR B [ON] switch, and MONITOR B [PHONES] knob can be operated. (If desired, you can monitor the same source as the other console.) ■ Cue In Dual Console mode, cue operations can generally be performed independently. Also, the [LAST CUE] switch on the panel and the CUE/SOLO screen LAST CUE button can also be operated independently for each console. However, if in the DUAL CONSOLE screen the CUE ON/ OFF LINK button (→p.15) is turned on, all cue operations ([CUE] switch on/off, EFFECT CUE, SUB IN CUE, gate KEY IN CUE) will be linked. This method is convenient when one engineer is operating both consoles. If effect cue for a certain internal effect (for example, internal effect 3) is enabled on one console, effect cue will be cancelled when you switch screens on that console or if you select the same screen (the EFFECT 3 screen in this example) on the other console and then switch screens. The reason for this design is that otherwise, when the screen is switched, it would become impossible to know which effect cue was being monitored. Hint As an exception, effect cue will not be cancelled if you switch alternately between the EFFECT 1–8 screen that is enabled for effect cue and the EFFECT ASSIGN screen. The reason for this design is that in the EFFECT ASSIGN screen, you can see which effect cue is being monitored. When cue operations are linked, you can enable key in cue so that the gate key-in signal of the currently selected input channel can be monitored from both consoles. However in Dual Console mode, [SEL] key operations are not linked, meaning that the selected signal source may differ. Please use caution. In the same way, if you enable SUB IN cue in the SUB IN screen of one console, SUB IN cue will be cancelled if you switch screens on the same console or if you select the same SUB IN screen on the other console and then switch screens. 23 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual ■ SOLO mode SOLO mode on/off can be control only from console 1. On console 2, the panel [SOLO] switch and the CUE/ SOLO screen SOLO ON/OFF button will not function. While SOLO mode is on, cue operations will be linked regardless of the state of the DUAL CONSOLE screen CUE ON/OFF LINK button (→p.15). (Pressing the [CUE] switch on either console will solo that source.) ■ OUT COMP function / IN GATE/COMP function If the compressor/gate type for the same channel differs between console 1 and 2, changes made to the parameters of that compressor/gate will be ignored. If the KEY IN LEFT CH button is switched on for one console, this will be ignored if the corresponding channel is paired on the other console. In Dual Console mode, the panel [LAST CUE] switch can be operated independently from each console. However, the [LAST CUE] switch of consoles 1 and 2 will be linked if in the DUAL CONSOLE screen the CUE ON/ OFF LINK button is turned on, or while SOLO mode is on. If the state of the [LAST CUE] switches differs between consoles 1 and 2 when you enter SOLO mode, the setting of console 1 will be copied to console 2. ■ MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen / SUB IN screen ■ Meter operations If pairing settings differ between console 1 and 2 for the same MIX channel, changes made to the send level / pan of the signal sent from an input channel to that MIX bus will be ignored. In Dual Console mode, the METER function METERING POINT button and PEAK HOLD button, and the panel METER section [PRE] switch and [PEAK HOLD] switch will be linked. However, these buttons and switches can be operated only by console 1. If pairing settings differ between console 1 and 2 for the same MATRIX channel, changes made to the send level / pan of the signal sent from a MIX channel / SUB IN to that MATRIX bus will be ignored. ■ CH to MIX screen ■ IN PATCH function / OUT PATCH function Even if the patching is switched on one console, the operation will be ignored if the corresponding card is not specified on the other console. Also, in conjunction with the addition of Dual Console mode, you can now patch the talkback signal of CONSOLE 1 and CONSOLE 2 (IN PATCH and IN INSERT “IN” only). The CONSOLE 1 talkback is displayed as TB C1, and the CONSOLE 2 talkback as TB C2. This can be viewed/set in Single Console mode as well as in Dual Console mode, but the TB C2 setting is valid only in Dual Console mode. ■ Pair mode switching The pair mode can be switched only from console 1. ■ INPUT UNIT / OUTPUT UNIT screen Units and cards can be changed only from console 1. The same content will be displayed in the screen of console 2, but cannot be edited. Nor can you specify virtual units or cards from console 2. As an exception, only if console 2 is switched to PREVIEW mode, virtual units or cards can be created on console 2, and this content can be saved to a scene or unit library. ■ Effect functions If the effect type of the same internal effect differs between console 1 and 2, changes made to the parameters of that effect will be ignored. ■ IN HA/INSERT function / OUT INSERT function Even if a parameter for an individual card (e.g., gain, phase) is edited on one card, the operation will be ignored if the corresponding card is not specified on the other console. Also, in conjunction with the addition of Dual Console mode, you can now patch the talkback signal of CONSOLE 1 and CONSOLE 2 (IN PATCH and IN INSERT “IN” only). The CONSOLE 1 talkback is displayed as TB C1, and the CONSOLE 2 talkback as TB C2. This can be viewed/set in Single Console mode as well as in Dual Console mode, but the TB C2 setting is valid only in Dual Console mode. ■ MIDI/GPI/TC function Time code / MIDI input can be selected for the ports of either console. 24 DUAL CONSOLE mode added ■ GPI screen The following restrictions apply to GPI IN/GPI OUT settings. • GPI IN On console 1 / PC (PM1D Manager), settings can be made only for the GPI port of console 1 and the engine. On console 2, settings can be made only for the GPI port of console 2. • GPI OUT On console 1 / PC, settings can be made only for the GPI port of console 1 and the engine. On console 2, settings can be made only for the GPI port of console 2. However, signals can be output from console 2 to the engine port. ■ USER DEFINE/GPI function User-definable switches and functions assigned to GPI IN can be set and operated independently from console 1 or 2. However for some functions, the following limitations apply. • INC/DEC RECALL The preceding or following scene will be recalled relative to the scene number that was last recalled/ stored on console 1. Be aware of this when using this function on console 2. • MONITOR B SELECT While Dual Console mode is in operation, the MONITOR B SELECT function assigned to a userdefinable switch or GPI IN is not valid. • ENGINE B SELECT (GPI only) The GPI IN test button assigned to the ENGINE B SELECT function cannot be operated from console 2. Hint The MONITOR A SELECT function can be set and operated from either console. On console 2, the INPUT CONSOLE button will be masked, and cannot be operated. However, you can use either console to select the input source (2TR IN 1 / 2TR IN 2 only), switch the SRC (sample rate converter) ON/ THROUGH, adjust the level, and switch the phase. These operations will be linked between console 1 and 2. ■ ST OUT DIGITAL screen In Dual Console mode, the same signals will be output from STEREO OUT A of both consoles and STEREO OUT B of both consoles. Thus, the settings in the ST OUT DIGITAL screen will be linked. ■ SYSTEM CONNECTION screen In general, routing changes in the SYSTEM CONNECTION screen can be performed only from console 1. However, routings connected to console 2 itself can be changed only from console 2. ■ FADER START screen The settings of this screen cannot be made from a PC (PM1D Manager) connected to a system that includes a console. ■ 2TR IN screen In Dual Console mode, you can select which 2TR IN (of console 1 or console 2) will be used for each of the six 2TR IN inputs. This selection can be made only from console 1. To switch the console whose 2TR IN jacks are being used, use the 2TR IN screen INPUT CONSOLE button. At this time, the Fs field will indicate the sampling frequency of the signal that is being input to the selected console. Only this button can be operated from console 2 If a routing change is executed from one console, a warning message will be displayed on the other console. All other SYSTEM CONNECTION screen settings (permission for PC connection, cascade connection enable/ disable, standard mode / mirror mode selection, etc.) can be performed only from console 1. 25 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual ■ DUAL CONSOLE screen In the DUAL CONSOLE screen of console 2, you cannot compare or copy data between consoles 1 and 2. (The buttons and list in the right of the screen will not appear.) Also, the buttons in the left of the screen for linking cue and dimmer operations will be displayed only, and cannot be operated. Powering-off the consoles In Dual Console mode, use the following procedure to shut down before you power-off the consoles. • This shutdown function is necessary only in Dual Console mode. If you are not operating in Dual Console mode, the SHUTDOWN button will not be displayed. • If you power-off the console without performing this procedure as described, the current memory used by the other console or the engine may be modified. However, settings other than current memory (i.e., scene memory, the various setup memories and libraries) will not be affected. Thus, if you have stored the current memory to a scene, you can re-recall that scene to recover from an accidental power-off that occurred without performing the shutdown. 1. On the screen of the console that you want to power-off, press the MENU button to access the menu screen. The SHUTDOWN button will appear in the lower left. 2. Press the SHUTDOWN button, and the shutdown popup window will appear. 26 3. Press the OK button. The following screen will appear, and the panel LEDs will go dark. It is now safe to turn off the power. If you press the CANCEL button you will return to the menu screen. Cascade connections Cascade connections PM1D system software V1.5 allows you to cascade-connect two systems. Any desired buses can be connected between cascade-connected systems. This allows you to increase the number of input channels to a maximum of two engines. About cascade connections Cascade connection is when the engines (DSP1D-EX {DSP1D}) of two PM1D systems are connected to each other to share buses. Unlike cascaded analog consoles, in which the signals are sent uni-directionally, cascade connection on the PM1D system allows bi-directional audio output and communication. When cascade connection is used, one system must be designated as the “master” and the other system as the “slave.” However, the cascade master and slave differ only in the priority in which they are initially connected, and in actuality are completely equivalent in status. Cascade connection involves virtually none of the restrictions that apply to Dual Console mode. There will be no problem even if scenes or library content differs. While there are no limitations on cascade-connecting a Single Console mode system with a Dual Console mode system, it is not possible to cascade-connect with either a Standard mode system or a Mirror mode system. In such cases you will have to set both PM1D systems to either Standard mode or Mirror mode. When using cascade connection, all consoles, engines, and PM1D Manager software must be using the identical system version. Before you make cascade connections, please check the version of each component. CASCADE screen In PM1D system software V1.5, a CASCADE screen has been added to the SYS/W.CLOCK function. In this screen you can make settings for cascade connections. 27 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 ENGINE SELECT If the master and slave systems are being used in Mirror mode, this selects whether switching between engines A/B will be linked. 7 CASCADE BUS ON/OFF These buttons select the buses/signals that will be cascaded between the master and slave systems. 8 2 SCENE RECALL Selects whether scene recall operations will be linked between the master and slave systems. If they are linked, the identically-numbered scene on the other system will be recalled. 3 CUE STACK/SOLO Selects whether cue operations and solo operations will be linked between master/slave consoles 1 and between master/slave consoles 2. 4 TALKBACK DIMMER ON/OFF Selects whether dimmer operation due to talkback will be linked between master/slave consoles 1 and between master/slave consoles 2. It is convenient to link the operation if the consoles are near each other and you want dimming to occur for both monitors when talkback is turned on. 5 DCA LEVEL/MUTE Selects whether the DCA group level and mute on/ off state will be linked between master and slave systems. The DCA group(s) selected by these buttons will be linked. If CUE STACK/SOLO is linked, and you cue a DCA that is selected for DCA LEVEL/MUTE, the same DCA will be cued on both systems. However, if an input channel and output channel are assigned to the same DCA number, they will not be linked. 6 MUTE MASTER Selects whether the mute group on/off state will be linked between master and slave systems. The mute group(s) selected by these buttons will be linked. 28 8 TALKBACK TO COMM IN CASCADE SETUP (Talkback → COMM IN cascade settings) These buttons select whether the talkback signal of the master system will be supplied as a COMM IN signal of the slave system. Settings for console 1 and 2 can be made independently for both master and slave. Cascade connections Cascade connections The following diagrams show cascade connections for Standard mode, Mirror mode, and Standard mode + Dual Console mode. • You must power-off all devices before you make connections. • Connections for input/output units and power supplies are not discussed here. For details, refer to “CS1D Operation Manual (Setup).” [Standard mode] Master system Slave system CONSOLE (CS1D) CONSOLE (CS1D) DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A 1 2 1 2 1 2 OUT CONSOLE I/O DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A CONTROL I/O ENGINE A IN 1 2 1 2 IN OUT 1 2 CONTROL CASCADE I/O IN CASCADE OUT ENGINE A (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) 1 2 1 2 CONTROL I/O ENGINE A 1 2 OUT CONSOLE I/O IN 1 2 1 2 IN OUT 1 2 CONTROL I/O ENGINE A (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) CASCADE OUT CASCADE IN 29 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual [Mirror mode] DIGITAL I/O ENGINE B 1 2 Master system Slave system CONSOLE (CS1D) CONSOLE (CS1D) DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A CONTROL I/O ENGINE B 1 2 OUT 1 2 IN 1 2 1 2 DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A CONTROL I/O ENGINE A 1 2 OUT IN 1 2 CONSOLE I/O 1 2 IN OUT 1 2 CONTROL CASCADE I/O IN CONSOLE I/O IN 1 2 1 2 1 2 OUT 1 2 IN IN 1 2 1 2 1 2 CONTROL I/O ENGINE B 1 2 OUT 1 2 IN OUT 1 2 CONTROL I/O ENGINE A (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) CASCADE OUT 2 2 CONSOLE I/O CASCADE OUT ENGINE A (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) 1 1 DIGITAL I/O ENGINE B CONTROL I/O ENGINE A CASCADE IN OUT 1 2 CONTROL CASCADE I/O IN CASCADE OUT ENGINE B (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) CONSOLE I/O IN 1 2 OUT 1 2 CONTROL I/O ENGINE B (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) CASCADE OUT CASCADE IN [Standard mode + Dual Console mode] IN 1 2 OUT 1 2 1 CONTROL I/O CONSOLE IN 1 2 DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE 2 OUT 1 2 CONTROL I/O CONSOLE CONSOLE 1 (CS1D) 1 2 DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A CONSOLE 2 (CS1D) IN 1 2 OUT 1 2 CONTROL I/O CONSOLE 2 1 2 CONSOLE I/O 1 2 OUT IN 1 2 CONSOLE 1 (CS1D) OUT 1 2 ENGINE A (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT CASCADE OUT CASCADE IN Hint • The dashed lines in the above diagram are spare connections for use in the event that the currentlyvalid connectors become unusable. • The system will operate normally even with just the connections shown by the solid lines. However, we recommend that you also make the spare connections shown above whenever possible. 30 2 OUT 1 2 CONTROL I/O CONSOLE 1 2 DIGITAL I/O ENGINE A CONSOLE 2 (CS1D) DIGITAL I/O CONTROL I/O ENGINE B ENGINE B 1 2 IN CONTROL I/O IN 1 2 DIGITAL I/O CONSOLE DIGITAL I/O CONTROL I/O ENGINE B ENGINE B 1 1 1 2 1 2 CONSOLE I/O 1 2 OUT IN 1 2 1 2 IN OUT 1 2 CONTROL I/O ENGINE A (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) CASCADE IN connectors must be connected to CASCADE OUT connectors, and vice versa. The system will not operate if two IN connectors or two OUT connectors are connected, or if only one is connected. Cascade connections Establishing a cascade connection Here’s how to designate one system as the “master” and the other system as the “slave,” and establish a cascade connection. • In order to use cascade connection, one system must be designated as the master and the other as the slave. If both are designated as the master (or slave), they will not operate correctly. • In cascade connection, both systems have equal status. You may specify either one as the master. 1. Power-on the devices in the order of input/output units, engines, and console power supplies. 4. In the CASCADE MODE SELECT section, click the CASCADE ON [MASTER] button, and then click the OK button. This system will be designated as the cascade connection master. At this time, the console number will begin blinking in the CONNECTION field at the top of the screen. This blink indicates that cascade-connection was specified, but the other system has not yet been found. Incorrect operation while making settings can cause a high-volume signal to be output. We strongly recommend that you turn down the volume of your power amps until connections are completed. 2. On one system, access the SYS/W.CLOCK function CASCADE screen (newly added in version 1.5). 5. On the other system, access the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION popup window in the same way. 6. In the CASCADE MODE SELECT section, click the CASCADE ON [SLAVE] button, and then click the OK button. This system will be designated as the cascade connection slave. Now both systems will attempt to establish a cascade connection. When the connection has been established, the console number that had been blinking in the CONNECTION field at the top of the screen will change from blinking to steadily lit. In order to use cascade connection, all consoles, engines, and PM1D Manager in both systems must have the identical software version. If the versions differ, the version check popup window will appear, and you will be unable to use cascade connection. When cascading Dual Console mode systems, you must perform the following operations on console 1 of each system. The settings of the CASCADE screen cannot be edited from console 2. 3. In the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION field, click the button. The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION popup window will appear. In the CASCADE MODE SELECT section of this window, you can turn cascade connection on/off and designate the master/slave systems. Hint As long as a cascade connection exists, the CASCADE screen settings of both systems will always be linked. If the settings of this screen differ when the systems are first connected, the settings of the master will be copied to the slave. 7. In the CASCADE screen, use the buttons of the CASCADE BUS ON/OFF section to select the buses/signals that will be cascade-connected. The following buses/signals can be selected. • MIX .............................MIX buses 1–48 • STEREO ......................STEREO buses A/B • CUE .............................CUE bus of console 1 or 2 • TALKBACK ................Talkback signal of console 1 or 2 • COMM IN...................COMM IN signal of console 1 or 2 31 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual For example if you select the MIX 1 button, the MIX bus 1 pre-fader signal will be sent from one engine to the other engine, and will be mixed with the MIX bus 1 pre-fader signal of the other engine. In the same way, the pre-fader signal of MIX bus 1 prefader signal of the other engine will be sent to the first engine, and mixed with the MIX bus 1 pre-fader signal. Master engine cascade connection Slave engine CASCADE BUS ON/OFF MIX BUS 1 OUT IN FADER, PATCH etc. DELAY OUTPUT FADER, PATCH etc. CASCADE BUS ON/OFF DELAY MIX BUS 1 IN Hint In order to compensate for phase differences of the input signal when the MIX bus, STEREO bus, and CUE bus are cascade-connected, the corresponding bus outputs will be delayed by two samples (for the MIX buses / STEREO buses) or three samples (for the CUE bus) more than the previous version. These signals will always be delayed even if cascade is turned off. When cascade-connecting the CUE bus, talkback, and COMM IN, you can make these selections independently for console 1 and 2. (Console 2 is valid only in Dual Console mode.) For example if the CONSOLE 1 button in the CUE area is turned on, the console 1 CUE bus signal will be cascade-connected between the two systems. If cascade-connection is enabled for the talkback signal, talkback on/off operations will also be linked between the two systems. 8. To cancel cascade connection, access the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION popup window, and click the CASCADE OFF button of the CASCADE MODE SELECT section. 32 OUT OUTPUT Cascade connections Cautions when using cascade connection This section explains points that you should keep in mind when using cascade connection. ■ Checking the CASCADE IN/OUT connectors If cascade connection is not established even after you have connected the CASCADE IN/OUT connectors between the two systems and designated one as the master and the other as the slave, access the SYSTEM CONNECTION screen. In this screen, the CASCADE IN/ OUT connector symbols will indicate the state of connections. ■ Linking engine A/B selection If PM1D systems in Mirror mode are cascade-connected, selection of engines A/B can normally be performed independently by each system. The other system will not be affected in any way, including its screen display. If the ENGINE SELECT LINK button is turned on in the CASCADE screen, switching the engine on one system will cause a confirmation popup window to appear only on that system. When you execute the switch, the other system will also be switched forcibly. If the engine is switched automatically, due to problems with the engine or some other reason, the engine of the other system will also be forcibly switched without a warning being issued. ■ Linking scene store/recall operations If the SCENE RECALL LINK button is turned on in the CASCADE screen, performing a scene memory store/ recall operation on one system will cause only that number and a store/recall command to be transmitted to the other console. CASCADE IN/OUT connector Each symbol has the following meaning. • x...................................There is a problem with the physical connection. Check that the cable is not broken, and that it is not connected between two CASCADE IN connectors or two CASCADE OUT connectors. • OK (gray)....................The physical connection exists, but communication has not been established between the two systems. Check that you have not designated both systems as the master or both as the slave, and make sure that the system version is the same for all units. • OK (green)..................Communication has been established between the two systems. Make sure that the buses and signals that you want to cascade-connect are selected. If the scene number specified as the recall source is empty on the other system, the recall command will be ignored. ■ Linking cue operations By using the CONSOLE 1 / CONSOLE 2 buttons in the CUE section of the CASCADE screen, you can cascadeconnect the CUE buses between the console 1 units or between the console 2 units of the two systems. In this case, cue operations of the two systems will not be linked, so when cue is turned on by the other console, the cue signal of the other console cannot be monitored from MONITOR OUT jacks A unless you manually turn cue on for your own console as well. Thus, you can use the CUE STACK/SOLO section of the CASCADE screen to link cue operations and solo operations between consoles 1 or consoles 2 of the master and slave systems. When the LINK button is on, the following items will be linked between the corresponding consoles. • Cue mode CUE/SOLO switches and LAST CUE/MIX CUE switching will be linked. • Cue interrupt When cue/solo is turned on by either system, the monitoring source for MONITOR OUT jacks A on both systems will switch to the CUE bus. (This lets you monitor the cue/solo signal.) • PFL/AFL and PRE PAN/POST PAN switching of input channels • PFL/POST ON switching of output channels 33 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual • DCA PRE PAN on/off switching • Cue stack The cue status will be monitored across both systems, and the last-selected of the four CUE groups (INPUT CUE, DCA CUE, OUTPUT CUE, other) will be enabled for both systems. For example when output channel cue is enabled, pressing the DCA group [CUE] switch on either system will enable the DCA group on both systems. Hint • Cue interrupt is linked only if CUE INTERRUPTION is turned on in the CUE/SOLO screen of both systems. • For a detailed explanation of CUE group operation, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Hardware),” p.81. ■ Linking talkback By using the CONSOLE 1 / CONSOLE 2 buttons in the TALKBACK section of the CASCADE screen, you can cascade-connect the talkback signals between the console 1 units or between the console 2 units of the two systems. In this case, talkback on/off operations will also be linked between the two systems. If you turn on talkback for one system, the talkback signal will be sent to the bus or connector selected on that system, and the same signal will also be sent to the bus or connector that is selected on the other system. If you also want to link the dimmer operation that occurs when you turn on talkback, use the CONSOLE 1 / CONSOLE 2 buttons in the TALKBACK DIMMER ON/OFF section of the CASCADE screen. While the DCA LEVEL/MUTE button is on, the fade time setting of that DCA group will be ignored, and you will be unable to use auto fading and manual fading. If the DCA LEVEL/MUTE button is turned on while LINK CUE STACK/SOLO is on, DCA cue will also be linked between the two systems. However, if the DCA assignment location (input channel or output channel) differs between the two systems, cue will not be linked. If, while cue is being used, the DCA assignment location of one system changes due to either scene recall or manual operation, cue will be defeated for the DCA that changed. ■ Linking mute groups You can use the MUTE MASTER buttons (1–12) in the CASCADE screen to link mute on/off operations of the desired mute group. When you turn on the button for the mute group that you want to link, mute on/off operations for the corresponding mute group performed on one system will be reflected in the other system. ■ Sending the master talkback signal to the slave COMM IN The talkback signal of the master system can be supplied to console 1/2 of the slave system as a COMM IN signal. For example, this is convenient when you want to unidirectionally send the talkback signal from the master system to the slave system rather than cascading the talkback signal. To do so, you will use the TALKBACK COMM IN CASCADE SETUP section of the CASCADE screen. ■ Linking DCA groups You can use the DCA LEVEL/ MUTE buttons (1–12) in the CASCADE screen to link the level and mute on/off state of the desired DCA group. When you turn on the button for the DCA group that you want to link, the level and mute status of that DCA group will be copied from the master to the slave. (At this time it does not matter whether the channels belonging to the DCA groups match.) Subsequently, changes made by one system to the level or mute on/off status of the corresponding DCA group will be reflected in the other system. If a scene recall on one system causes the DCA level or mute status to no longer match, the level and mute status settings of the system that recalled the scene will be copied to the other system. 34 Assignments can be made independently for console 1 and 2 of the master system and console 1 and 2 of the slave system. Talkback signals will be sent between the assigned consoles to the COMM IN of the other unit. Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) PM1D system software V1.5 allows you to use GPI (General Purpose Interface). The PM1D system engine (DSP1D-EX{DSP1D}) and console (CS1D) have a D-sub 25-pin GPI (General Purpose Interface) connector. This GPI connector combines both GPI IN and GPI OUT, and allows eight channels of control signal to be input and output simultaneously for communication with an external device. For the pin configuration, refer to page 69 of the CS1D Reference manual (Appendices). The GPI OUT connector is an open collector output. Also GPI IN is pulled-up at 5 V. The power supply pins must be used at less than MAX 160 mA, and the GPI IN/OUT pins at less than MAX 40 mA. The following diagram is an example of using GPI to create external switches and indicators for them. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 OUT 1 9 OUT 2 1 9 IN 1 L 0 OUT 5 9 3 6 K B You are free to specify how the PM1D system will operate when control signals are received from GPI IN, and which operations on the PM1D system will cause control signals to be transmitted from GPI OUT. By connecting a GPI-compatible external device or a customized external switch etc. to the GPI connector, you can cause an external device to start running when a fader is operated, or use an external device to remotely control talkback operations or select monitor sources. 2 M 9 F 7 K A O 8 OUT 8 4 K IN 7 I E IN 4 OUT 7 IN 6 H OUT 4 IN 3 OUT 6 IN 5 N D IN 2 5 K OUT 3 G IN 8 J C J • When using the PM1D system in Mirror mode, only the currently selected engine can use its GPI IN connector. Also, the output from the GPI OUT connector is always linked for engines A and B. • When using the PM1D system in Dual Console mode (→p.11), only the currently-operated console can use its GPI connector. You cannot change the settings of the other GPI connector, or receive control signals from the other GPI connector. Also, settings for the GPI connector of the engine can be made only on console 1. 35 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual GPI screen A GPI screen allowing you to make GPI IN/OUT settings has been added to the MIDI/GPI/TC function. ■ GPI IN 1 2 3 4 5 1 INPUT PORT Selects the GPI IN port for which you will make settings. You can select console ports 1–8 or engine ports 1–8. 2 GPI IN status Indicates the input signal status for the corresponding port. The characters L/H indicate whether the signal level is low (switch is grounded) or high (highlevel signal is input). The background color will be 36 6 yellow when active, or gray when inactive. The TRIGGER (3) field selects whether signal high or low will be the active state. Currently active GPI IN port Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) 3 TRIGGER Selects the GPI IN on/off detection method. You can choose either Low Active (active when switch is grounded) or High Active (active when high-level signal is input, or when open). TRIGGER= GPI connector input signal Execute a function Execute a function TRIGGER= GPI connector input signal Execute a function Execute a function 4 ASSIGN button Clicking this button displays the GPI IN SETUP popup window, where you can assign a function to each GPI IN port. 5 FUNCTION Indicates the name of the function assigned in (4). 6 PARAMETER Indicates any optional parameters for the function assigned in (4). You can select the following functions and their parameters for GPI IN. (Parameters specific to each function are enclosed in parentheses.) • NO ASSIGN No assignment • SCENE MEM INC/DEC RECALL (RECALL TYPE: INC/DEC) Recall the scene that follows (or precedes) the currently selected scene. • MONITOR SOURCE SELECT (2TR IN 3-6, DIRECT, MIX 1-48, MATRIX 1-24, A/B SELECT) Select the source to be monitored. Use A/B SELECT to select MONITOR A or B, and use the remaining buttons to preset up to four monitor sources. • PAGE SELECT (SELECT TYPE: LAST, PREVIOUS, NEXT) Show the desired screen in the display. As parameters, you can choose LAST (the last-selected screen), PREVIOUS (the preceding screen within the same function), or NEXT (the next screen within the same function). • BOOKMARK Recalls the last-registered screen. To register a screen, recall the desired screen and press and hold the corresponding external switch for two seconds or longer. If the lower part of the screen displays the console/engine GPI IN test button (→p.10), the corresponding switch will show the text “BOOKMARK” and the title of the registered screen. • MANUAL FADE ON (TRIGGER TYPE: AUTO/ MANUAL, MANUAL ONLY) Switch manual fading. If AUTO/MANUAL is selected as the parameter, the system will switch between auto fading and manual fading each time a trigger is received. If MANUAL ONLY is selected, manual fading will be enabled if the trigger is received even once. In either case, enabling manual fading will recall the FADE TIME screen, and the cursor will move to the PROGRESS knob. In this state, you can turn the [DATA] encoder to immediately control manual fading. • MUTE MASTER/DIRECT RECALL (TRIGGER TYPE: LATCH, UNLATCH) Select whether the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[12] switches on the console front panel will directly recall the twelve pre-assigned scenes, or whether they will act as on/off switches for mute groups 1–12. (This is the same function as the DIRECT RECALL screen MODE button.) As the switch operation, you can choose either Latch (change each time the switch is pressed) or Unlatch (direct recall is enabled only while the switch remains pressed). • NAME MODE CH/UNIT (TRIGGER TYPE: LATCH, UNLATCH) Select whether the display will show the short name of the input channel or the unit name assigned to that input channel. This is the same function as the NAME MODE button (→p.8) shown in the lower part of the screen. As the switch operation, you can choose either Latch (change each time the switch is pressed) or Unlatch (unit name is shown only while the switch remains pressed). • RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP (FLIP TYPE: MODULE FLIP, FADER FLIP) Perform the Flip operation for INPUT blocks 3/4 located in the right side of the console. If MODULE FLIP is selected, INPUT blocks 3 and 4 will be exchanged. If FADER FLIP is selected, the faders and [MIX] encoders will be exchanged. If you want to independently perform module flip for the left and right INPUT blocks, go to the PANEL ASSIGN screen (a new screen added in V1.5) and turn off the MODULE FLIP / PATTERN CHANGE LINK button. If you want to independently perform fader flip for the left and right INPUT blocks, you must turn off the FADER FLIP LINK button in the same screen. • TRACKING RECALL (KEY ASSIGN: ENABLE, OFFSET LOCK) Operate the Tracking Recall function. If ENABLE is selected, tracking recall will be switched between enabled/disabled. If OFFSET LOCK is selected, the offset value will be locked/unlocked. • MMC TRANSPORT (MIDI PORT, MMC ID, TRANSPORT) Transmit an MMC transport command to the specified MIDI port. As parameters, you can specify the destination MIDI port (console or engine), the 37 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual MMC ID (1–127, ALL), and the type of transport command (<<REW, FF>>, STOP, PLAY>). Since this is open-loop, the status of the other device is not monitored. • MMC LOCATE (MIDI PORT, MMC ID, FRAME, TIME CODE) To the specified MIDI port, transmit an MMC locate command for moving to the desired time code location. As parameters, you can specify the destination MIDI port (console or engine), the MMC ID (1–127, ALL), the frame rate (24, 25, 29.97, 30), and the time code (hours/minutes/seconds/frames). • REMOTE [RS422] TRANSPORT (RS422 PORT, FORMAT, TRANSPORT) Send a transport command to the specified RS422 connector. As parameters, you can specify the destination RS422 port (console or engine), the command format (P2 or DENON), and the type of transport command. (In P2 format1, the transport commands are <<REW, FF>>, STOP, PLAY>. In DENON format2, the transport commands are <<PREV, NEXT>>, STANDBY, PLAY>.) Only one REMOTE [RS422] command format can be specified for each component. • REMOTE [RS422] LOCATE (RS422 PORT, FORMAT, TIME CODE) Send a locate command to the specified RS422 connector. As parameters, you can specify the destination RS422 port (console or engine), the command format (P2 or DENON), and the time code (hours/ minutes/seconds/frames). For DENON format, this will operate as follows. • You can also specify the TRACK number. • TRACK 0 is valid only for CD. • Frame can be up to 74, but will be changed to up to 86 frames by the MD device. Only one REMOTE [RS422] command format can be specified for each component. • GPI TRANSPORT (GPI PORT, PORT, TRANSPORT) Send a control signal to the specified port of GPI OUT. As parameters, you can specify the output destination GPI port (console or engine), the GPI OUT port number (1–8), and the name (<<REW, FF>>, STOP, PLAY) that will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. The TRANSPORT parameter you specify here is used to select the function name (→p.10) when the GPI IN test button for the console/engine is displayed in the lower part of the screen. Please be aware that regardless of the name that is selected, the control signal that is actually output will not change at all. • GPI OUT CONTROL (GPI PORT, PORT) To the specified GPI OUT port, send a control signal that is identical to the GPI IN on/off state. As parameters, you can specify the destination GPI port (console or engine), and the GPI OUT port number (1– 8). • TAP TEMPO You can manually set the TEMPO parameter of an internal effect by repeatedly pressing an external switch connected to GPI IN at the desired tempo (→p.51). • TB ON (TRIGGER TYPE: LATCH, UNLATCH) Talkback can be switched on/off by operating an external switch connected to GPI IN. As the operating mode of the switch, you can choose either Latch (change each time the switch is pressed) or Unlatch (talkback is on only while the switch remains pressed). • USER DEFINE LED [TALLY IN] (LED No.) GPI IN on/off can be used to switch the console’s USER DEFINE switch LEDs between lit/dark. The LED No. parameter selects the switch number (1–8). When the list of USER DEFINE functions is displayed at the bottom of the screen, the buttons in the screen will also switch between lit/dark in tandem with this. Hint The console’s USER DEFINE LEDs can be used as indicators. For example if the external device has a TALLY output function that can indicate the state of the device itself, you can assign GPI TRANSPORT or MMC TRANSPORT to USER DEFINE, so that the USER DEFINE LED will light or go dark according to the state. • INPUT/DCA ON (ASSIGN TYPE, CH No.) Switch a specified input channel or a specified DCA on/off. Use the ASSIGN TYPE parameter to select either INPUT or DCA, and the CH No. parameter to specify the channel. • ENGINE B SELECT When using the PM1D system in Mirror mode, switch to engine B if possible. Hint By connecting a signal line from an uninterruptible power supply etc. to GPI IN, you can construct a system that automatically switches to engine B when a power failure occurs. 1. P2 format is a command format used by the Yamaha D24, Tascam DA-98HR, and various professional video equipment. 2. DENON format is a command format used by Denon professional CD (DN-C680) and MD (DN-M1050R) devices. Set the CD or MD to 9600 bps / RS422. In the case of DENON, pressing PLAY while already playing will select PAUSE mode, and pressing STANDBY while already standing-by will select STOP mode. If you want to change from STOP to STANDBY, press NEXT. Use a D-sub 9-pin straight cable to connect the REMOTE RS422 connector to the device being controlled in P2 or DENON format. 38 Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) ■ GPI OUT 1 2 3 4 56 7 1 OUTPUT PORT Selects the GPI OUT port for which you will make settings. You can select control ports 1–8 or engine ports 1–8. 2 GPI OUT status Indicates the output signal status of the corresponding port. The character L or H indicates whether the signal level is low (switch is grounded) or high (open). The background color will be yellow when active, and gray when inactive. Use the POLARITY (4) field to specify whether a low level or a high level signal will be output for the Active state. 3 TALLY/TRIGGER/TOGGLE Indicates the transmission method for the signal that is output from GPI OUT. If the function of the port has been set by the DIRECT ASSIGN button (6), this will indicate TALLY, and it will not be possible to switch it on/off. In this case, the active/inactive state of the item selected by ASSIGNED TRIGGER (7) will be detected, and the tally signal will be sent to the corresponding GPI OUT port only while active. The following diagram show an example of transmitting a tally signal from the GPI OUT port in correspondence to on/off operations of a specified [CUE] switch. POLARITY= CUE CUE CUE CUE CUE CUE GPI connector output signal POLARITY= CUE CUE 8 If GPI TRANSPORT or GPI OUT CONTROL is selected as the function assigned to USER DEFINE or GPI IN, or if GPI is selected as the fader start output destination, a button to switch between TRIGGER and TOGGLE will be displayed here. (For details on operation →p.49 to 50). If you want to control GPI OUT from USER DEFINE, make settings in the UTILITY function USER DEFINE screen. If you want to control it from GPI IN, make settings in the GPI IN display field (→p.36). If you want to control it by fader start, make sure that in the MIDI/GPI/TC function FADER START screen (→p.43). 4 POLARITY Selects the polarity of the signal that is output from the corresponding port. You can select Low (grounded when active) or High (open when active). 5 TEST These buttons let you test the GPI OUT ports. Each time you click one of these buttons, a control signal will be output to GPI OUT according to the TALLY/ TRIGGER/TOGGLE (3) and POLARITY (4) settings, just as though a trigger had occurred. 6 DIRECT ASSIGN button Clicking this button will open the GPI OUT SETUP popup window, where you can directly specify the type of trigger that will control the signal output for each GPI port. In the GPI OUT SETUP popup window you can select the following items. • NO ASSIGN No assignment. • GPI IN FUNCTION A control signal will be output according to the state of the function that is assigned to the identical port and port number of GPI IN. If you select this trigger, the PARAMETER (8) field will indicate the type of GPI IN port (CONSOLE or ENGINE) and the port number (1–8). If an external switch is connected to GPI IN, GPI OUT can be used as an indicator for that switch. GPI connector output signal 39 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual • PREVIEW ON/OFF Transmit a control signal when PREVIEW mode is turned on in the SCENE MEMORY block of the console. • CUE ON/OFF Transmit a control signal when the DCA [CUE] switch of a specified input channel or output channel, the EFFECT CUE of a specified internal effect, or the KEY IN CUE or SUB IN CUE of a specified gate turns on. • CUE ON/OFF [INPUT ONLY] Transmit a control signal when the [CUE] switch of a specified input channel turns on. • CUE ON/OFF [DCA ONLY] Transmit a control signal when the [CUE] switch of a specified DCA turns on. • CUE ON/OFF [OUTPUT ONLY] Transmit a control signal when the [CUE] switch of a specified output channel turns on. 7 ASSIGNED TRIGGER Indicates the type of trigger that is assigned in 6. 8 PARAMETER Displays more detailed information according to the type of trigger assigned in 6. Hint There are four ways to specify a trigger for GPI OUT, as follows. • In the USER DEFINE screen (UTILITY function), specify GPI TRANSPORT and GPI OUT CONTROL • Specify GPI TRANSPORT and GPI OUT CONTROL as the GPI IN function • In the FADER START screen (MIDI/GPI/TC function), specify GPI as the output destination • Use the DIRECT ASSIGN button (6) to directly specify the trigger. It is not possible to simultaneously specify different types of trigger for the same GPI OUT port. If you attempt to make conflicting settings, the lower part of the screen will indicate “GPI OUT SETUP IN USE WAS STOLEN.” and the previous setting will be lost. Conversely, you may simultaneously specify more than one trigger of the same type, for example by assigning a GPI OUT CONTROL function from more than one GPI IN to the same GPI OUT. In this case, fields 7 and 8 will show “...” to indicate that more than one trigger is assigned. However, even if more than one trigger is assigned, only the most recent trigger will be responded to. Using GPI IN Here’s how to send a control signal from an external device to GPI IN and remotely control the operation of the PM1D system. 1. Connect a GPI compatible external device or external switch to the GPI connector of the engine or console. • If you are using the PM1D system in Mirror mode, only the GPI IN connector of the currently selected engine can be used. 5. At the left of the FUNCTION field, click the DIRECT ASSIGN button to access the GPI IN SETUP popup window. In the GPI IN SETUP popup window, the INPUT PORT field at the upper left shows the type (CONSOLE/ENGINE) of the currently selected port, and the port number (GPI1–GPI8). • If you are using the PM1D system in Dual Con- sole mode (→p.11), only the GPI connector of the currently-operated console can be used. It is not possible to change the GPI connector settings of the other unit, or to receive control signals from the GPI connector of the other unit. Furthermore, settings for the GPI connector of the engine can be made only from console 1. 2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen. 3. Scroll the GPI IN list to show the INPUT port that you want to set. 4. According to the character of the signal that is sent from the external device / external switch, set the TRIGGER field to Low Active (active when switch is grounded) or High Active (active when a high-level signal is input, or when open). 40 6. Scroll the list in the left part of the screen, and click the function that you want to assign. The PARAMETER field will show the parameters that are specific for that function. Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) 7. As necessary, use the PARAMETER field located at the right to specify the parameters, and click the OK button. The popup window will close. 8. In the same way, make other GPI IN settings as desired. Hint By displaying GPI IN CONSOLE / GPI IN ENGINE in the lower part of the screen, you can check the function that is assigned to each port (→p.10). 9. Operate the external device / external switch to send a control signal to the PM1D system. The function that is assigned to that GPI IN port will be executed on the PM1D system. Hint Of the functions that can be assigned to GPI IN, Tap Tempo is explained in detail on page 51, so you may refer to that section as well. Using GPI OUT Here’s how you can remotely control an external device by sending control signals from GPI OUT when a specific operation is performed on the PM1D system. 1. Connect your GPI compatible external device to the GPI connector of the engine or console. • If you are using the PM1D system in Mirror mode, GPI OUT output always operates in tandem for engines A and B. • If you are using the PM1D system in Dual Con- sole mode (→p.11), only the GPI connector of the currently-operated console can be used. It is not possible to modify the settings for the GPI connector of the other unit, or to receive control signals from the GPI connector of the other unit. Furthermore, settings for the GPI connector of the engine can be made only from console 1. 2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen. 3. Scroll the GPI OUT list to display the OUTPUT port that you want to set. 4. According to the character of the signal that your external device is able to receive, set the POLARITY field to either Low (grounded when active) or High (open when active). 5. At the left of the ASSIGNED TRIGGER field, click the DIRECT ASSIGN button to open the GPI OUT SETUP popup window. 6. Scroll the list shown at the left side, click the trigger that you want to assign, and click the OK button. The popup window will close. 7. In the same way, make other GPI OUT settings as desired. Hint You can use the TEST button in the GPI screen to test-transmit control signals from each GPI OUT according to the POLARITY and TRIGGER/TOGGLE/TALLY settings. This is a convenient way to verify that the external device will operate as you expect. 8. Execute the operation that is assigned to GPI OUT. A control signal will be transmitted from the corresponding GPI OUT port. Hint If you want to use GPI OUT as a USER DEFINE destination, make settings in the USER DEFINE screen (→p.52). If you want to use GPI OUT as a destination from GPI IN, make settings in GPI IN (→p.36). Details on using this as a destination of Fader Start are given on page 42. 41 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Fader Start function PM1D system software V1.5 provides a Fader Start function that can transmit control signals (GPI / MMC / RS422) to an external device when a specific fader is operated. For example, this is a convenient way by which an external device (such as a GPI-compatible CD player, RS422-compatible video player, or MIDI sequencer) located at a distance can be operated remotely. To use this function, you need to assign the Fader Start function to the desired fader, and select the type of control signal (GPI / MMC / RS422) that you want to transmit. A “Fader Start” trigger will occur when this fader is moved from below –60 dB to above –60 dB, and a “Fader End” trigger will occur when the fader is moved back to –∞. When these triggers occur, the control signal you selected will be sent to the external device. 10 10 10 5 5 5 0 0 0 5 5 5 10 10 10 20 20 20 30 30 30 40 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60 10 10 10 5 5 5 0 0 0 5 5 5 10 10 10 20 20 20 30 30 30 40 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60 Fader end • If you want to generate a Fader Start trigger when the fader position is already above –60 dB, move the fader below –60 dB and then raise it once again. • If CONSOLE 1 or ENGINE is selected as the out- Fader start put destination port, fader start will not work when you operate the fader (or edit the parameter via PC or MIDI) while console 1 is in PREVIEW mode. Similarly, if CONSOLE 2 is selected as the output destination port, fader start will not work while console 2 is in PREVIEW mode. Fader start will not work even if you cancel PREVIEW mode from the above states. • If a PC (PM1D Manager) is connected on-line to the engine by itself, recalling a scene which specifies a fade time will cause Fader Start to operate immediately after the recall, regardless of the fade time setting. 42 Fader Start function FADER START screen A FADER START screen has been added to the MIDI/GPI/TC function, allowing you to make settings for the fader start function. 1 1 ASSIGN MODE Selects whether fader start assignments will be made for individual input channels or in groups of units. You can select one of the following buttons. Click one of these buttons to open the FADER START INITIALIZE popup window, where you can initialize the fader start settings. To initialize, click the OK button. • INPUT CH When this button is on, you can make fader start function assignments for individual input channels and ST IN channels. • UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10 When one of these buttons are on, you can make fader start assignments for three input units of consecutive ID numbers. In this case, you can make assignments for the input channels assigned to each port of those units. (If multiple input channels are assigned to one port, the assignment will be valid only for the highest of those channels in the IN PATCH function INPUT PATCH screen.) • In either case, please be aware that you cannot assign fader start to all channels and all ports. • If the INPUT CH button is on, you can assign fader start to odd-numbered input channels (in vertical pair mode, channels 1–48) and the left channel of stereo input channels. • If a UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10 button is on, you can assign fader start only to an odd-numbered port of the available ports. 43 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual 2 3 4 2 INPUT CH/UNIT (Input channel / unit) According to the selection for ASSIGN MODE (1), this will indicate the channel or unit/card/port for which you will make fader start assignments. If the INPUT CH button is on, odd-numbered input channels (in vertical pair mode, channels 1–48) will be displayed. If a UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10 button is on, only the odd-numbered available ports will be displayed. 3 OUTPUT TYPE Indicates the type of signal that will be output when you operate the fader of the corresponding input channel / unit. To change this assignment, click the button at left to open the FADER START SETUP popup window. You can select the following items (parameters specific to that item are enclosed in parentheses). • NO ASSIGN No assignment. • GPI (GPI PORT, START PORT, END PORT) A control signal will be sent to the GPI connector. You can specify the GPI port (console 1/2, engine), start port (the port number that will output the signal when a fader start trigger is received), and end port (the port number that will output the signal when a fader end trigger is received). Hint If you specify the same GPI port as the start port and end port, and select TOGGLE in the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen, fader start will cause GPI OUT to be in the Active state and fader end will cause it to be Inactive, allowing you to use fader start as Tally output. • MMC (MIDI PORT, MMC ID) An MMC command will be sent to the MIDI connector. You can specify the MIDI port (console 1/2, engine) and the MMC ID (1–127, ALL). A PLAY command will be sent when a fader start trigger occurs, and a STOP command will be sent when a fader end trigger occurs. 44 5 6 • RS422 (RS422 PORT, FORMAT) An RS422 protocol transport command will be sent to the RS422 connector. You can specify the RS422 port (console 1/2, engine) and the format (P2, DENON). A PLAY command will be sent when a fader start trigger occurs, and a STOP command (if P2 format is selected) or PAUSE command (if DENON format is selected) will be sent when a fader end trigger occurs. Only one type (P2 or DENON) can be selected as the REMOTE [RS422] command format for each component. 4 OUTPUT PORT Indicates the port that will output the signal (console 1/2 or engine). 5 PARAMETER According to the type of signal that is selected in (3), this area displays the optional parameter settings. 6 INITIALIZE Click this button to open the FADER INITIALIZE popup window, where you can initialize the fader start settings. To initialize the settings, click the OK button. Fader Start function Using the Fader Start function Here’s how you can use the Fader Start function to remotely control an external device connected to the MIDI OUT connector / RS422 connector / GPI connector. 1. Connect your external device to the MIDI IN connector / RS422 connector / GPI connector of the engine or console. • If the PM1D system is being used in Mirror mode, and the GPI connector is selected as the output destination for fader start, the output will always be linked for engine A and B. If the MIDI connector or RS422 connector is selected as the output destination, the command will be output only to the currently-enabled engine. • If you select UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10 The INPUT CH/UNIT area will display only the odd-numbered ports of the usable units/cards/ports. In this case, the name display area will always show the unit name. • If the PM1D system is being used in Dual Con- sole mode (→p.11), it will make no difference to the Fader Start function whether you operate the fader of one or the other console. Also, fader start settings may be made from either console, and the MIDI connector / RS422 connector / GPI connector of either console may be specified as the output destination. It will also make no difference to the Fader Start function whether you operate the fader from the PC (PM1D Manager). However if you connect a PC to a system that includes a console, it will not be possible to make fader start settings from the PC. In this case, you must make these settings from the console. 2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function FADER START screen. 3. Use the buttons of the ASSIGN MODE area to select how you will make fader start assignments. Hint If you select UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10 as the ASSIGN MODE, you will be able to make fader start assignments that depend on patch settings. For example if multiple audio sources are being input separately to the ports of multiple units, you can create patch library or scene settings that successively connect different audio sources to the same fader, so that the same fader can be used for fader start operation even after recall. When you click the ASSIGN MODE button, the FADER START INITIALIZE popup window will appear, asking you whether it is OK to initialize the fader start settings. • If you select the INPUT CH button The INPUT CH/UNIT area will display the oddnumbered input channels (in vertical pair mode, channels 1–48) and the L channels of ST IN. The name display field will show the short name of the channel or the unit name, according to the NAME MODE you selected at the bottom of the screen. Hint • If the INPUT CH button is on, only every other fader will be usable for the Fader Start function. If the corresponding input channel is paired, you can use the other fader to control the Fader Start function. • If you want to assign the Fader Start function to the faders of consecutively-numbered input channels, turn on one of the UNIT 1-3 – UNIT 8-10 buttons, and assign consecutive input channels to each port, or else use Vertical Pair mode. 4. If it is OK to initialize the fader start settings, click the OK button to close the popup window. When you click the OK button, all existing settings will be lost. 45 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual 5. Scroll the list to display the channel/unit that you want to assign, and click the button in the OUTPUT TYPE field. The FADER START SETUP popup window will appear, allowing you to select the type of signal that will be sent. 6. In the FUNCTION field, select the type of signal that you want to send: GPI, MMC, or RS422. 7. As necessary, specify parameters in the PARAMETER area at the right. • If you selected GPI Use the GPI PORT buttons to select the GPI port (console 1/2, engine) to which the command will be sent. Set START PORT to specify the port number (1–8) that will output the signal when a fader start trigger is received. Set END PORT to specify the port number (1–8) that will output the signal when a fader end trigger is received. • If you selected MMC Use the MIDI PORT buttons to select the MIDI port (console 1/2, engine) to which the command will be sent. Set the MMC ID knob value to match the ID (1–127, ALL) of the external MIDI device that will receive the command. Only one type (P2 or DENON) can be selected as the REMOTE [RS422] command format for each component. • If you selected RS422 Use the RS422 PORT buttons to select the RS422 port (console 1/2, engine) to which the command will be sent. Use the FORMAT knob to select the format (P2 or DENON) of the RS422 protocol. In order to enable GPI, you must go to the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen, and make GPI output settings (POLARITY, TRIGGER/ TOGGLE) 8. When you have finished making parameter settings, click [OK]. You will return to the FADER START screen. If another function had already been assigned to the GPI port you choose as the destination, a message of “GPI OUT SETUP IN USE WAS STOLEN” will appear at the bottom of the screen when you click the OK button, and the settings for that port will be defeated. You can check the assigned function in the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen. 9. Use the same procedure to make settings for other channels/units. The following steps will differ slightly depending on whether you are using MMC/RS422 or GPI. 46 Fader Start function ■ When using MMC/RS422 10. Operate the corresponding fader. If you selected MMC as the control signal, the MMC PLAY command and STOP command will be transmitted from the specified MIDI OUT connector when you raise and lower the fader. For details on P2 and DENON, refer to the explanation for GPI RS422 (→p.38). If you selected RS422 as the control signal, the RS422 protocol PLAY command and STOP command (if P2 format is selected) or the PLAY command and PAUSE command (if DENON format is selected) will be transmitted from the specified RS422 connector when you raise and lower the fader. 10 10 10 5 5 5 10 10 10 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 10 10 10 5 5 5 20 20 20 10 10 10 30 30 30 20 20 20 40 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60 30 30 30 40 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60 RS-422 MIDI OUT RS422 protocol PLAY command MMC PLAY command 10 10 10 5 5 5 0 0 0 5 5 5 10 10 10 20 20 20 30 30 30 40 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60 10 10 10 5 5 5 0 0 0 5 5 5 10 10 10 20 20 20 30 30 30 40 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 60 RS-422 MIDI OUT RS422 protocol STOP/PAUSE command MMC STOP command 47 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual ■ When using GPI 11. Access the GPI screen. For the GPI OUT port to which you assigned fader start, the ASSIGNED TRIGGER field will indicate FADER START. If you specified different GPI OUT ports as the start port and end port, the display will appear as follows. If you specified the same GPI OUT port as the start port and end port, the display will appear as follows. The settings of a GPI OUT port to which you assigned the fader start function cannot be edited in the GPI screen. If you want to edit these settings, you must return to the FADER START screen. However if you select a different item in the ASSIGN TRIGGER field of the GPI screen, the bottom of the screen will indicate “GPI OUT SETUP IN USE WAS STOLEN,” and the FADER START screen settings for that port will be defeated. 12. Use the button in the OUTPUT PORT field to select either TOGGLE or TRIGGER as the transmission method for the signal that is output from GPI OUT. 13. Use the buttons in the POLARITY field to select the polarity of the signal that is output from GPI OUT. 14. Operate the appropriate fader. When GPI is selected as the control signal, the operation will depend on the settings of the GPI screen OUTPUT PORT field and POLARITY field, and on the parameter settings in the FADER START screen. 48 Fader Start function The following diagram is an example of how trigger signals (low active) are transmitted from GPI OUT ports 1 and 2 to an external device when fader start and fader end occur. 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 Output signal of GPI OUT 1 Output signal of GPI OUT 2 300m sec 300m sec To produce this type of operation, first go to the FADER START screen, select GPI as the control signal for the corresponding faders, and specify START PORT = 1 and END PORT = 2. Next, move to the GPI screen, and for GPI OUT ports 1/2, set the OUTPUT PORT button to POLARITY button to (low active). and the The interval of the trigger signal is fixed at 300m sec. 49 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual The following diagram is an example of how the low level signal and high level signal are switched for GPI OUT port 1 when a fader start occurs and when a fader end occurs. 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 Output signal of GPI OUT 1 To produce this type of operation, first go to the FADER START screen, select GPI as the control signal for the corresponding fader, and specify START PORT = 1 and END PORT = 1. Next, move to the GPI screen, and for that GPI OUT port, set the OUTPUT PORT button to POLARITY button to (low active). 50 and the Tap Tempo function Tap Tempo function PM1D system software V1.5 provides a “Tap Tempo function” which lets you manually set the TEMPO parameter of an internal effect by tapping an external switch connected to the GPI connector. Here’s how to use this function. 1. Connect an external switch to the GPI connector of the engine or console. 2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function GPI screen. 3. Scroll the GPI IN list until you see the INPUT port to which is connected the switch you will use for tapping. 9. From the effect library, recall an effect of a type that contains a TEMPO parameter (e.g., Delay LCR, Echo, Chorus). TEMPO is a parameter that lets you specify a timerelated effect parameter (such as DELAY in Delay LCR or Echo, or FREQ. in Chorus) in terms of BPM units. 4. According to the character of the signal that is sent from the external switch, set the TRIGGER field to either low active (On when the switch is grounded) or high active (On when a high-level signal is input, or when open). 5. Click at the left of the FUNCTION field to open the GPI IN SETUP popup window. 6. Scroll the list at the left, and select TAP TEMPO as the function. TAP TEMPO has no parameters to set. 10. At intervals of the desired tempo, press the external switch that you assigned to the Tap Tempo function. When you have pressed the switch four times, the average value (BPM) of the three intervals will be calculated, and that value will be input to the TEMPO parameter. Average value of the intervals will be input to the parameter First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap • The Tap Tempo function is valid only for the cur- 7. Click the OK button to close the popup window. With these settings, you have completed the preparations for using an external switch with the Tap Tempo function. 8. Access the desired screen EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8. rently-displayed internal effect. However, it does nothing if the effect type does not include a TEMPO parameter. • If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it will be ignored. • Due to functional limitations, you cannot use the Tap Tempo function by clicking the GPI IN test button located at the bottom of the screen. 51 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Added functions in the USER DEFINE screen The following functions can now be selected in the UTILITY function USER DEFINE screen. • • • • • • • • • • • MANUAL FADE ON MUTE MASTER/DIRECT RECALL NAME MODE CH/UNIT RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP TRACKING RECALL MMC TRANSPORT MMC LOCATE REMOTE [RS422] TRANSPORT REMOTE [RS422] LOCATE GPI TRANSPORT GPI OUT CONTROL The options and parameters of each item are the same as for the items in the GPI screen GPI IN SETUP popup window. Refer to page 37 and 38 for details. Hint To access the USER DEFINE screen, you can either press the console [UTILITY] switch (located in the LCD FUNCTION ACCESS block) several times, or click the on-screen MENU button → UTILITY button → USER DEFINE tab. Input channel panel assignments The layout of the input channels assigned to INPUT blocks 1–4 of the console (CS1D) can now be freely specified in units of twelve consecutive channels. In the same way, the ST IN channels assigned to ST IN block 1/2 can be specified in units of two consecutively-numbered channels. The panel assign settings can be saved as a user pattern. Furthermore, you can choose any of eight patterns (two preset, six user patterns) and use a switch such as FADER FLIP to select them successively. PANEL ASSIGN screen In the UTILITY function, a PANEL ASSIGN screen has been added, allowing you to make panel assign settings. 52 Input channel panel assignments Preset pattern 1 will be as follows when each arrangement is selected. 1 2 3 1 MODULE FLIP BUTTON mode These buttons choose one of the following two functions for the MODULE [FLIP] switch in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL section. (This also applies to a USER DEFINE switch or GPI IN trigger to which the RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP function is assigned.) • MODULE FLIP ..........As in previous versions, the input channels assigned to the upper and lower INPUT blocks will be changed. • PATTERN CHANGE .Each time you press the MODULE [FLIP] switch, the panel assignment patterns registered in the pattern list (7) of the PANEL ASSIGN screen will be selected successively. If you turn off the MODULE FLIP/PATTERN CHANGE LINK button (A), the MODULE [FLIP] switch will be valid only for the left side of the panel (INPUT block 1/2). In this case, module flip switching for the right side (ST IN block 1/2, INPUT block 3/4) is performed by the USER DEFINE switches, the MODULE buttons located in the lower part of the screen, or the GPI function RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP (→p.37). 2 PATTERN INITIALIZE When you click this button, the PANEL ASSIGN screen settings (with the exception of PRESET PATTERN MODE (3)) will be initialized. 3 PRESET PATTERN MODE These buttons select one of the following two arrangements for the preset patterns (patterns 1 and 5). • UPPER-LOWER This is the existing default arrangement, in which input channels are arranged in the order of INPUT block 1→2→3→4. • LEFT-RIGHT Input channels are arranged in the order of INPUT block 1→3→2→4. UPPER-LOWER INPUT block 2 INPUT block 4 CH13-24 CH37-48 INPUT block 1 INPUT block 3 CH1-12 CH25-36 LEFT-RIGHT INPUT block 3 INPUT block 4 CH25-36 CH37-48 INPUT block 1 INPUT block 2 CH1-12 CH13-24 • Even if you use the PATTERN INITIALIZE but- ton (2) to execute initialization, the PRESET PATTERN MODE setting will not be affected. When you execute initialization, the arrangement of pattern 1 will be copied to patterns 2–4, and the arrangement of pattern 5 will be copied to patterns 6–8. This means that the PRESET PATTERN MODE settings (UPPER-LOWER/LEFTRIGHT) will be applied to all patterns 1–8. • The arrangement of the SCENE function TRACKING RECALL screen (when the MODE button has selected INPUT 1–48 or INPUT 49– 96) and the METER function input channel screens will change according to the PRESET PATTERN MODE. 4 5 6 4 Pattern display area This area shows the channel configurations of the preset patterns (patterns 1 and 5) and user patterns (patterns 2–4, 6–8). 5 ENABLE/DISABLE Enables/disables each pattern. Patterns for which this button is set to ENABLE will be registered in the pattern list (7). 53 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual 6 Channel select You can click the user pattern. It is not possible to disable the ENABLE button of the currently selected pattern. If you want to disable it, use the MODULE [FLIP] switch to select a different pattern as the panel assignment, and then operate the ENABLE button. 7 8 9 7 Pattern list These areas list the patterns that you registered using the ENABLE button. The list is divided into the left (INPUT block 1/2) and right (INPUT block 3/4, ST IN block 1/2) sides of the panel. The patterns registered in this list can be switched in the following ways. • Click in the on-screen pattern list to select a pattern directly. • Select PATTERN CHANGE for the MODULE FLIP BUTTON MODE (1), and press the MODULE [FLIP] switch located in the SELECTED INPUT CHANNEL section of the panel. • Select PATTERN CHANGE in (1), and operate the USER DEFINE switch or GPI IN control source to which you assigned the RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP function. • Select PATTERN CHANGE in (1), and click the PATT [L] or PATT [R] button in the MODULE area at the bottom of the screen. • In the PANEL STATUS area at the top of the screen, click the channel number. However depending on the MODULE FLIP/PATTERN CHANGE LINK (A) setting, pattern switching may not be linked between the left side and right side of the panel. 8 CURRENT ASSIGN Indicates the panel assign status that is currently valid. This is the same as displayed in the PANEL STATUS area (→p.6) in the upper part of the screen. 9 FADER FLIP Switches the fader flip mode (CH or MIX). This is the same function as the FADER FLIP screen on the panel, or the FADER FLIP button (→p.6) in the PANEL STATUS area located in the upper part of the screen. 54 button to edit each block of a 0 A 0 FADER FLIP LINK Specifies whether FADER FLIP button (9) operations will be linked between the left and right sides of the panel. If this button is off, operations of the panel FADER FLIP switch will affect only the left side of the panel. Hint If this button is off, fader flip for the right side can be switched using a USER DEFINE switch, or the FADER FLIP button (→p.6) in the PANEL STATUS area located in the upper part of the screen, or the RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP function assigned to a GPI control (→p.37). A MODULE FLIP/PATTERN CHANGE LINK Specifies whether MODULE [FLIP] button operations will be linked for both sides of the panel. If this button is off, operations of the MODULE [FLIP] button will affect only the left side of the panel. Hint • The actual result of pressing the MODULE [FLIP] button will depend on the MODULE FLIP BUTTON MODE (1). • If this button is turned off, module flip for the right side can be switched using a USER DEFINE switch, the MODULE buttons at the bottom of the screen, or the RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP function assigned to a GPI control (→p.37). Input channel panel assignments Switching the panel assign setting 1. Access the UTILITY function PANEL ASSIGN screen. 2. Click the INITIALIZE button. The settings of the PANEL ASSIGN screen will be initialized (except for PRESET PATTERN MODE). 3. In the pattern display area, use the buttons for the user patterns (patterns 2–4, 6–8) to specify the channels that you want to assign to each pattern. If desired, you may assign the same group of channels to more than one INPUT block, or combine groups of input channels 1–48 with groups of input channels 49–96. 4. For the pattern that you want to use, switch the ENABLE/DISABLE button to “ENABLE.” The selected pattern will be registered in the pattern list, in the order of its pattern number. 5. Turn on the PATTERN CHANGE button of the MODULE FLIP BUTTON MODE section. Now you can use the MODULE [FLIP] switch to change the panel assign pattern. Hint An INPUT [PANEL] button has been added to the DISPLAY SELECT section of the TRACKING RECALL screen. If the INPUT [PANEL] button is pressed, the offset display of the TRACKING RECALL screen will be arranged in the same order as the console layout specified by panel assign. Since the order is the same as the console layout, operation and checking will be easier. However, it is not possible to press this button in PM1D Manager since it does not have a panel assign function. 6. Press the MODULE [FLIP] switch. The patterns registered in the pattern list will change sequentially. Hint If you select a preset pattern (pattern 1, 5), the [FLIP] switch LED will go dark. If you select a user pattern (pattern 2–4, 6–8), the [FLIP] switch LED will light. 7. If you don’t want the MODULE [FLIP] switch to affect the left and right sides of the panel in tandem, turn off the MODULE FLIP/PATTERN CHANGE LINK button. In this case, you can assign the RIGHT SIDE PANEL FLIP function to a USER DEFINE switch (or to GPI IN), and use that USER DEFINE switch (or GPI IN) to operate fader flip for the right side. Hint If patterns 1 and 5 are registered in the pattern list, you can use the GLOBAL LAYER [1-48]/[49-96] switches to select patterns 1 and 5. Press the GLOBAL LAYER [1-48] switch to select pattern 1, or the [49-96] switch to select pattern 5. If you placed the same input channels in a different INPUT block, you can use the [SEL] switches of either block to set/defeat pairing. Also note that the [SEL] switches of adjacent channels will set/defeat pairing when they are pressed simultaneously even if the switches are in different blocks. 55 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Horizontal pair and vertical pair When input channels are paired, the method of pairing adjacent channels such as 1+2, 3+4... (as in previous versions of the system) is called “horizontal pair mode.” Version 1.5 now also allows channels to be paired in combinations such as 1+49, 2+50..., and this is called “vertical pair mode.” When you switch from horizontal pair mode to vertical pair mode, new numbers will be assigned to each input channel as follows: channel 1 → no change channel 2 → channel 49 channel 3 → channel 2 channel 4 → channel 50 channel 5 → channel 3 channel 6 → channel 51 channel 7 → channel 4 channel 8 → channel 52 In each screen of the display (except for the PANEL ASSIGN screen and TRACKING RECALL screen), switching to vertical pair mode merely changes the displayed numbers; the configuration will stay the same as in horizontal pair mode. 56 ➪ However, please note that this simply means that the input channel previously called “channel 2” has now been renamed “channel 49” and changed places on the panel. Elements such as unit assignments, channel name, and mix parameters do not change. This means that even if you switch from horizontal pair mode to vertical pair mode, the combinations that can be paired will not change. Horizontal pair mode Vertical pair mode Horizontal pair and vertical pair Here’s how to use vertical pair mode. 1. Access the UTILITY function PAIR MODE screen (a new screen in this version). In the PAIR MODE screen you can switch between horizontal pair mode and vertical pair mode. Hint You can also set/defeat vertical pairing by clicking the pair button in the appropriate screen. • In order to use the [SHIFT] switch + [SEL] switch to set/defeat vertical pairing, both “PROHIBIT PAIR CHANGE ON PANEL” and “L,RMONO SELECT ON PANEL” must be turned off in the PREFERENCE screen. • If both “PROHIBIT PAIR CHANGE ON PANEL” and “L,R-MONO SELECT ON PANEL” are on, pressing the [SHIFT] switch + input channel [SEL] switch will select LR-MONO. 2. Click the VERTICAL PAIR button to turn it on. Vertical pair mode will be enabled. 3. To specify a vertical pair, hold down the [SHIFT] switch and press the [SEL] switch of the input channel that you want to pair. The CHANNEL PAIRING popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the pairing. Hint If you have changed the panel assignment in the PANEL ASSIGN screen (→p.55), and channels that can be vertically paired are simultaneously placed on the panel, you can set/defeat pairing by pressing their two [SEL] switches simultaneously, as in previous versions. 4. Press one of the three buttons to specify how the parameters will be copied between channels. In this state, you can use the input channel 1 fader to control channels 1 + 49, and the input channel 2 fader to control channels 2 + 50. This is particularly convenient when you want to use adjacent faders to control multiple stereo sources. 5. To defeat pairing, hold down the [SHIFT] switch and press the same [SEL] switch as you did in step 3. The RELEASING CHANNEL PAIRING popup window will appear, asking you to confirm that you want to defeat pairing. To defeat pairing, click the OK button. 57 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Mix minus You can now quickly exclude the signal of a specific channel from the signals sent to a VARI type MIX bus. (This operation is called “mix minus.”) For example, this is convenient in situations where a performer or announcer wants to monitor the same mix as the STEREO bus, but does not want to hear the sound s/he is producing. New functions in the PAN/ROUTING screen FADER ON MIX1 (VARI) LEVEL ON ON MIX2 (VARI) LEVEL • POST ON/POST TO ST= MIX1 MIX2 1 MIX MINUS button This button excludes only the signal of the corresponding channel from the signal that is sent to the specified MIX bus. When you click this button a popup window will appear, allowing you to select the applicable MIX bus. You can also access this popup window by simultaneously pressing the [SEL] switch of the INPUT/ST IN block and the [SEL] switch of the MIX block. …… PAN TO ST …… STEREO L STEREO R INPUT CHANNEL 1 INPUT CHANNEL 1 FADER ON TO ST …… STEREO L STEREO R 1 The following diagrams show how the signal flow differs according to whether the MIX bus 1/2 POST ON/POST TO ST button is set to POST ON or POST TO ST. • POST ON/POST TO ST= MIX1 MIX2 In order to allow the mix minus operation, the following buttons have been added to the PAN/ROUTING screen. …… PAN 2 MIX1 (VARI) ON LEVEL ON 2 POST ON/POST TO ST button This button switches the point from which the signal is taken when the post-fader signal is sent to adjacent odd-numbered / even-numbered VARI-type MIX buses. If POST ON is selected, the signal will be sent from immediately after the [ON] switch of the input channel. If POST TO ST is selected, the signal immediately after the [TO ST] switch will be sent. 58 MIX2 (VARI) LEVEL When you click the MIX MINUS button to use the mix-minus function, the POST ON/POST TO ST button of that MIX bus will automatically switch to POST TO ST. The setting of the POST TO ST button is valid in FIX mode as well. Mix minus Using mix minus 1. Access the PAN/ROUTING function CH to MIX screen. 2. Display the input channel whose signal you want to exclude from the MIX bus, and click the MIX MINUS button for that channel. The MIX MINUS SETTING popup window will appear. 4. Click the OK button. When you click the OK button in the MIX MINUS SETTING popup window, the settings of the PAN/ ROUTING screen will change as follows. Before executing the Mix Minus operation Hint You can also open the MIX MINUS SETTING popup window by simultaneously pressing the INPUT/ST IN block [SEL] switch and the MIX block [SEL] switch. 3. Scroll the list to select the applicable MIX bus. Hint • Instead of scrolling the list, you can select the MIX button by pressing a [SEL] key in the MIX block. The POST ON/POST TO ST The PRE/POST buttons button of the applicable MIX of the applicable MIX bus bus will change to POST TO will all change to POST. ST. The send level of the signal that is sent from the selected input channel to the applicable MIX bus will be lowered to –∞. The MIX send ON/OFF button will automatically turn ON. The send level of the signals sent to the applicable MIX bus from all channels other than the above will be set to nominal level (0.0 dB) The MIX send ON/ OFF button will automatically turn on. • If desired, you can press a [SEL] switch of the INPUT block / ST IN block while this popup window is displayed, to switch the input channel whose signal will be excluded from the MIX bus. After executing the Mix Minus operation for Input channel 1 → MIX bus 1 With these settings, the identical signal as sent to the STEREO bus, but with just the corresponding input channel excluded, will be sent to the desired MIX bus. 59 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Cautions regarding mix minus Please be aware of the following items when you use mix minus. • Mix minus is a shortcut for rapidly making settings ; it is not like changing a “mode.” This means that even after executing mix minus, you are still free to edit the various parameters in the CH to MIX screen. The PAN settings of adjacent odd-numbered / even-numbered input channels will be reflected by the PAN of the paired MIX buses. • The mix minus operation always applies only to the last-selected input channel. If you want to exclude two or more input channels from the signals that are sent to a specific MIX bus, execute the mix minus operation and then edit the settings manual. • The setting of the POST ON/POST TO ST button applies to two adjacent odd-numbered / even-numbered MIX buses. This means that, for example, if you execute the mix minus operation on MIX bus 1, the signal being sent to MIX bus 2 may also be affected. (Signals from an input channel whose [TO ST] button is turned off will not be sent to either MIX buses 1 or 2.) • The mix minus operation is valid only for VARI type MIX buses. You cannot select the MIX MINUS setting popup window for a FIX type MIX bus. If you want to obtain mix minus results with a FIX type MIX bus, you can easily do so by using the job select operation described on the next page. • If an input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel is selected), the send level of the signal sent from both channels to the applicable MIX bus will be –∞. • The mix minus operation is valid even if the applicable MIX bus is paired. In this case, the PAN settings of adjacent odd-numbered / even-numbered input channels will be reflected by the PAN settings of the paired MIX buses. Before executing mix minus 60 After executing mix minus for input channel 1 → paired MIX buses 1/2 Job select Job select In PM1D system software V1.5, you can move the cursor to a specific parameter in the screen and press the [SHIFT] + [ENTER] switches to access a popup window of jobs that can be used for that parameter. (This operation is called “job select.”) If job select is available for a parameter, the cursor frame will turn yellow when it is moved to that parameter. In version 1.5, the job select function can be used for the following parameters in the CH to MIX screen (PAN/ROUTING function). Mix send on/off Mix send on/off You can select the following jobs. • ALL OFF [ALL MIX ↑ ↓] • ALL ON [ALL MIX ↑ ↓] The signals sent from the selected channel to all MIX buses will be switched on or off together. • ALL OFF [ALL CH ↔] The signal sent from an input channel to a MIX bus can be switched on/off by this job. When you move the cursor to this parameter and press the [SHIFT] + [ENTER] switches, the following popup window will appear. • ALL ON [ALL CH ↔] The signals sent from all channels to the selected MIX bus will be switched on or off together. • ALL OFF [ALL CH x ALL MIX] • ALL ON [ALL CH x ALL MIX] The signals sent from all channels to all MIX buses will be switched on or off together. 61 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Mix send point Mix send point Mix send level Mix send level These jobs switch the pre-fader/post-fader selection for the signal sent from an input channel to a MIX bus. When you move the cursor to this parameter and press the [SHIFT] + [ENTER] switches, the following popup window will appear. Using these jobs, the value of the signal level that is sent from an input channel to a MIX bus can be copied to another channel. When you move the cursor to this parameter and press the [SHIFT] + [ENTER] switches, the following popup window will appear. You can select the following jobs. You can select the following jobs. • ALL POST [ALL MIX ↑ ↓] • ALL PRE [ALL MIX ↑ ↓] The extraction point of the signals sent from the selected channel to all MIX buses will simultaneously be switched to post-fader or pre-fader. • ALL POST [ALL CH ↔] • ALL PRE [ALL CH ↔] The extraction point of the signals sent from all channels to the selected MIX bus will simultaneously be switched to post-fader or pre-fader. • ALL POST [ALL CH x ALL MIX] • ALL PRE [ALL CH x ALL MIX] The extraction point of the signals sent from all channels to all MIX buses will be simultaneously be switched to post-fader or pre-fader. The above job is not valid for FIX type MIX buses. If the channel on which you execute this job is either side of an LR-MONO pair, the job will operate as for paired channels 62 • LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ↑ ↓] The value of the selected parameter will be copied to the send level of the signal that is sent from that channel to all MIX buses. • LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ↔] The value of the selected parameter will be copied to the send level of the signal that is sent from all channels to that MIX bus. • LEVEL COPY [ALL CH x ALL MIX] The value of the selected parameter will be copied to the send level of the signal that is sent from all channels to all MIX buses. The above job is not valid for FIX type MIX buses. If the channel on which you execute this job is either side of an LR-MONO pair, the job will operate as for paired channels Job select Mix send pan/balance Mix send pan/balance Using these jobs, the pan/balance setting of the signal that is sent from an input channel to paired MIX buses can be copied to another channel. Move the cursor to the PAN/BALANCE knob that is displayed when MIX buses are paired, and press the [SHIFT] + [ENTER] switches to open the following popup window. You can select the following jobs. • PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL MIX ↑ ↓] The value of the selected parameter will be copied to the pan (balance) of the signal that is sent from that channel to all paired MIX buses. • PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL MIX ↔] The value of the selected parameter will be copied to the pan (balance) of the signals that are sent from all channels to that MIX bus. • PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL CH x ALL MIX] The value of the selected parameter will be copied to the pan (balance) of the signals that are sent from all channels to all paired MIX buses. • The above job is not valid for unpaired MIX buses or for FIX type MIX buses. • You cannot copy a PAN parameter to a BAL- ANCE parameter (or vice versa). • You cannot copy to a channel whose VARI PAN LINK is turned on. 63 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Auto Store function When storing a scene in previous versions, if a unit, patch, or name included in that scene had been changed, a special popup window appeared, requiring you to specify a library number in which to save each type of data. However from version 1.5, you can use an Auto Store function which automatically selects the store-destination library number and title. This is convenient when you want to store a scene in a hurry. You can execute the audio store function either in the screen or by using the [STORE] switch. Using Auto Store from the screen 1. Access the SCENE function MEMORY screen, select the store-destination scene number, and then click the STORE button (or in the SCENE MEMORY section of the console, select the store-destination scene number and press the [STORE] switch). The SCENE STORE popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a title and comment to the scene, and store it. Hint • You can click the MANUAL STORE button and specify the store-destination unit, patch, and name as in previous versions. • For libraries that require you to specify the storedestination, yellow “??” symbols will be displayed above the MANUAL STORE button. • If the unit, patch, or name has been changed, the libraries will not be overwritten; a new library number will be selected automatically for storing, even when overwriting a previously-stored scene. This prevents the auto store operation from affecting other scenes in case a library is linked from more than one scene. If you want your changes to be reflected by all scenes that link to that library, click the MANUAL STORE button and perform the store operation as in previous versions, or edit each library directly. 2. To execute auto store, click the AUTO STORE button. The data will be automatically stored with the library number and title shown above the AUTO STORE button. If the unit, patch, or name were changed, or if the most-recently stored/recalled unit library was readonly, the lowest-numbered vacant library number will be selected. In this case, the selected library will be stored with the same name as the title of the scene (shown in yellow characters). If there was no change in the unit, patch, or name, the most-recently stored/recalled library number will automatically be linked to the scene (shown in gray characters). If there is not even one vacant library of the corresponding type, the AUTO STORE button will be masked, and cannot be clicked. In this case, the library number field will indicate “--” and the title field will indicate “--DATA FULL--”. 64 Auto Store function Using Auto Store from the [STORE] switch Here’s how to execute the auto store function simply by operating the SCENE MEMORY block [STORE] switch. 1. Access the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen. 2. For the USE STORE SW ON PANEL FOR AUTO STORE field, click the ON/OFF button to turn it ON. 3. To execute the auto store function, press the SCENE MEMORY block [STORE] switch twice. The first time you press the [STORE] switch, the SCENE STORE popup window will appear. The second time you press it, auto store will be executed. (The result is the same as clicking the AUTO STORE button.) 65 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Global Paste function The settings of a desired channel or desired parameter in the current scene can now be copied and pasted into one or more scenes in scene memory. This is called the Global Paste function. It provides a convenient way for changes in the current scene to be reflected in previously-stored scenes GLOBAL PASTE screen The GLOBAL PASTE screen has been added to the SCENE function. 1 1 PASTE MODE Here you can select one of the following as the item(s) to be pasted. • UNIT........................... Settings of an input unit assigned to an input channel • INPUT ........................ Parameters of an input channel 66 • OUTPUT ....................Parameters of an output channel • DCA, GEQ, EFFECT ..DCA level and mute on/off settings, GEQ settings, EFFECT settings Global Paste function 2 2 CURRENT SCENE Here you can select the channel(s) and parameter(s) of the current scene whose data will be copied. The items that will be displayed here will depend on the PASTE MODE (1) selection. 3 5 4 6 3 DESTINATION SCENE For each scene stored in memory, this area indicates the scene number, title, and protect on/off setting. Click the number/title field to select the paste-destination scene(s). (The currently selected scene is displayed in blue.) You can also switch protect on/off from this screen. Hint • By holding down the [SHIFT] key and clicking a number/title in the scene list, you can select two or more consecutive scenes. • A maximum of 100 scenes can be selected simultaneously. 4 From No./To No. (From number / To number) When selecting two or more consecutive scenes as the paste-destination, these knobs specify the starting and ending numbers. 5 PASTE Click this button to execute the paste. 6 UNDO Click this button to undo the previously-executed paste operation. If you recall another scene or sort the scene memories after executing paste, the Undo function will no longer be available. 67 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Using the Global Paste function 1. Access the SCENE function GLOBAL PASTE screen. • When PASTE MODE = INPUT 2. Use the PASTE MODE buttons to select the type of item that you want to paste. 3. In the CURRENT SCENE section, select the channel(s) or parameter(s) that you want to copy. The items displayed in the CURRENT SCENE area will depend on the selection of the PASTE MODE (1) area. • When PASTE MODE = UNIT Use the SOURCE CH SELECT area to select the input channel(s), and the PARAMETER SELECT area to select the parameter(s). You can select the following parameters. • ALL..............................All parameters except NAME • ATT..............................Attenuator • EQ................................EQ function settings • GATE ...........................GATE function settings • COMP .........................COMP function settings • DELAY ........................DELAY function settings • FADER ........................Fader level Click a button in the UNIT field to select the unit from which data will be copied. • If the source unit is a different type than the des- tination unit, no parameters will be copied. • Even if SET ALL is selected, unpatched units will not be pasted. • ON...............................[ON] switch on/off status • PAN/BAL ....................Pan/balance settings • INSERT .......................Insert on/off status and insertion point • SEND...........................Send level to a specified MIX bus • DCA ............................Associated DCA group • MUTE..........................Associated mute group • LCR..............................LCR screen settings • NAME .........................NAME of the input channel If you turn on the SEND button, use the buttons (1– 48) of the MIX field to select the applicable MIX bus. Hint If you click the SET ALL button, all items will be selected. If you click the CLEAR ALL button, the selection will be cleared for all items. These buttons will function in the same way regardless of the PASTE MODE. 68 Global Paste function • When PASTE MODE = OUTPUT Use the SOURCE CH SELECT area to select the output channel(s), and the PARAMETER SELECT area to select the parameter(s). You can select the following parameters. • ALL..............................All parameters except NAME • EQ ...............................EQ function settings • COMP.........................COMP function settings • DELAY ........................DELAY function settings • FADER ........................Fader level • ON...............................[ON] switch on/off status • BAL .............................Balance settings • INSERT.......................Insert on/off status and insertion point • TO MTRX...................Send level to a specified MATRIX bus • When PASTE MODE = DCA, GEQ, EFFECT Use the SOURCE No. SELECT area to select the DCA group (DCA 1–12), GEQ (GEQ 1–24), and/or internal effect (EFFECT 1–8) that will be copied. Hint If you click the SET ALL button, all items will be selected. If you click the CLEAR ALL button, the selection will be cleared for all items. These buttons will function in the same way regardless of the PASTE MODE. 4. In the DESTINATION SCENE area, select the scene to which the data will be pasted. To select an individual scene, click the number/title field in the scene list. To select two or more consecutive scenes, use the From No. / To No. knobs to specify the starting and ending locations. • DCA ............................Associated DCA group • MUTE .........................Associated mute group • LCR .............................LCR screen settings • NAME .........................NAME of the output channel If you turn on the TO MTRX button, use the buttons (1–24) of the MATRIX field to select the applicable MATRIX bus. Hint If you click the SET ALL button, all items will be selected. If you click the CLEAR ALL button, the selection will be cleared for all items. These buttons will function in the same way regardless of the PASTE MODE. You can also select two or more scenes by holding down the [SHIFT] key and clicking the number/title fields of separate locations. Hint A maximum of 100 scenes can be selected simultaneously. 69 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual 5. Click the PASTE button. The selected item(s) of the current scene will be pasted to the scene(s) in memory. • If PASTE MODE = UNIT, unit libraries that are linked to the selected scene will automatically be found and pasted. • If PASTE MODE = INPUT/OUTPUT and the • If MIX pairing was changed as a result of paste, the send levels to that MIX will be changed as follows. Change in MIX pair Pair → Mono pasted parameter is NAME, the name library linked to the selected scene will be found and pasted. MIX TYPE PAN LINK CH PAIR PAN MODE Fix — — — Odd and Even set to nominal Vari — — — Even (Level) copied to Odd (Pan) Fix — — — Odd and Even set to nominal — ChPan copied to Odd (Pan), Even set to the larger of the two MIX settings — Odd (Pan) set to center, Even set to the larger of the two MIX settings Pan Odd (Pan) set to left and right, Even set to the larger of the two MIX settings Balance Odd (Pan) set to center, Even set to the larger of the two MIX settings • Be aware that if a library is linked from a different scene, the paste operation may cause the library to be overwritten. On — If the parameters differ between the copy-source and paste-destination scenes, the data be handled as follows according to the type of parameter. ■ When Paste Mode = UNIT • If the type of unit differs between the copy-source and paste-destination, no parameters of any cards (all eight slots) installed in that unit will be copied. Mono Mono → Pair Vari Off • Even if the copy-source and paste-destination units are the same type, if the type of installed card is different, the parameters for that card will not be pasted. ■ When Paste Mode = INPUT • If the copy-source and paste-destination have differing MIX bus settings (paired or FIX/VARI), mix send-related parameters will not be pasted. • If the states (pan or balance) of the copy-source and paste-destination differ, the pan/balance setting and the send level to the MIX bus will not be pasted. • If the states (pairing or LR-Mono) of the copysource and paste-destination differ, the parameters will be pasted only if both L and R channels are selected and ALL is selected. • Some pairing-related parameters will be pasted only if both L and R channels are selected. • If PAN LINK is on for the paste-destination, PAN LINK will be turned off if other than ALL is selected and either SEND or PAN/BAL is selected. • DCA group parameters will be pasted only to groups to which no output channel is assigned. ■ When Paste Mode = OUTPUT • If MATRIX pairing differs between the copysource and paste-destination, mix send-related parameters will not be pasted. • If MIX or MATRIX pairing differs between the copy-source and paste-destination, parameters will be pasted only if both L and R channels are selected and ALL is selected. 70 Pair Send Level setting • If MATRIX pairing was changed as a result of paste, the send levels to that MATRIX will be changed as follows. (However, the MIX selected for pasting is excepted.) Change in MATRIX pair MIX pair Pair → Mono — Even (Level) copied to Odd (Pan) Mono Odd (Pan) set to Center, Even set to the larger of the two MTRX settings Mono → Pair Pair Send Level setting Odd (Pan) set to left and right, Even set to the larger of the two MTRX settings • Some pairing-related parameters will be pasted only if both L and R channels are selected. • DCA group parameters will be pasted only to groups to which input channels are not assigned. (For MATRIX and STEREO A/B, only MUTE.) ■ When Paste Mode = DCA, GEQ, EFFECT • If GEQ LINK is turned off in the copy-source (the current scene), and GEQ LINK is turned on in the paste-destination, GEQ LINK will be turned off in the paste-destination, and the GEQ parameters will be pasted. Parameter control via CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN Parameter control via CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN In PM1D system software V1.5, parameters can be transmitted to an external device as MIDI continuouslyvariable data when you perform an operation (other than Scene Recall) on the console (CS1D). Similarly, continuously-variable data received from an external device can remotely control internal parameters. For example, you can use an external MIDI sequencer or PC-based sequencer software to record parameter changes in realtime, and reproduce these movements whenever desired. The PM1D (version 1.5) can receive and transmit two types of MIDI message for this purpose: Control Change messages and NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) messages. CONTROL CHANGE You can assign parameters to control change numbers. However, there are limitations on the type of parameters that can be assigned. NRPN The parameter assignments are pre-determined. These assignments cannot be changed. Control change MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen Settings for MIDI CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN messages are made in the MIDI/GPI/TC function MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen. 71 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Hint 2–6 are identical to the functions of the same name in the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen of previous versions. 1 3 6 4 5 8 2 7 9 1 MIDI PORT Tx/Rx (MIDI transmit/receive port) Selects the MIDI port that will transmit MIDI messages (Tx) and the MIDI port that will receive MIDI messages (Rx). You can select the console or engine port. • When using the PM1D system in Dual Console mode, you can select console 1 or 2. • When using the PM1D system in Mirror mode, and the engine is selected, the MIDI port of the currently-enabled engine will be selected automatically. (This is an improvement from the previous version.) 2 PROGRAM CHANGE Tx/Rx (PROGRAM CHANGE transmission/reception) Switches PROGRAM CHANGE transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) on/off. 3 PROGRAM CHANGE MIDI MODE (PROGRAM CHANGE MIDI mode) As the PROGRAM CHANGE transmission/reception mode, you can select either Multi mode (use MIDI channels 1–16 for transmission and reception) or Single mode (use only a single MIDI channel for transmission and reception). For details, refer to the CS1D Reference Manual (Software), page 30, item 3. 4 OMNI If Single mode is selected, turning this button on will allow program change messages of all MIDI channels to be received. In Multi mode, this button has no effect. 5 BANK ON/OFF (Bank select on/off) If Single mode is selected, turning this button on will allow bank select messages to be received, increasing the number of parameters that respond to program change messages. In Multi mode, this button has no effect. 6 PROGRAM CHANGE ECHO (PROGRAM CHANGE echo output) If this button is on, program change messages received from the MIDI IN connector will be echoed from the MIDI OUT connector. 72 7 CONTROL CHANGE Tx/Rx (CONTROL CHANGE transmission/reception) Switches CONTROL CHANGE transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) on/off. 8 CONTROL CHANGE MIDI MODE (CONTROL CHANGE MIDI mode) Selects one of the following as the CONTROL CHANGE transmission/reception mode. • MULTI (Multi mode) CONTROL CHANGE on MIDI channels 1–16 will be used simultaneously to control the event (parameter) assigned in the parameter list at the right side of the screen and the parameters of the fifteen NRPN numbers that follow it. When the console is used to edit the corresponding parameter or any parameter of the fifteen NRPN numbers that follow it, a CONTROL CHANGE message will be transmitted on MIDI channel 1–16. • SINGLE (Single mode) When a CONTROL CHANGE is received on the MIDI channel selected by the Rx knob (A), the parameter assigned in the parameter list at the right of the screen will be edited. When the console is used to edit the corresponding parameter, a control change message will be transmitted on the MIDI channel selected by the Tx knob (0). 9 NRPN Tx/Rx (NRPN transmission/reception) Switches NRPN transmission (Tx) or reception (Rx) on/off. This can be used simultaneously with CONTROL CHANGE transmission and reception. In this case, operation will be as follows. • CONTROL CHANGE / NRPN reception is on Parameters to which CONTROL CHANGE or NRPN reception (or both) is assigned will respond. • CONTROL CHANGE / NRPN transmission is on When you operate a parameter to which either CONTROL CHANGE or NRPN (not both) is assigned, the corresponding message will be transmitted. When you operate a parameter to which both CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN are assigned, only the CONTROL CHANGE message will be transmitted. Parameter control via CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN 0 C A B 0 Tx knob If Single mode is selected as the MIDI mode for PROGRAM CHANGE / CONTROL CHANGE, this knob selects the MIDI channel on which messages will be transmitted. In Multi mode, this parameter has no effect. A Rx knob If Single mode is selected as the MIDI mode for PROGRAM CHANGE / CONTROL CHANGE, this knob selects the MIDI channel on which messages will be received. In Multi mode, this parameter has no effect. B CONTROL CHANGE event list From the left, the columns indicate the MIDI channel, control number, and the assigned event (parameter). You can click the button to open the MIDI CTRL CHANGE popup window and select a parameter. Hint In the CONTROL CHANGE event list, the MIDI channel column will indicate “ALL” if Multi mode is selected, or “--” if Single mode is selected. C INITIALIZE Initializes the control number parameter assignments to their default state. In version 1.5, the content of items 1–A of the MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE screen has been changed in the same way. 73 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Using CONTROL CHANGE / NRPN messages to record/play parameter changes Here’s how parameter operations on the console (CS1D) can be recorded on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and their changes played back. 1. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of your MIDI sequencer (PC-based sequencer software) to the MIDI IN connector of the console or engine, and connect the MIDI IN connector of your MIDI sequencer to the MIDI OUT connector of the console or engine. The following diagram shows an example of connecting the console with PC-based sequencer software. MIDI IN If you turned on the NRPN Tx/Rx buttons, proceed to step 9. 4. Use the CONTROL CHANGE MIDI MODE buttons to select either Multi mode or Single mode. Depending on the mode you select, operation will differ as follows. • Single mode For both transmission and reception, messages will be transferred using only a single MIDI channel. In this mode if you assign the level (fader) of input channel 1 to CONTROL CHANGE #1, operating the fader of input channel 1 will transmit CONTROL CHANGE #1 on the Tx channel. If CONTROL CHANGE #1 on the Rx channel is received, the level of input channel 1 will change. MIDI OUT Input channel 1 MIDI OUT MIDI IN CS1D 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 Hint When recording operations of the console, make sure that the “MIDI echo” or “MIDI thru” setting (a function by which messages received at the MIDI IN connector are re-transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector) of your MIDI sequencer is turned off. 2. Access the MIDI/GPI/TC function MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen, and set the MIDI PORT field to specify the MIDI port that will receive MIDI messages. Hint The MIDI port selection can be made either from the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen or the MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen. 3. According to the type of message that you want to transmit and receive, turn on either the CONTROL CHANGE Tx/Rx buttons or the NRPN Tx/Rx buttons. We recommend that you normally turn on the Tx/Rx buttons for either CONTROL CHANGE or NRPN, not both. If you turned on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx/Rx buttons, proceed to step 4. 74 Tx CH CC#1 Rx CH CC#1 Parameter control via CONTROL CHANGE and NRPN • Multi mode Up to sixteen MIDI channels will be used simultaneously. (The CH column of the parameter list will indicate “ALL.”) In this mode if you assign the level (fader) of input channel 1 to CONTROL CHANGE #1, the respective MIDI channels will be assigned automatically to input channels 2–16. In this state, operating the faders of input channels 1–16 will transmit CONTROL CHANGE #1 on MIDI channels 1–16. If a CONTROL CHANGE #1 message is received on a MIDI channel 1–16, the level of the corresponding input channel 1–16 will change. The MIDI CTRL CHANGE popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a parameter to the CONTROL CHANGE. Input channels 1 2 3 4 15 16 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 7. Select the parameter group in the MODE field, select the type of parameter and channel number (or DCA group, effect, GEQ number) in the PARAMETER field, and click the OK button. If you selected Multi mode as the MIDI mode for CONTROL CHANGE, up to sixteen MIDI channels will automatically be assigned for the selected parameter; the selected number = MIDI channel 1, selected number +1 = MIDI channel 2, selected number +2 = MIDI channel 3, and so on. Hint For details on the parameters that can be selected for each group, refer to page 94. MIDI CH=1 CC#1 MIDI CH=3 CC#1 MIDI CH=2 CC#1 MIDI CH=4 CC#1 MIDI CH=15 CC#1 MIDI CH=16 CC#1 CONTROL CHANGE# 0 Hint The parameters that are automatically assigned to MIDI channels 1–16 will be “the NRPN# of the assigned parameter” +1 to 15. For details on the NRPN numbers, refer to page 94. 5. If Single mode is selected, use the Tx knob and Rx knob to specify the MIDI transmit channel and receive channel. 6. If you want to change the parameter that is assigned to each control number, click the ton in the parameter list. 8. In the same way, assign parameters for other control numbers. Control numbers 0–119 may be used. However, parameters cannot be assigned to the following control numbers which used for special purposes. but- Function Bank select (MSB) 6 Data entry (MSB) 3Í2 Bank select (LSB) 38 Data entry (LSB) 96 Data increment 97 Data decrement 98 NRPN (LSB) 99 NRPN (MSB) 100 RPN (LSB) 101 RPN (MSB) 9. Put your MIDI sequencer in record mode, and operate the parameters you assigned. The corresponding CONTROL CHANGE / NRPN messages will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector, and recorded on your sequencer. 10. When you have finished recording, play back your sequencer. The parameter changes will be reproduced. 75 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Manual Fading function When recalling a scene for which a fade time is specified, you can use the Manual Fading function, which allows you to control fading forward or backward by turning the [DATA] encoder. New functions in the FADE TIME screen So that you can use the Manual Fading function, the following items have been added to the SCENE function FADE TIME screen. 2 1 1 MANUAL FADING Switches manual fading on/off. While auto fade is being executed, you can move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] switch to switch immediately to manual fading. Alternatively, if you turn this button on beforehand, you will be able to manually control the fade from the beginning when you recall a scene for which a fade time is specified. 2 PROGRESS If the MANUAL FADING button (1) is on, you can move the cursor to this knob and turn the [DATA] encoder to manually fade between 0% (fader values before recall) – 100% (fader values reached after recall). At this time, the fading progress (as a percentage) is shown in the numerical box below the knob. Using Manual Fading (1) Here’s how to switch to manual fading while auto fading is being executed. 1. Access the SCENE function FADE TIME screen. 2. Move the cursor to the MANUAL FADING button. 3. Using the SCENE MEMORY section of the panel, recall a scene for which auto fading has been specified. 4. When auto fading begins, press the [ENTER] switch. Operation will switch from auto fading to manual fading, and the cursor will automatically move to the PROGRESS knob. 76 Manual Fading function 5. Turn the [DATA] encoder toward the right. Fading will progress as you turn the encoder. If necessary, you can turn the encoder toward the left to reverse the fade. Fader settings before scene recall Fader settings after scene recall 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 PROGRESS=0% PROGRESS=50% PROGRESS=100% If one minute elapses during manual fading without the [DATA] encoder being operated, the MANUAL FADING button will automatically be turned off, and auto fading will begin. Also, auto fading will begin immediately if the MANUAL FADING button is switched off. Hint By assigning a USER DEFINE switch (or GPI IN) to the MANUAL FADE ON function, you can use that USER DEFINE switch (or an external switch connected to the GPI connector) to switch between manual fading and auto fading. Even if a different screen is currently displayed, the FADE TIME screen will immediately be recalled, and the cursor will move to the PROGRESS knob. • It is not possible to modify the FADE TIME parameter while manual fading is being performed. • Manual fading will be cancelled if the FADING button is switched to “DISABLE,” if the buttons in the FADING CH SELECT section are all turned off, or if a fader or pan value is edited either manually or from an external controller such as MIDI. [PM1D Manager] In PM1D Manager, the FADE TIME parameter can be edited even while manual fading is being performed. However, the FADE TIME parameter will not be reflected until the currently-executed fading has ended. 77 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Using Manual Fading (2) Here’s how you can enable manual fading beforehand, and perform manual fading from the beginning when you recall a scene. 1. Access the SCENE function FADE TIME screen. 2. Move the cursor to the MANUAL FADING button and press the [ENTER] switch. The MANUAL FADING button will turn on. 3. Using the SCENE MEMORY section of the panel, recall a scene for which auto fading has been specified. When the scene is recalled, manual fading will be enabled. 4. Move the cursor to the PROGRESS knob, and turn the [DATA] encoder to control the fading. If one minute elapses during manual fading without the PROGRESS knob being operated, the MANUAL FADING button will automatically be turned off, and auto fading will begin. Also, if the PROGRESS knob value stays at 100% for five seconds, the MANUAL FADING button will be turned off, and fading will end. If you turn the MANUAL FADING button off, auto fading will begin immediately. Hint If you assign a USER DEFINE switch (or GPI IN) to the MANUAL FADE ON function, you will be able to switch instantly to the FADE TIME screen from any other screen. 78 Unit name Unit name Now you can assign a unit name to each input/output unit and to each port of a card. UNIT NAME screen The UNIT NAME screen has been added to the SYS/W.CLOCK function, allowing you to assign a name to each unit and each port of a card. 79 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual 4 UNIT TYPE Indicates the type of unit that is selected in UNIT SELECT (1). Hint By clicking this you can jump to the corresponding page of the INPUT UNIT screen or OUTPUT UNIT screen. 1 5 UNIT NAME Indicates the name of the unit that is selected in UNIT SELECT (1). You can also click this field and use the text box (8) and character palette (9) to assign a name to the unit. 6 Name list This column displays the name of each port of the cards installed in the currently selected unit. 2 1 UNIT SELECT Use these buttons to select the unit (IN 1–10, OUT 1–6) that you want to name. 2 AUTO NUMBERING When you click this button, each INPUT UNIT / OUTPUT UNIT will be automatically assigned consecutive numbers. 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 Template name list Frequently-used names and abbreviations can be registered in this list as template names. This list is common to the template name list in the IN PATCH/ OUT PATCH function NAME screen. Changes made to one will be reflected in the other. 8 Text box This text box lets you edit or newly create a name in the name list (6) or template name list (7). 9 Character palette This palette lets you input characters, numerals, and symbols into the text box. For details on operation, refer to the “CS1D Operation Manual (Basic Operation)” section “Assigning a name” (→p.20). 3 UNIT LIBRARY This button opens the UNIT LIBRARY window, allowing you to save/load unit settings as library data. Unit name data is saved in the unit library, not in the name library. 80 Unit name Naming a unit/port 1. Access the SYS/W.CLOCK function UNIT NAME screen. 2. Click a UNIT SELECT button to select a unit. 3. To assign a name to the unit itself, click the UNIT NAME field. The field will change color to light blue, indicating that it can now be edited. 4. Use the character palette or an external keyboard to input a name of up to eight characters into the text box, and click the ENTER button in the screen. The unit name will be finalized. If an LMY2-ML mic/line input card is installed in the input unit, the same number will be assigned to jacks A and B of the same port. 10. If you want to display the name of the port assigned to that channel, rather than the short name of the input channel shown in the screen, click the UNIT NAME button located at the bottom of the screen. Port name Hint Alternatively, you can use a template name instead of inputting the name. For details on using template names, refer to “CS1D Reference Manual (Software)” page 129. 5. To assign a name to each port of a card installed in the unit, click the name field in the name list. The field will change color to light blue, indicating that it can now be edited. 6. Use the character palette or an external keyboard to input a name of up to four characters into the text box, and click the ENTER button in the screen. 7. Assign names to other ports in the same way. 8. If you want ports to be numbered consecutively, click the AUTO NUMBERING button. A popup window will ask you to confirm the auto numbering operation. 9. Click the OK button. Consecutive numbers will automatically be assigned to all usable ports of that unit. 81 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Matrix send shortcuts In the previous version, the send level of a signal sent from a MIX channel / STEREO A/B channel to a MATRIX bus could be controlled only from the screen. However, version 1.5 provides a shortcut that lets you use panel encoders to control this. There is a shortcut for controlling the send level from a single MIX channel to each of the MATRIX buses, and another shortcut for controlling the send level from each of the MIX channels to a single MATRIX bus. ■ Single MIX channel → each MATRIX bus In the MIX OUTPUT block of the panel, press and hold the [SEL] switch of the MIX channel that is sending the signal. After you have held down the [SEL] switch for a time, the MATRIX OUTPUT block MATRIX [NAME] indicator will alternately display “SEND” and the short name of MATRIX channel. ON PAIR In the case of a paired MATRIX channel, the [NAME] indicator of the odd-numbered channel will alternately display “PAN” and the short name of that MATRIX channel. While you continue to hold down the switch, use the MATRIX OUTPUT block MATRIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoders to adjust the send level or pan from the selected MIX channel to each of the MATRIX buses. (The send level value is shown by the LEDs surrounding the MATRIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder.) Alternately displays “SEND” and the short name of MATRIX channel 1. MIX OUTPUT block SEND ON SEND Alternately displays “SEND” and the short name of MATRIX channel 2. ON PAIR Indicates the send level of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 1 to MATRIX bus 1. O Use this knob to adjust the send level of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 1 to MATRIX bus 2. Indicates the send level of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 1 to MATRIX bus 1. Indicates the send level of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 1 to MATRIX bus 2. MATRIX OUTPUT block Hint In the same way, you can hold down the STEREO OUTPUT block STEREO A/B [SEL] switch and use the MATRIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoders to adjust the send level of the signal from the STEREO A/B channel to each MATRIX bus. 82 If you are using the controls of the MIX OUTPUT block to edit effect parameters, the above shortcut cannot be used. However, you can still use the shortcut of holding down the STEREO A/B [SEL] switch. Matrix send shortcuts ■ Each MIX channel → single MATRIX bus In the MATRIX OUTPUT block of the panel, press and hold the [SEL] switch of the MATRIX channel that is sending the signal. After you have held down the [SEL] switch for a time, the MIX OUTPUT block MIX [NAME] indicator will alternately display “SEND” and the short name of the MIX channel. ON ON PAIR While you continue to hold down the switch, use the MIX OUTPUT block MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoders to adjust the send level or pan from each MIX channel to the selected MATRIX bus. (The send level value is shown by the LEDs surrounding the MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder.) In the case of a paired MATRIX channel, pressing the [SEL] switch of the odd-numbered channel will cause the [NAME] indicator of the MIX channel to alternately display “PAN” and the short name, allowing you to set the pan. MATRIX OUTPUT block Pressing the [SEL] switch of the even-numbered channel will cause the [NAME] indicator of the MIX channel to display “SEND,” allowing you to set the send level. Alternately displays “SEND” and the short name of MIX channel 1. SEND ON SEND Alternately displays “SEND” and the short name of MIX channel 2. ON PAIR Use this knob to adjust the send level of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 1 to MATRIX bus 1. Indicates the send level of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 1 to MATRIX bus 1. Use this knob to adjust the send level of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 2 to MATRIX bus 1. Indicates the send level of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 2 to MATRIX bus 1. MIX OUTPUT block This shortcut cannot be used in the STEREO OUTPUT block. 83 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual If the selected MATRIX channel is paired, this shortcut will operate differently depending on whether you press and hold the [SEL] switch of the odd-numbered (left) channel or of the even-numbered (right) channel. • If you press and hold the odd-numbered (left) [SEL] switch, you can use the MIX OUTPUT block MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder to adjust the pan of the signal that is sent from that channel to the selected pair of MIX buses. During this time, the MIX [NAME] indicator of the MIX OUTPUT block will alternately display “PAN” and the short name of the MIX channel, and the LEDs surrounding the MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder will indicate the pan value. ON • If you press and hold the even-numbered (right) [SEL] switch, you can use the MIX OUTPUT block MIX [LEVEL/BAL] encoder to adjust the send level of the signal that is sent from that channel to the selected pair of MIX buses. ON ON PAIR ON MATRIX OUTPUT block PAIR Alternately displays “SEND” and the short name of MIX channel 1. SEND MATRIX OUTPUT block ON Use this knob to adjust the level of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 1 to MATRIX channels 1/2. Alternately displays “PAN” and the short name of MIX channel 1. O Indicates the send level of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 1 to MATRIX channels 1/2. MIX OUTPUT block PAIR Hint Indicates the pan of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 1 to MATRIX buses 1/2. MIX OUTPUT block 84 PAIR PAN ON Use this knob to adjust the pan of the signal that is sent from MIX channel 1 to MATRIX buses 1/2. O For either shortcut, it will take a certain amount of time from when you first press the [SEL] switch until the [NAME] indicator starts blinking. If you do not want to wait this long, you can hold down the [SEL] switch and immediately operate the [LEVEL/BAL] encoder of the send destination (or send source), and the shortcut will be enabled from that instant. If ROUTING is turned on in the AUTO DISPLAY ON/OFF area of the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, using this shortcut operation will immediately cause the display to shift to the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen, and the cursor will move to the corresponding knob. DCA mute indicator DCA mute indicator In previous versions, you could tell whether a DCA group was muted or unmuted by looking at the DCA block DCA [MUTE] switch LED (lit = muted, dark = unmuted). However, this does not tell you whether the channels belonging to that DCA group are muted in the INPUT block. PM1D system software V1.5 provides a way for you to check whether individual channels are also muted when a DCA group is muted. To do so, access the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen, and turn DCA MUTE FLASH INDICATE on. DCA 10 5 5 6 7 8 0 5 9 10 11 12 For example if you mute DCA group 12, [ASSIGN DCA] LED 2 will blink for input channels or output channels belonging to that group. 10 5 5 6 7 8 0 5 DCA 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 10 5 5 6 7 8 0 5 DCA 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 10 5 10 10 20 20 20 20 RCL MUTE 30 SAFE RCL MUTE 30 SAFE RCL MUTE 30 SAFE 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 60 60 CUE 5 6 7 8 0 10 CUE 1 2 3 4 5 10 CUE In this state, muting a DCA group will cause the DCA block DCA [MUTE] switch LED to blink, and will also cause the corresponding [ASSIGN DCA] LED of the channels belonging to that group to blink. DCA 1 2 3 4 blinking 30 9 10 11 12 RCL MUTE SAFE CUE INPUT block Hint The [ASSIGN DCA] LED will also blink when you assign a channel to that DCA. However, it will blink more rapidly when muted. blinking IN 1–12 13–24 25–36 37–48 DCA FADER STATUS 10 11 12 DCA block 85 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Oscillator improvements You can now use two different sine waves simultaneously in the OSCILLATOR screen. You can specify the frequency and level of each, and output them separately to odd-numbered / even-numbered channels. Improvements in the OSCILLATOR screen In conjunction with the above improvements, the MON/CUE function OSCILLATOR screen has enhanced as follows. 1 1 OSC ON/OFF (Oscillator on/off) Switches the signal selected by OSC MODE (2) (sine wave or noise) on/off. 2 OSC MODE (Oscillator mode) Selects one of the following to specify the type of output signal and the number of channels. The display in the PARAMETERS section will differ depending on your choice here. 86 2 • SINE WAVE 1CH........One sine wave will be used. • SINE WAVE 2CH........Two sine waves will be used. • PINK NOISE ..............Pink noise will be used. • BURST NOISE ...........Burst noise will be used. Oscillator improvements ■ If you select SINE WAVE 2CH Hint • If you select SINE WAVE 2CH, the L channel sine wave will be sent to the odd-numbered channel(s) (or the STEREO L channel) selected by the ASSIGN (4) parameter described below, and the R channel sine wave will be sent to the even-numbered channel(s) (or the STEREO R channel). LEVEL knob FREQ knob • If you select any other, the same signal will be output to all channels selected by the ASSIGN (4) parameter. Level meter 3 10kHz / 1kHz / 100Hz The level and frequency of the sine waves can be set independently for the L channel and R channel. The content of the parameters are the same as for SINE WAVE 1CH. The two sine waves are generated completely independently. Even if you set both sine waves to the same frequency, they will not be in phase. If you want the phase to match, use SINE WAVE 1CH. 3 PARAMETERS Here you can set the parameters of the sine wave or noise. The display in this section will differ depending on the choice of OSC MODE (2). ■ If you select PINK NOISE Fixed-level pink noise will be sent to the specified bus(es). Level meter LEVEL knob HPF knob LPF knob ■ If you select SINE WAVE 1CH A fixed-level sine wave will be sent to the specified bus(es). LEVEL knob FREQ knob 10kHz / 1kHz / 100Hz Level meter • Level meter .................Indicates the output level of the sine wave. • LEVEL knob ............... Adjusts the output level of the sine wave in a range of –96 dB to 0 dB. The current value is shown in the numerical box below the knob. • FREQ knob ................. Adjusts the frequency of the sine wave in a range of 20 Hz–20 kHz. The current value is shown in the numerical box below the knob. • 10 kHz / 1 kHz/ 100 Hz .These buttons set the frequency of the sine wave to preset values. • Level meter .................Indicates the output level of the noise. • LEVEL knob ...............Adjusts the output level of the noise in a range of –96 dB to 0 dB. The current value is shown in the numerical box below the knob. • HPF knob / LPF knob ..These knobs continuously adjust the frequency of the high pass filter and low pass filter that process the noise, in a range of 20 Hz–20 kHz. The current frequency is shown in the numerical box below each knob. You can also use the ON/OFF buttons located below each numerical box to switch the high pass filter and low pass filter on/off. 87 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual ■ If you select BURST NOISE Intermittent pink noise will be sent to the specified bus(es). 4 • WIDTH knob............. Adjusts the duration from when the pink noise is output until it stops, in a range of 0.1–10 seconds. The current value is shown in the numerical box below the knob. • INTERVAL.................. Adjusts the duration of the silence, in a range of 1–30 seconds. The current value is shown in the numerical box below the knob. Level meter LEVEL knob HPF knob LPF knob WIDTH knob INTERVAL knob 4 ASSIGN Selects the bus(es) to which the sine wave or noise will be output. (You may select more than one bus.) The remaining parameters are the same as for PINK NOISE. 5 5 OSC OUT (Oscillator output) Directly outputs the sine wave / pink noise to a physical port. Click the button to select the output destination port, and use the ON/OFF button to switch the output on/off. If you select SINE WAVE 2CH for OSC MODE, the direct output will be sent from the L channel to OSC OUT. 88 Improvements in the INPUT PATCH / OUTPUT PATCH screens Improvements in the INPUT PATCH / OUTPUT PATCH screens You can now display and edit the unit name for each port in the INPUT PATCH / OUTPUT PATCH screens. Also, vertical and horizontal red lines now indicate the currently selected grid. USB PC (computer) connection A PC running PM1D Manager can now be connected via USB. To use the USB connection, open PM1D Manager’s Option popup window, and in the Communication Port select “YAMAHA USB OUTxxx (where xxx is the device number / port number).” • Updating of the system software is performed using the serial port as before. Please note that updating cannot be performed via USB. • If PM1D Manager is running on a USB-con- nected PC, and you want to connect/disconnect the USB cable or restart the connected console/ engine, you must exit PM1D Manager and then restart your PC. In some cases, you may be unable to reconnect to the console/engine until the PC has restarted. • Use a USB cable that is 3 meters or shorter. Do not use a USB hub or any other USB device together with this system. Communication may be unstable if you do so. • USB connection is not guaranteed to be faster than a serial connection. Depending on your system, a serial connection may provide faster transmission speed and also be more stable. If you were able to establish a serial connection on the previous version, we recommend that you continue to use the serial connection. 89 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Automatic scrolling in the CH to MIX screen and MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen In the PAN/ROUTING function CH to MIX screen and in the MATRIX/ST function MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen, the screen will now scroll in response to cursor movement. For example as shown in the following illustrations, when the cursor in the CH to MIX screen is located at the lowest send point (PRE/POST button) for each MIX, pressing the CURSOR [ †] switch will cause the screen to scroll downward. Also, you can hold down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and press the CURSOR [ †] switch to move immediately to the PRE POINT section (the PRE EQ/PRE FADER line) without scrolling. In this way, scrollable areas in the CH to MIX screen and MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen will scroll when you press the CURSOR [π]/[†]/[√]/[®] switches in a direction that would move outside the border. Similarly, you can hold down the [SHIFT/GRAB] switch and press the CURSOR [ π]/[†]/[√]/[®] switches to directly move the cursor outside the border without scrolling. CURSOR [†] switch ➪ ➪ 90 [SHIFT/GRAB] switch + CURSOR [†] switch ON/OFF button for COMM IN ON/OFF button for COMM IN In the MONITOR A screen, a button has been added to turn the COMM IN function on/off. When this button is off, the COMM IN function will be off, and the COMM IN signal will not be input. This operation is different than setting LEVEL to –∞. 91 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Added functions in the PREFERENCE screen The following functions have been added to the UTILITY function PREFERENCE screen. ■ DCA MUTE FLASH INDICATE ON/OFF button If this button is on and a DCA group is muted, the mute switch of that DCA and the DCA ASSIGN LED of channels belonging to that group will blink. ■ USE STORE SW ON PANEL FOR AUTO STORE ON/OFF button If this button is on, you can use the Auto Store function (→p.64) from the panel [STORE] switch. ■ STEAL PATCH ON/OFF button If this button is on, and you attempt to patch in the PATCH screen, a warning will be issued that this unit is already patched. ■ SELECTED CH ON/OFF button If the SELECTED CH ON/OFF button in this section is turned on, pressing the [SEL] switch of an input channel or output channel will cause the cursor to move to the corresponding location in the screen that contains the parameters of that channel (or, switch to the screen that contains the corresponding channel). In previous ver- 92 sions, if a AUTO DISPLAY ON/OFF setting was turned on, the cursor would move only if the [SEL] switch were operated in a screen that contained that function. However since SELECTED CH ON/OFF can now be specified independently, you can enable cursor movement in response to the [SEL] switch in any screen, even if all other AUTO DISPLAY ON/OFF items are turned off. Supplementary explanation for existing functions Supplementary explanation for existing functions ■ MIRROR setting when set to CONSOLE CLOCK MASTER When using the system in Mirror mode, you can use the console as the word clock master rather than a clock generator, and distribute the word clock from the console’s WORD CLOCK OUT connector to the WORD CLOCK IN connectors of each unit. This will prevent each unit from being muted when you switch between engine A and B. 93 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table Please refer to page 35 in the appendix of the CS1D Reference Manual (Appendices). MIDI control change NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) assignment table INPUT (NRPN LSB 0-111 : CH NUMBER196,STIN1L-8R) Parameter name MIX (NRPN LSB 0-47,48-95 : MIX1-48) Parameter name NRPN NRPN MSB LSB MSB LSB ON/OFF 68 0-47 ON/OFF 0 0-111 FADER 68 48-95 FADER 1 0-111 BALANCE 69 0-47 PAN/BALANCE 2 0-111 RECALL SAFE ON/OFF 69 48-95 RECALL SAFE ON/OFF 3 0-111 COMP ON/OFF 70 0-47 GATE ON/OFF 4 0-111 COMP RATIO 70 48-95 GATE RANGE 5 0-111 COMP XOVER ON/OFF 71 0-47 GATE LPF ON/OFF 6 0-111 COMP XOVER FREQ 71 48-95 GATE LPF FREQ 7 0-111 COMP KNEE/WIDTH 72 0-47 GATE HPF ON/OFF 8 0-111 COMP OUT GAIN 72 48-95 GATE HPF FREQ 9 0-111 COMP THRESHOLD 73 0-47 GATE THRESHOLD 10 0-111 COMP ATTACK 73 48-95 GATE ATTACK 11 0-111 COMP RELEASE 74 0-47 GATE DECAY 12 0-111 EQ ON/OFF 74 48-95 GATE HOLD 13 0-111 EQ SUB-LOW TYPE,SLOPE 75 0-47 COMP ON/OFF 14 0-111 EQ HIGH TYPE,SLOPE 75 48-95 COMP RATIO 15 0-111 EQ SUB-LOW Q 76 0-47 COMP XOVER ON/OFF 16 0-111 EQ SUB-LOW F 76 48-95 COMP XOVER FREQ 17 0-111 EQ SUB-LOW G 77 0-47 COMP KNEE/WIDTH 18 0-111 EQ SUB-LOW BYPASS 77 48-95 COMP OUT GAIN 19 0-111 EQ LOW Q 78 0-47 COMP THRESHOLD 20 0-111 EQ LOW F 78 48-95 COMP ATTACK 21 0-111 EQ LOW G 79 0-47 COMP RELEASE 22 0-111 EQ LOW BYPASS 79 48-95 EQ LOW TYPE 23 0-111 EQ L-MID Q 80 0-47 EQ HIGH TYPE, LPF SLOPE 24 0-111 EQ L-MID F 80 48-95 EQ ON/OFF 25 0-111 EQ L-MID G 81 0-47 HPF ON/OFF 26 0-111 EQ L-MID BYPASS 81 48-95 EQ ATT 27 0-111 EQ MID Q 82 0-47 EQ LOW F 28 0-111 EQ MID F 82 48-95 EQ LOW G 29 0-111 EQ MID G 83 0-47 EQ LOW Q 30 0-111 EQ MID BYPASS 83 48-95 EQ L-MID F 31 0-111 EQ H-MID Q 84 0-47 EQ L-MID G 32 0-111 EQ HI-MID F 84 48-95 EQ L-MID Q 33 0-111 EQ H-MID G 85 0-47 EQ H-MID F 34 0-111 EQ H-MID BYPASS 85 48-95 EQ H-MID G 35 0-111 EQ HIGH Q 86 0-47 EQ H-MID Q 36 0-111 EQ HIGH F 86 48-95 EQ HIGH F 37 0-111 EQ HIGH G 87 0-47 EQ HIGH G 38 0-111 EQ HIGH BYPASS 87 48-95 EQ HIGH Q 39 0-111 HPF FREQ 40 0-111 94 MIDI control change NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) assignment table MATRIX (NRPN LSB 0-23,24-47,48-71,7295 : MATRIX1-24) Parameter name ST MASTER (NRPN LSB EVEN,ODD : STEREO MASTER A,B) NRPN Parameter name NRPN MSB LSB ON/OFF 90 0-23 ON/OFF MSB LSB 101 0,1 FADER 90 24-47 FADER 101 2,3 BALANCE 90 48-71 BALANCE 101 4,5 RECALL SAFE ON/OFF 90 72-96 RECALL SAFE ON/OFF 101 6,7 COMP ON/OFF 91 0-23 COMP ON/OFF 101 8,9 COMP RATIO 91 24-47 COMP RATIO 101 10,11 COMP XOVER ON/OFF 91 48-71 COMP XOVER ON/OFF 101 12,13 COMP XOVER FREQ 91 72-96 COMP XOVER FREQ 101 14,15 COMP KNEE/WIDTH 92 0-23 COMP KNEE/WIDTH 101 16,17 COMP OUT GAIN 92 24-47 COMP OUT GAIN 101 18,19 COMP THRESHOLD 92 48-71 COMP THRESHOLD 101 20,21 COMP ATTACK 92 72-96 COMP ATTACK 101 22,23 COMP RELEASE 93 0-23 COMP RELEASE 101 24,25 EQ ON/OFF 93 24-47 EQ ON/OFF 101 26,27 EQ SUB-LOW TYPE,SLOPE 93 48-71 EQ SUB-LOW TYPE, SLOPE 101 28,29 EQ HIGH TYPE,SLOPE 93 72-96 EQ HIGH TYPE, SLOPE 101 30,31 EQ SUB-LOW Q 94 0-23 EQ SUB-LOW Q 101 32,33 EQ SUB-LOW F 94 24-47 EQ SUB-LOW F 101 34,35 EQ SUB-LOW G 94 48-71 EQ SUB-LOW G 101 36,37 EQ SUB-LOW BYPASS 94 72-96 EQ SUB-LOW BYPASS 101 38,39 EQ LOW Q 95 0-23 EQ LOW Q 101 40,41 EQ LOW F 95 24-47 EQ LOW F 101 42,43 EQ LOW G 95 48-71 EQ LOW G 101 44,45 EQ LOW BYPASS 95 72-96 EQ LOW BYPASS 101 46,47 EQ L-MID Q 96 0-23 EQ L-MID Q 101 48,49 EQ L-MID F 96 24-47 EQ L-MID F 101 50,51 EQ L-MID G 96 48-71 EQ L-MID G 101 52,53 EQ L-MID BYPASS 96 72-96 EQ L-MID BYPASS 101 54,55 EQ MID Q 97 0-23 EQ MID Q 101 56,57 EQ MID F 97 24-47 EQ MID F 101 58,59 EQ MID G 97 48-71 EQ MID G 101 60,61 EQ MID BYPASS 97 72-96 EQ MID BYPASS 101 62,63 EQ H-MID Q 98 0-23 EQ H-MID Q 101 64,65 EQ H-MID F 98 24-47 EQ HI-MID F 101 66,67 EQ H-MID G 98 48-71 EQ H-MID G 101 68,69 EQ H-MID BYPASS 98 72-96 EQ HI-MID BYPASS 101 70,71 EQ HIGH Q 99 0-23 EQ HIGH Q 101 72,73 EQ HIGH F 99 24-47 EQ HIGH F 101 74,75 EQ HIGH G 99 48-71 EQ HIGH G 101 76,77 EQ HIGH BYPASS 99 72-96 EQ HIGH BYPASS 101 78,79 95 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual DCA (NRPN LSB 0-11,12-23 : DCA1-12) Parameter name DCA FADER(0-11) DCA MUTE(12-23) NRPN MSB LSB 102 0-11 102 12-23 EFFECT (NRPN LSB 0-7,8-15,16-23,24-31,3239,40-47,48-55,56-63,64-71,72-79,80-87,8895,96-103,104-111 : EFFECT1-8) GEQ (NRPN LSB 0-23,24-47,48-71,72-95,96119 : GEQ1-24) Parameter name NRPN MSB LSB GEQ ON/OFF 105 0-23 NOTCH1 ON/OFF 105 24-47 NOTCH2 ON/OFF 105 48-71 NOTCH3 ON/OFF 105 72-95 NOTCH4 ON/OFF 105 96-119 GEQ BAND1 G 106 0-23 MSB LSB GEQ BAND2 G 106 24-47 BYPASS ON/OFF 103 0-7 GEQ BAND3 G 106 48-71 ATT L 103 8-15 GEQ BAND4 G 106 72-95 106 96-119 Parameter name NRPN ATT R 103 16-23 GEQ BAND5 G WET BALANCE 103 24-31 GEQ BAND6 G 107 0-23 107 24-47 PARAMETER1 103 32-39 GEQ BAND7 G PARAMETER2 103 40-47 GEQ BAND8 G 107 48-71 107 72-95 PARAMETER3 103 48-55 GEQ BAND9 G PARAMETER4 103 56-63 GEQ BAND10 G 107 96-119 PARAMETER5 103 64-71 GEQ BAND11 G 108 0-23 PARAMETER6 103 72-79 GEQ BAND12 G 108 24-47 PARAMETER7 103 80-87 GEQ BAND13 G 108 48-71 108 72-95 PARAMETER8 103 88-95 GEQ BAND14 G PARAMETER9 103 96-103 GEQ BAND15 G 108 96-119 109 0-23 PARAMETER10 103 104-111 GEQ BAND16 G PARAMETER11 104 0-7 GEQ BAND17 G 109 24-47 109 48-71 PARAMETER12 104 8-15 GEQ BAND18 G PARAMETER13 104 16-23 GEQ BAND19 G 109 72-95 109 96-119 PARAMETER14 104 24-31 GEQ BAND20 G PARAMETER15 104 32-39 GEQ BAND21 G 110 0-23 PARAMETER16 104 40-47 GEQ BAND22 G 110 24-47 PARAMETER17 104 48-55 GEQ BAND23 G 110 48-71 PARAMETER18 104 56-63 GEQ BAND24 G 110 72-95 110 96-119 PARAMETER19 104 64-71 GEQ BAND25 G PARAMETER20 104 72-79 GEQ BAND26 G 111 0-23 80-87 GEQ BAND27 G 111 24-47 GEQ BAND28 G 111 48-71 GEQ BAND29 G 111 72-95 GEQ BAND30 G 111 96-119 GEQ BAND31 G 112 0-23 NOTCH1 Q 112 24-47 NOTCH2 Q 112 48-71 NOTCH3 Q 112 72-95 NOTCH4 Q 112 96-119 NOTCH1 F 113 24-47 NOTCH2 F 113 48-71 NOTCH3 F 113 72-95 NOTCH4 F 113 96-119 PARAMETER21 96 104 MIDI control change parameter assignment table MIDI control change parameter assignment table Use this table to make a note of the parameters that you have assigned to control numbers in the MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen. In the “PARAMETER FROM” columns, write the name and NRPN# (→p.94) of the parameter that you want to operate via the corresponding control number. In the “PARAMETER TO (MULTI MODE)” columns, write the NRPN# that is +15 greater than the above value, and its parameter name. You can use the corresponding control change to operate the “PARAMETER FROM” parameter in Single mode, or to operate the “PARAMETER FROM” through “PARAMETER TO” parameters in Multi mode. If you execute INITIALIZE, all control numbers will be set to “NO ASSIGN.” CTRL CHG.# PARAMETER FROM NRPN# Parameter name PARAMETER TO(MULTI MODE) CH NRPN# Parameter name CH 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43 44 97 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual CTRL CHG.# 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 98 PARAMETER FROM NRPN# Parameter name PARAMETER TO(MULTI MODE) CH NRPN# Parameter name CH MIDI control change parameter assignment table CTRL CHG.# PARAMETER FROM NRPN# Parameter name PARAMETER TO(MULTI MODE) CH NRPN# Parameter name CH 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 99 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual MIDI Data Format 1. TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA Otherwise, INT ( MIDI data - Z ) / X ) = parameter 1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE Transmission: If parameter = 0, then MIDI data = 0 If parameter = MAX, then MIDI data = (127 or 16383 in the case of word data) Otherwise, ( X x parameter ) + INT ( X / 2 ) + Z = MIDI data 1.1.1 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) BANK SELECT <Reception> In PROGRAM CHANGE SINGLE CH mode when [Bank] is ON, this message can be received via the MIDI IN for BANK SELECT reception is enabled, if the [Rx CH] matches. This will specify the bank for a subsequently-received program change. <Transmission> In SINGLE CH mode when [Bank] is ON, and you recall a scene memory or effect library, a bank select message will be transmitted (before the program change message) from the selected MIDI OUT, on the specified [Tx CH]. STATUS 1011nnnn 00000000 0vvvvvvv 00100000 0vvvvvvv Bn 00 vv 20 vv Control Change Bank Select MSB MSB Value Bank Select LSB LSB Value 1.1.2 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) ASSIGN <Reception> If CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN is ON and CONTROL CHANGE is set to SINGLE CH mode, this message can be received from the MIDI IN for which reception is enabled, if the [Rx CH] matches. The parameter that is assigned in the [Control Change Table] will be modified. In MULTI mode, any MIDI channel will be received. The received MIDI channel (i.e., its number) will be added to the number of the parameter assigned in the [Control Change Table] (the same number as NRPN) to determine the parameter that will be modified by the message. This message is not echoed, but will be transmitted as described below even when a parameter is modified as a result of the MIDI reception. <Transmission> In SINGLE CH mode, when a parameter assigned in the [Control Change Table] has been modified, this message will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT for the selected [Tx CH]. In MULTI CH mode, when a parameter corresponding to a parameter number (same as NRPN) assigned in the [Control Change Table] +15 or less is modified, this message will be transmitted from the selected MIDI OUT, with the MIDI channel representing the difference from the parameter number. If the parameter is assigned to more than one control number, the message will be transmitted using the lowestnumbered control number. If a parameter with a resolution of greater than 7 bits is assigned to a control number in the range of 1–31, that control number +32 can be assigned as the LSB of the same parameter. STATUS 1011nnnn 0ccccccc Bn cc 0vvvvvvv vv Control Change Control No.(1-5,7-31,3337,39-95,102-119) Value The transmitted and received values are calculated as follows. (The same applies to the NRPN messages discussed later.) Given the following: (128 or 16384 in the case of word data) / (number of parameter steps) = X ...Y INT (( Y + 1) / 2 ) = Z Reception: If ( MIDI data -Z ) < 0, then parameter = 0 If (( MIDI data - Z ) / Z ) > MAX, then parameter = MAX 100 1.1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) NRPN <Reception> If NRPN is ON, and if the [Rx CH] matches, this message can be received at the MIDI IN for which reception is enabled. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the received NRPN number and the parameter that will change. (See the “MIDI control change NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) assignment table”.) This message is not echoed, but the transmission described below will occur even if a parameter is modified due to MIDI reception. <Transmission> If NRPN is ON and a parameter is modified, this message will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT selected by [Tx CH]. If both CONTROL ASSIGN and NRPN are simultaneously ON, an assigned parameter will be transmitted as a control change. If the parameter has a resolution of less than 7 bits, only the MSB data will be transmitted. STATUS 1011nnnn 01100010 0vvvvvvv 01100011 0vvvvvvv 00000110 0vvvvvvv 00110110 0vvvvvvv Bn 62 vv 63 vv 06 vv 26 vv Control Change NRPN LSB MSB Value NRPN MSB LSB Value DATA ENTRY MSB MSB Value DATA ENTRY LSB LSB Value 60 h (INC) and 61 h (DEC) are not supported. 1.1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn) <Reception> If [Program Change Rx] is ON, this message can be received at the MIDI IN for which reception is enabled, if the [Rx CH] matches in the case of SINGLE mode. However if [OMNI] is ON, this message will be received regardless of the channel. In the case of MULTI mode, all MIDI channels will be received, and will be divided into banks according to the channel. If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, this message will be echoed. A scene memory or effect library will be recalled according to the settings of the [Program Change Table]. <Transmission> If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message will be transmitted from the selected MIDI OUT on the [Tx CH] channel (in the case of SINGLE mode), when a scene or effect library is recalled. In the case of MULTI mode, this will be transmitted on the MIDI channel according to the bank. If the recalled memory number is assigned to more than one program number, the program number for the lowest-numbered channel of the lowest-numbered bank will be transmitted. STATUS DATA 1100nnnn 0nnnnnnn Cn nn Program Change Program No.(0-127) MIDI Data Format 3. RECEIVE CONDITION 1.2 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0-F7) 1.2.1 MOTION CONTROL STATE (MCS) MMC STOP/PLAY/FORWARD/REWIND BANK ON NRPN Rx ON <Transmission> These messages are transmitted by assignment to USER DEFINE or GPI. [DEVICE NO.] specifies the transmission destination. STATUS ID No. Device ID 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd F0 7F dd Command 00000110 06 0ccccccc cc EOX 11110111 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(mcc)sub-id Command String [1]:Stop [3]:Deferred Play [4]:Fast Forward [5]:Rewind End of Exclusive MIDI Rx CH? CONTROL CHANGE BANK SELECT $BnH CONTROL CHANGE NRPN $BnH SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE PARAMETER REQUEST $F0H $43H $3nH MIDI IN ASSIGN Rx ON MIDI Rx CH? or MULTI ON CONTROL CHANGE $BnH PGM Rx ON MIDI Rx CH? or OMNI ON or MULTI ON PROGRAM CHANGE $CnH PGM ECHO ON MIDI OUT 4. PARAMETER CHANGE BASIC FORMAT 1.2.2 MOTION CONTROL PROCESS (MCP) MMC LOCATE (target) STATUS ID No. 11110000 01000011 F0 43 <Transmission> This message is transmitted by assignment to USER DEFINE or GPI. [DEVICE NO.] specifies the transmission destination. (This requires setting the ID of the receiving device.) SUB STATUS 0pppnnnn pn STATUS ID No. Device ID 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd F0 7F dd GROUP ID MODEL ID PARAM TYPE DATA 3e 09 tt dd0 Command 00000110 06 EOX 01000100 00000110 00000001 0tthhhhh 0mmmmmmm 0sssssss 0fffffff 0sssssss 11110111 44 06 01 th mm ss ff ss F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command(mcc)sub-id Locate byte count "target" sub command frame type, hour minute second frame sub-frame(only'0') End of Exclusive <Reception> Once this message has been received, and there is an interval of 300 ms during which nothing is received, Running Status will be cleared, and MIDI communication will be initialized. 11111110 FE Active Sensing <Reception> These messages can be received via the port that is enabled for reception. The VALUE RESPONSE message described below is sent in reply to this message. 11110000 01000011 F0 43 SUB STATUS 0pppnnnn 3n GROUP ID MODEL ID PARAM TYPE DATA 3e 09 00 dd0 dd1 dd2 dd3 F7 2. TRANSMISSION CONDITION CONTROL CHANGE BANK SELECT $BnH BANK ON CONTROL CHANGE NRPN $BnH NRPN Tx ON SYTEM EXCLUSIVE FUNCTION CALL $F0H $43H $1nH NRPN or ASSIGN Tx ON EOX ASSIGN Tx ON PROGRAM CHANGE $CnH PGM Tx ON USER DEFINE,GPI MMC $F0H $7FH $nnH $06H PGM ECHO ON MIDI IN MIDI Tx CH? or MULTI ON 00111110 00001001 00000000 0ttttttt 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd 11110111 System Exclusive Message Manufacture's ID No.(YAMAHA) parameter request n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16) MODEL ID(digital mixer) Device code(PM1D) Current Memory data type addressHIGH(BIT13-7) addressLOW(BIT6-0) REQUEST BYTE COUNT End of Exclusive data type 0x00 SCENE LOW ADDRESS(BIT14 LOW) 0x10 SCENE HIGH ADDRESS(BIT14 HIGH) 0x0a ENGINE SETUP MIDI Tx CH? ( RESPONSE FOR PARAMETER REQUEST $F0H $43H $1nH ) CONTROL CHANGE $BnH ddn F7 PARAMETER VALUE REQUEST (type 0x00:Current Memory) STATUS ID No. 1.3 ACTIVE SENSING (Fe) STATUS EOX 00111110 00001001 0ttttttt 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 11110111 System Exclusive Message Manufacture's ID No.(YAMAHA) p=mode 1:parameter change or response for request 3:parameter request n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16) MODEL ID(digital mixer) Device code(PM1D) (TYPE) DATA 0 : DATA n End of Exclusive MIDI OUT PARAMETER VALUE RESPONSE (type 0x00:Current Memory) <Transmission> This message is sent in reply when the above VALUE REQUEST is received. STATUS ID No. 11110000 01000011 F0 43 SUB STATUS 0pppnnnn 1n System Exclusive Message Manufacture's ID No.(YAMAHA) response for request 101 PM1D System Software V1.5 Supplementary Manual GROUP ID MODEL ID PARAM TYPE DATA EOX 00111110 00001001 00000000 0ttttttt 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 11110111 3e 09 00 dd0 dd1 dd2 dd3 n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16) MODEL ID(digital mixer) Device code(PM1D) Current Memory data type addressHIGH(BIT13-7) addressLOW(BIT6-0) data ddn F7 End of Exclusive Data type: The “data” field contains the requested number of data bytes from the requested address, converted from 8-bit to 7-bit form. The MSB's for seven bytes will be the first byte of data. Example) [seven bytes of 8 bit data] [8 bytes of 7 bit data] 80 01 82 03 84 05 06 → 54 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 The “data type” is the same as for a Parameter Value Request. PARAMETER CHANGE (type 0x02:function call) <Transmission> If transmission is ON for Control Change ASSIGN or NRPN, this message is transmitted when an operation causing multiple parameters to be modified simultaneously is performed. This message is not received. STATUS ID No. 11110000 01000011 F0 43 SUB STATUS 0pppnnnn 1n GROUP ID MODEL ID PARAM TYPE DATA 3e 09 02 dd0 dd1 dd2 dd3 F7 EOX 00111110 00001001 00000010 0ttttttt 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd 11110111 System Exclusive Message Manufacture's ID No.(YAMAHA) response for request n=0-15(Device Channel No.1-16) MODEL ID(digital mixer) Device code(PM1D) function call function category/number channel/number2 type End of Exclusive function category/number number2,channel -------------------------------------------------------------0x04 EFF Lib Recall LIB No.Bit7-1 LIB No..Bit0, EFF No.0-7 (LIB No.1-199, EFF No.0-7) 0x04 EFF Copy No.Bit7-1 No.Bit0, EFF No.0-7 (No.255, EFF No.0-7) 0x05 GEQ Recall Category Library 126 GEQ No.0-23 0x05 GEQ Copy,Link No.127 GEQ No.0-23 0x06 IN EQ Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-111 0x06 IN EQ Copy Category Copy 127 CH No.0-111 0x07 OUT EQ Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-73 0x07 OUT EQ Copy Category Copy 127 CH No.0-73 0x08 IN GATE Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-111 0x08 IN GATE Copy Category Copy 127 CH No.0-111 0x09 IN COMP Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-111 0x09 IN COMP Change Category Copy 127 CH No.0-111 0x0a OUT COMP Lib RecallCategory Library 126 CH No.0-73 0x0a OUT COMP Change Category Copy 127 CH No.0-73 0x0b IN CH Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-111 0x0c OUT CH Lib Recall Category Library 126 CH No.0-73 0x0d IN CH COPY Source CH No.0-111 Destination CH No.0-111 0x0e OUT CH COPY Source CH No.0-73 Destination CH No.0-73 0x0f IN CH PAIR/LR-MONO *1 CH No.0-111 0x10 OUT CH PAIR *1 CH No.0-73 0x11 SETUP CHANGE 127 0 (*1 0:PAIR L->R, 1:PAIR R->L, 2:RESET BOTH, 3:PAIR RELEASE 4:L-MONO, 5:R-MONO, 6:LR-MONO, 7:L,R,LR-MONO RELEASE ) type For EFF BIT5-0:EFFECT TYPE For GEQ BIT6:MONO/LINK For EQ, GATE, COMP, CH, COPY, PAIR BIT6:MONO/PAIR, BIT5-3:reserved BIT2:GATE TYPE, BIT1, 0:COMP TYPE For SETUP 0:LOAD, 102 1:RECALL SAFE INPUT ALL ON, 2:RECALL SAFE INPUT ALL OFF, 3:RECALL SAFE OUTPUT ALL ON, 4:RECALL SAFE OUTPUT ALL OFF EFF LIBRARY is transmitted when you recall a number that is not assigned to a program change. YAMAHA [Digital Audio Mixing System Internal Parameters] MIDI Implementation Chart Model: PM1D Function... Date: 28 Jun. 2002 Version: 1.5 Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Channel Default Changed 1–16 1–16 1–16 1–16 Memorized Mode Default Messages Altered X X ************** OMNI off/OMNI on X X Memorized True Voice X ************** X X Note Number Velocity Note On Note Off X X X X After Touch Key’s Ch’s X X X X X X 0,32 1-5,7-31,33-37 39-95,102-119 98,99 O O O O Bank Select Assignable O O 6,38 O O NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) Data Entry (for NRPN) 0–127 ************** 0–127 0.0-99.9 Assignable O O *1 Pitch bend Control Change Prog Change :True# System Exclusive System Common :Song Pos :Song Sel :Tune X X X X X X System Real Time :Clock :Commands X X X X Aux Messages :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF :Active Sense :Reset X X X X X X O X Notes *1: Parameter Change/Request and MMC. Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO O: Yes X: No IP 104 Printed in Japan M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2002 Yamaha Corporation